JP2021010559A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having characteristics in control of a game state.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a set game that can execute a plurality of games a plurality of times, can shift a game state to a predetermined state regarding the profit of a player in connection with the execution of the set game a predetermined number of times, and can shift the game state to a specific state advantageous to the player when a specific state shift lottery is won. The specific state is not set over a plurality of times of the set game, and a second set game after the first set game can be started after a first set game among the predetermined number of times of the set game. When the specific state shift lottery is won in the first set game in a state other than the specific state, there is a case in which the game state can be shifted to the specific state in the first set game, and a case in which the game state can be shifted to the specific state in the second set game without shifting in the first set game. Before shifting to the specific state, a specific performance regarding whether or not to shift to the specific state can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 205

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, there is a game table capable of executing a cycle effect that gives a profit to a player when the ceiling cycle is reached (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a conventional game table, when the player shifts to another game state in the periodic game, the time until the ceiling cycle may become long and the player's motivation to play may decrease, so that the player shifts to another game state. It is conceivable that the periodic game will proceed even after the game is played.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-296354

However, even when the periodic game is advanced in another game state, the number of games in the periodic game after the return may decrease more than necessary, and the player may lose the expectation for the periodic game. There was room for improvement in the control of the game state at the game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table characterized by controlling a game state.

The game console according to the present invention is provided with a variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each, and a game is played by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game medium. Is a game table in which one game is completed by deriving the display result to the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display unit. Therefore, it is configured so that a set game capable of executing a plurality of games can be executed a plurality of times, and can be transitioned to a predetermined state regarding the interests of the player in connection with the execution of the set game a predetermined number of times. When the special state transition lottery is won, it is configured to be able to shift to the specific state, and the specific state is a state different from the predetermined state, and is in the specific state as compared with the case where the specific state is not shifted. The transition is configured to be more advantageous to the player, and the specific state is configured so as not to be set across a plurality of times of the set game. After a certain set game (hereinafter, referred to as "first set game") in the set game of a predetermined number of times, a certain set game following the first set game (hereinafter, "second set"). "Game") is configured to be startable, and when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in a state other than the specific state, the specific state is entered in the first set game. It is configured so that there are cases where it is possible to shift and cases where it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game without shifting in the first set game, and before shifting to the specific state, It is a game table characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect regarding whether or not to shift to the specific state.

Further, the game console according to the present invention is provided with a variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each, and a predetermined number of bets is set for one game using a game medium. As a result, the game can be started, and one game is completed by deriving the display result to the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display unit. A state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of states relating to the player's advantage, a set game control means capable of executing control regarding a set game capable of executing a plurality of games, and a set game control means capable of executing control related to the set game. The set game control means is a means capable of executing control for executing the set game a plurality of times, and the state setting means is a profit of the player in relation to the execution of the set game a predetermined number of times. It is a means capable of setting a predetermined state with respect to the above, and the state setting means is configured to be able to shift to a specific state when a specific state transition lottery is won, and the specific state is different from the predetermined state. It is a state, and it is configured so that the case where the player shifts to the specific state is more advantageous than the case where the state does not shift to the specific state, and the specific state spans a plurality of times of the set game. The set game control means is configured so as not to be set, and the set game control means is a set game (hereinafter, referred to as "first set game") among the set games of the predetermined number of times. Is a means capable of executing control to start a certain set game (hereinafter, referred to as "second set game") next to the first set game after the first set game, and the first set game in a state other than the specific state. When the specific state transition lottery is won in one set game, the case where the specific state can be shifted to the specific state in the first set game and the case where the first set game does not shift and the second set game is performed. In the above, it is configured so that it may be possible to shift to the specific state, and it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect regarding whether or not to shift to the specific state before shifting to the specific state. It is a featured game console.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by controlling the game state.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention developed in a plane. (B) It is a figure which shows the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. (A) The image of the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 is illustrated. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the judge state production table. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (D) is a figure which showed the modification of the LMT state production table. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG. (B) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process of step S201 of FIG. 14 (a). (A) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the effect state control process A of step S106 of FIG. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of each game common processing in step S401 of FIG. 15A in detail. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the low navigation state processing A of the step S404 of FIG. 17A in detail. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state transition processing of step S601 of FIG. 16A in detail. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 15A. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state common processing A of step S801 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the normal state processing A of step S803 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing A of step S805 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT1 state processing A of step S807 of FIG. 17 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the judge state processing A of step S809 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A of step S811 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the pull-back state processing A of step S813 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process of step S814 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the effect state control process B of step S113 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing B of step S1704 of FIG. 26 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state processing B of step S1802 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing B of step S1804 of FIG. 27. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT1 state processing B of step S1806 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the judge state processing B of step S1808 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state processing B of step S1810 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the pull-back state processing B of step S1812 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the LMT state processing B of step S1813 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state end processing of step S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state processing A which concerns on modification 1 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state processing A which concerns on modification 2 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing A which concerns on modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the finalized notification state processing A which concerns on modification 2 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing A which concerns on modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing B which concerns on modification 3. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. (B), (c) is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct answer operation order of the push order combination of this embodiment. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main processing which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure which corresponds to the main control part main processing which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect state control process A which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure corresponding to the effect state control process A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 15 (a). (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of each game common processing which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure corresponding to every game common processing which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 15 (b). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing A which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure which corresponds to the high navigation state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production process which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect state control process B which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure which corresponds to the effect state control process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing B which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure which corresponds to the high navigation state processing B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. In the high navigation state, when the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state → judge state → LMT state (limit state) and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, the counter when only a 3-card betting game is played. It is a figure which showed an example of the update display. In the high navigation state, when the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state → judge state → LMT state (limit state) and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, both the 3-card bet game and the 2-card bet game are played. It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when it performed. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of a counter when a judge effect is not performed by a two-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when a judge effect and an ED effect are not performed by a two-card betting game. In the high navigation state, when the production state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) and then to the normal state in the low navigation state, the ED production and freeze production when only the 3-card betting game is performed. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) In the high navigation state, when the production state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, a 3-card bet game and a 2-card bet game are performed. It is a figure which showed an example of the ED production and the freeze production at the time. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 56 (a). It is a figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion effect at the time of continuing a two-card betting game in a judge state of a high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the 2nd freeze effect at the time of performing a three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the 2nd freeze effect at the time of performing a two-card betting game in the middle of the AT2 state. It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of performing a three-card betting game. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of shifting to the LMT state after performing a two-card betting game in a normal state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of continuing a two-card betting game in a normal state. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect performed after a BB game. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect performed during the internal winning of BB. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the production when the interlocking production progresses normally. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the production when the interlocking production does not proceed normally. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the ED effect is started while the interlocking effect does not proceed normally. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the interlocking effect at the time of continuing a two-card betting game in a judge state. It is a figure which showed the interlocking effect and the modification. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the production when a three-card betting game is performed when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when the two-card betting game is performed when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification of the flow of the production at the time of performing a three-card betting game when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification of the flow of the production when the two-card betting game is performed when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. It is a figure which showed the specific example of the flow of an effect including a specific display. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when three-card game is performed in a high navigation state, it reaches the ceiling, and the production state shifts in the order of a normal state-> a confirmed notification state-> AT1 state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when the two-card betting game is performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is not reached, and the production state is maintained in the normal state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when three-card game and two-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state and reach the ceiling, and the production state shifts in the order of normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state. .. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production in the case where a three-card game and a two-card bet game are performed in a high navigation state, and the game shifts to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production in the case where a 3-card game and a 2-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state, and the game shifts to a low navigation state without reaching the ceiling. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when a three-card game and a two-card bet game are performed in a definite notification state of a high navigation state, and the promotion counter is not updated. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when the operation navigation is not performed in the confirmation notification state of a high navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when the AT1 type is promoted in the definite notification state of a high navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when it did not reach the ceiling in the definite notification state of a high navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when it reached the ceiling in the definite notification state of a high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of performing a three-card betting game in the LMT state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of performing a two-card betting game in the LMT state. It is a figure which showed the modification of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). It is a figure which showed the outline of the invention 1-1 of this application. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-2. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-3. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-4. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-5. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-6. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-7. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-8. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-9. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure which corresponds to AT2 state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 23. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the judge state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure which corresponds to the judge state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 23. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the AT2 initial number lottery table. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state processing B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure which corresponds to AT2 state processing B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 32. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the pull-back state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure which corresponds to the pull-back state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 33. (B) It is a figure which showed the transition example of the AT state in the high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts to the normal state of a low navigation state after shifting in the order of AT2 state-> judge state-> pull-back state in a high navigation state. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts to the normal state of a low navigation state after shifting from the AT2 state to the LMT state in the high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts in the order of AT2 state-> judge state-> pull-back state-> AT2 state in the high navigation state, and is the figure which showed the flow of the effect described with reference to FIG. The continuation is shown. (B) In the high navigation state, the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state → LMT state, then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, shifts to the high navigation state again, and the production state shifts to the normal state → the confirmed notification state → It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of transition in the order of the AT1 state, and shows the continuation of the effect explained with reference to FIG. 92 (b). (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the notification at the time of establishment of a combination in the AT2 state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the notification at the time of establishment of a combination in the LMT state. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of correcting the AT2 initial number of times. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of displaying the remaining game number in the AT2 state. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of displaying the remaining game number in the AT2 state. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the result is displayed after the transition of the AT2 state. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the result display is not performed after the end of the AT2 state, and is the figure which corresponds to FIG. 95 (a). It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 2-1. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 2-2. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 2-3. It is a figure which showed the state transition of a PUSH button operation, a cross key operation, a closing operation, and a lever operation. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of various operations for switching the display of a normal screen and a demo screen in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of various operations in the case of performing volume adjustment using a setting screen in time series. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of various operations in the case of performing volume adjustment without displaying a setting screen in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of (D), (E) and other various operations in time series. It is a figure which showed the character selection operation in chronological order when the production state shifts from a judge state to an AT2 state in a high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed Example 5 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed Example 7 of a character selection operation in time series. (C) It is a figure which showed Example 8 of a character selection operation in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification 1 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification 2 of the character selection operation in time series. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 3-1. It is a figure which showed the outline of the invention 3-2 of this application. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention developed in a plane. (B) It is a figure which shows the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination in a three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. (C) It is a figure which shows a part of the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination in a two-card betting game. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. (A) The image of the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 is illustrated. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (C) is a figure which showed the modification of the LMT state production table. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the effect control process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG. 117. (B) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process of step S201 of FIG. 121 (a). (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process A in step S106 of FIG. 117. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of each game common processing of step S401 of FIG. 122A in detail. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the low navigation state processing A of the step S404 of FIG. 122 (a) in detail. (B) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state transition process of step S601 of FIG. 123 (a). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing A of the step S405 of FIG. 122 (a) in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state common processing A of step S801 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state process A of step S803 of FIG. 124 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing A of step S805 of FIG. 124. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT1 state processing A of step S807 of FIG. 124 in detail. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table used for AT2 scheduled acquisition number addition lottery. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A of step S811 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the pull-back state processing A of step S813 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process of step S814 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect state control process B of step S113 of FIG. 117 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing B of step S1704 of FIG. 132 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state processing B of step S1802 of FIG. 133 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing B of step S1804 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the AT1 start setting process of step S2006 of FIG. 135 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT1 state processing B of step S1806 of FIG. 133 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state processing B of step S1810 of FIG. 133 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the pull-back state processing B of step S1812 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the LMT state processing B of step S1813 of FIG. 133 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state end processing of step S114 of FIG. 117 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the number display related processing of step S3301 of FIG. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the update of the count value of various counters, and the control of a display in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the specific example 1 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. It is a figure which showed the specific example 2 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. It is a figure which showed the specific example 3 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. It is a figure which showed the specific example 4 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. It is a figure which showed the specific example 5 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. (A) It is a figure which showed the specific example 6 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. (B) It is a figure which showed the specific example 7 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. It is a figure which showed the specific example 8 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. It is a figure which showed the specific example 9 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. (A), (b) It is a figure which showed the specific example 10 of the update and display of the count value of various counters. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition of the three-card game explained using FIG. 151 (a). (D) It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition of the two-card game explained using FIG. 151 (b). (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of performing the two-card game after the three-card game described with reference to FIG. 151 (a), and then performing the three-card game again. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition of the two-card game explained using FIG. 151 (b). (C), (d) It is a figure which showed the modification 1 of the update and the display of the count value of various counters. (A), (b) It is a figure which showed the modification 2 of the update and the display of the count value of various counters. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 4-1. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 4-2. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 4-3. It is a figure which showed the outline of the invention 4-4 of this application. (A) It is a figure which showed the structural example of the "first advantageous gaming state" which concerns on this invention. (B) It is a figure which showed the example which shifts from the normal gaming state to the "second advantageous gaming state" which concerns on this invention via the "first advantageous gaming state" which concerns on this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for determining a high navigation state scenario. (B) It is a figure which shows an example of the high navigation state scenario table. (C) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for determination of the development season. (D) It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ transition lottery table. (E) It is a figure which shows an example of the AT promotion lottery table. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for determining AT transferable points. (B) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for determining the AT transition point. (C) It is a figure which shows an example of the AT transition point effect table. (D) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for determining a season type. (A) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of low navigation state processing A. (B) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the high navigation state transition processing which concerns on Embodiment 5. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the normal state start setting process (step S704) in the high navigation state transition process explained using FIG. 161 (b). It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the high navigation state common processing A which concerns on Embodiment 5. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the normal state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 5. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the NM1 state processing A (step S1021) in the normal state processing A explained with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the NM2 state processing A (step S1023) in the normal state processing A explained with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the CZ state processing A (step S1055) in the NM2 state processing A explained with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the NM3 state process A (step S1024) in the normal state process A explained with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the finalized notification state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 5. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the effect state control B which concerns on Embodiment 5. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the normal state processing B which concerns on Embodiment 5. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the NM1 state processing B (step S1913) in the normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 171. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the cycle start setting process (step S1925) in NM1 state process B described with reference to FIG. 172. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the seasonal start setting process (step S1938) in the cycle start setting process described with reference to FIG. 173. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the NM2 state process B (step S1915) in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. 171. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the CZ state start setting process (step S1960) in NM2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 175. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the CZ state processing B (step S1961) in the NM2 state processing B described with reference to FIG. 175. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the NM3 state process B (step S1916) in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. 171. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the finalized notification state processing B which concerns on Embodiment 5. It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags in the transition example 1 of an effect state in time series. It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags in the transition example 1 of an effect state in time series. It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags in the transition example 1 of an effect state in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the change of various displays and effects in time series in the transition example 1 of the effect state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of a certain effect performed in a specific effect mode. It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags, various displays and effects in time series in transition example 2 of an effect state. It is a figure which showed the various counters and flags in the transition example 3 of the effect state, and the change of various displays and effects in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags, various displays and effects in time series in transition example 4 of an effect state. It is a figure which showed the various counters and flags in the transition example 5 of the effect state, and the change of various displays and effects in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification of the transition of an effect state. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification of the transition example 3 of the effect state explained using FIG. 185. (C) It is a figure which showed the modification of the specific effect mode explained using FIG. 183 (b). (A) It is a figure which showed the modification of the display. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification of the suggestion effect. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 5-1 to 5-2. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of NM2 state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 6. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the CZ precursor setting process (step S1057) in the NM2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 191. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the table (this precursor) for determining the number of CZ precursor games. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the table (Gase precursor) for determining the number of CZ precursor games. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of CZ state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for determining the display content at the start of a season. (A) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the display process at the start of a season which concerns on Embodiment 6. (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of the season start display process 1 (step S3003) in the season start display process described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). (C) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the season start display process 2 (step S3005) in the season start display process described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the set game. (B-1) It is a figure which showed the flow of the game in time series in the case of winning the CZ transition (Example 1). (B-2) It is a figure which showed the flow of the game in the case of winning the CZ transition (Example 2) in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the game in time series in the case of winning the CZ transition (Example 3). (B-1) is a diagram showing a comparative example with the CZ transition winning (Example 4) described with reference to FIG. 197 (b-2). (B-2) It is a figure which showed the flow of the game in time series in the case of winning the CZ transition (Example 4). (A-1) is a diagram showing a comparative example with the CZ transition winning (Example 5) described with reference to FIG. 198 (a-2). (A-2) It is a figure which showed the flow of the game in time series in the case of winning the CZ transition (Example 5). (B) It is a figure which showed the example of transitioning from a normal state to an AT1 state in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags at the time of execution of the precursor effect of the CZ transition winning (Example 2) explained using FIG. 196 (b-2) in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags at the time of execution of the precursor effect of the CZ transition winning (Example 4) explained using FIG. 197 (b-2) in chronological order. (C) It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags at the time of execution of the precursor effect of the CZ transition winning (Example 5) explained using FIG. 198 (a-2) in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the normal production (Gase precursor production) in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the precursor effect which concerns on Example 1 in time series. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the precursor effect which concerns on Example 2 in time series. (D) It is a figure which showed the change of various counters and flags at the time of execution of a precursor effect in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the change example of the precursor effect. (B-1) It is a figure which showed the example of changing the seasonal production and the seasonal display. (B-2) It is a figure which showed the modification example of the CZ transition notification effect. (C) It is a figure which showed the example of changing the start timing of a precursor effect. (A) The first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) described with reference to FIG. 196 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of a game when a special game is executed in SET1 in chronological order. (B) is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 197 (b-2), and FIG. 202 (c) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in chronological order when the game shifts to the special game state during the execution of the precursor effect. .. (A-1) It is a figure which showed the set game (cycle) which concerns on modification 1. FIG. (A-2) It is a figure which showed the set game (cycle) which concerns on modification 2. (A-3) It is a figure which showed the set game (cycle) which concerns on modification 3. (B-1) It is a figure which shows an example of the AT continuation scenario table. (B-2) It is a figure which shows the modification of the high navigation state scenario table explained using FIG. 159 (b). It is a figure for demonstrating the transformation example of the effect state. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 6-1 to 6-2.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110-112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

The notification lamp 123 tells the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp that informs you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up after the bonus notification for notifying the confirmation of the bonus until the end of the bonus game. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert a medal at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. is there.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 for the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 for the stop operation is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamp to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is described as lighting, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board in which the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is housed. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supply to the control unit and each device. Further, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the closing operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage is less than 9v) is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and is capable of communicating with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can send a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various indicators, and the like are stored. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and uses the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110-112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 19 frame of the left reel 110 is a "bell symbol", the number 19 frame of the middle reel 111 is a "blank symbol", and the number 18 frame of the right reel 112 is "seven 2". "Designs" are arranged respectively. In the following, "Seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "blue 7 (symbol)", and "seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "red 7 (symbol)".

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (b). FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a winning line of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is placed on the upper design of the left reel and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2). The displayed symbol is the left reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the left reel 110 lower (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel 111 upper (4 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed at the position (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the upper symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed at the middle of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). The displayed symbol is the upper symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol on the right reel and the lower symbol on the right reel 112 (9 shown in the figure). The symbols displayed at (position; symbol position 9) are called the lower symbols on the right reel, and the symbols on each reel 110-112 are vertically three on each reel 110-112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of the middle winning line L1 composed of the left reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 2), the middle reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 5), and the right reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a stop position of a symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination described in FIGS. 5A and 5B described later. It is a line that determines whether or not a combination is displayed. FIG. 4B shows the middle winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can bet three or two medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, no winning line is valid and three or two medals are inserted. The winning line L1 becomes effective when one bet is placed. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

Moreover, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three upward-sloping winning lines may be set as valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5A and 5B. It should be noted that FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2) and a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13, small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 5). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations are sometimes referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1, The prizes for the special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 13 are included.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the 3-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the 2-card betting game. No medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2" for the special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-Seven 1" for the special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). ..

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special) If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 cards are won by BB1 and 55 cards are won by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special gaming state (RT4) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 13)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay 2 (directed replay 1), and replay 3 for replay. (Direction replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 5)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 (cherry), small role. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control selects one from a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination described later), and the selected reel stop is performed. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data has an allowance control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display any combination of winning combinations on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, the case where a certain winning combination is internally won, or the case where a special combination is internally winning (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed in the same range within the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbols are arranged in more than four frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbols will be on the winning line. Does not stop at.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example of prohibition control, for example, when the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (flag is being carried over), the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed in the same range within the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 6 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination. The item "No." in each figure is a convenient number assigned to each lottery result, and in the case of a single role, one "No." corresponds to one "condition device". However, in the case of duplicate combinations, one "No." corresponds to a plurality of "conditional devices".

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery by acquiring numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. The lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) among other game states (for example, a game state excluding the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A.

Re-game The winning combination that is internally won in the low probability state is special role 1 (condition device No. 1. only for 3-card bet game), special role 2 (not shown, only for 2-card bet game), and re-game combination 1 (replay game). Conditional device No. 2), re-gaming combination 2,4-10 (conditional device No. 3), re-gaming combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13 (conditional device No.4), small combination 1 to small There is a combination 5 (condition device Nos. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning a loss".

Here, "re-game combination 2, 4 to 10" means re-game role 2, re-game role 4, re-game role 5, re-game role 6, re-game role 7, re-game role 8, re-game role 9 , And the replaying combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110-112, the re-game combination 4, the re-game combination 5, the re-game combination 6, the re-game combination 7, the re-game combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 8, the replay combination 9, and the replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. In addition, a combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

In addition, "re-gaming combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means re-gaming combination 3, re-gaming combination 4, re-gaming combination 6, re-gaming combination 8, re-gaming combination 10, re-gaming combination 11 , Re-game combination 12, and re-game combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110-112, the re-game combination 4, the re-game combination 6, the re-game combination 8, the re-game combination 10, the re-game combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 11, the replay combination 12, and the replay combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 7 (Fig. 7). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell winning). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

In addition, even if the "small winning combination 4" is internally won and the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, one medal may be paid out and one winning combination may be won. If the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined incorrect answer operation order, the winning combination is won, and if the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect answer operation order, the single winning combination is not won. It is configured so that medals are not paid out.

In addition, "small role 4" is composed of "small role 4a" and "small role 4b", and when "small role 4a" is internally elected, "bell-bell-bell" according to the operation order of the player. Is determined whether or not is displayed on the winning line, but if the "small winning combination 4b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as follows.

Here, the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 4" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 7B. To be precise, there are six "small roles 4": "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small roles 4". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 4LCR" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 6A shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later. It is shown that when the special role 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

In the present embodiment, until the special role 2 is internally elected in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the two-card betting game is promoted by notifying the two-card betting game.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-gaming combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to on, and the player stops at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A, and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2). In RT3), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A. The winning combinations that are internally won in the special role internal winning state are re-game combination 1, re-game combination 2,4-10, re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10-13, small role 1-small role 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Further, in FIG. 6A, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is performed. It has been shown to transition to state (RT4).

In the present embodiment, in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3), the notification for prompting the two-card betting game is terminated to encourage the three-card game.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player among all the gaming states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A. In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 5. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 6A shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of sheets is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the game shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. ..

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of cards are paid out, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when a prize is won (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 6A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 6B. FIG. 6B is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT-type game state is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also called a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigation is internally elected as a push order combination (in this example, a replay combination 2,4 to 10, a replay combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, or a small combination 4). In this case, it refers to an effect of notifying the operation order of the correct answer. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (b) and 8. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 shows the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a figure.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when the "re-game combination 2,4-10" or the "re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10-13" is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 and displays the effect image. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the character "−-1”) suggesting that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111. The data suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112 and the display data 07 are such that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting the stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the character "213") is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replay combination or the small combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer of the small winning combination 4 may be set to three options as in the replay combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the correct answer stop operation of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 4, and the re-game combination may also be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous for the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings about a favorable result for the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 6C, for example, the transition is made in the order of the finalized notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and the judge state is shifted to the normal gaming state or AT2 state via the pullback state. There is a route and a route that directly shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter, referred to as the number of AT games). Further, as will be described in detail later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 6B, each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the low navigation state production state has a normal state, and the high navigation state production state has a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. The AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls is increased.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). There may be cases where the production state of is not the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A illustrates an image of an effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 or RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub-control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400 has an effect information (for example, an effect state, a high navigation state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main process described later. The effect status counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent effect control process (step S3605), the effect table corresponding to the effect state, etc. is referred to, and the effect according to the effect state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and the effect data for executing the AT1 effect described later is read from the ROM 406. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the judge effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of a judge state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, the judge state effect table as shown in FIG. 9B, and is currently present. Judge production corresponding to points and production status counters.

Specifically, when the effect is controlled according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (1), when the point is 1, the enemy character is A-> A-> A-> B (expectation is A). A judge effect that changes in the order of <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, a judge effect that changes the enemy character in the order of A → A → B → B is performed. Further, when the effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (2), when the value of the effect state counter is N (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N), the effect mode is set to D1. When the judge effect is changed in the order of -1 → D2-1 → D3-1 → ... and the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the effect mode is set. Judge production is performed by changing the turn of D1-2 → D2-2 → D3-2 → ....

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of an LMT state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. 9 (c) and sets the counter to the counter. It is determined whether or not the corresponding trigger (start condition, end condition, etc. of the production) has arrived, and when the trigger has arrived, the production corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when performing effect control according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIGS. 9C and 9 (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135. When the pressing operation (leveron) of is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 9 (c) and 9 (2) is used to select from a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3 according to the current set value. A predetermined effect is selected, processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image) is executed.

Further, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIGS. 9 (c) and 9 (2) is displayed. A predetermined effect is selected from a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed to suggest the setting effect B. (For example, the background image of the end screen) is executed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the case of a two-card betting game, when a control for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) is performed in the interlocking effect, the effect state is performed by the main control unit 300. Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continuously displays the scene corresponding to the value of the same effect state counter. The control method for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect is not limited to this example, and is interlocked with, for example, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. It may be configured not to send a command for displaying a subsequent scene in the production.

The production mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example, and are, for example, according to the current effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) as shown in FIG. 9D. Therefore, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 10 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process (details will be described later) is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 316 are acquired, and the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is shown. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S105, the reel stop data selection process for selecting the reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, the effect control process A (detailed later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the effect processing is executed. In this effect processing, the freeze effect is controlled.

Here, the freeze effect is an effect that makes the originally planned effect seem to be interrupted in the middle, an effect that makes the slot machine seem to have stopped responding, and the like. Further, for light emission, for example, stopping the change in lighting mode is called freeze, for sound output, for example, continuing to output the same sound is called freeze, and for operation, for example, the operation is in the middle. Stopping may be referred to as a freeze.

In step S108, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, the stop button reception command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). For the third stop operation, the stop button reception 2 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel is prepared. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "bell-bell-bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small role 3 (bell). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines. Further, in step S111, the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (number of inserted cards) is subtracted from the number of medals (number of medals given to the player) acquired by the player in the game (number of medals paid out). The count value of the difference number counter is updated by adding the value to the counter value of the current difference number counter. Further, in step S111, preparations are made for transmitting a payout command including at least information on the number of inserts indicating the number of inserts and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of payouts to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

In step S113, the effect control process B (detailed later) related to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed. In step S114, the high navigation state end process (detailed later) regarding the end of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S2003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S2006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S2007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each original register. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12A.

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing the effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12B. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 12A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, the command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization processing, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization processing of the storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 13A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306. If not, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Bet number setting / start operation reception process>
Next, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG.

In step S201, the high navigation state update process (detailed later) relating to the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state and the update of the high navigation state is executed in the state where the medal can be inserted before the start lever operation.

In step S202, other bet number setting / start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the number of bets is set, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated.

<High navigation status update process>
Next, the high navigation state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process in step S201 of FIG. 14A.

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state counter> 0. If the high navigation status counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S302, and if not, the high navigation status update process ends. In step S302, the value of the high navigation state counter is subtracted by 1.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the AT system is the high navigation state. When it is on, it indicates a high navigation state, and when it is off, it indicates a low navigation state. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304, and if not, the high navigation state update process ends.

In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In the present embodiment, the initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter in the game in which the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is decided (see step S703 in FIG. 16B described later). , When the start lever of the next game is operated, it shifts to the high navigation state. By turning on the high navigation status flag, the high navigation status lamp 190 starts lighting.

<Production state control process A>
Next, the effect state control process A will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process A in step S106 of FIG.

In step S401, common processing for each game (details will be described later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the processing related to the high navigation state in the high navigation state, and when the processing prohibition flag is off, the game must be able to execute the processing related to the high navigation state. When the processing prohibition flag is on, it indicates that the game does not execute the processing related to the high navigation state. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403. If not, that is, if the processing prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, it is on, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S404, since the navigation state is low, the low navigation state process A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S405, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, the high navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S406, the other effect state control process A is executed.

In the effect state control process A of the present embodiment, the process prohibition flag is provided, and the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is executed only when the process prohibition flag is off, but the process prohibition flag is not provided. You may. In this case, the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is always executed in the effect state control process A.

<Common processing for each game>
Next, the common processing for each game will be described with reference to FIG. 15B. FIG. 15B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the common processing for each game in step S401 of FIG. 15A.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is that the game is a recommended number of games (in this example, a three-card betting game). The recommended number of games is not limited to the three-card game, and the recommended number of games may differ depending on the state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, if the condition for executing the high navigation state-related process is satisfied (for example, if the game is a three-card betting game), the process proceeds to step S502, and if not (for example). , If the game is a two-card betting game), the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S502, the processing prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the processing prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, other common processing for each game is executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, the common processing for each game will be described with reference to FIG. 16A. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the low navigation state processing A in step S404 of FIG. 15A.

In step S601, a high navigation state transition process (detailed later) for determining whether or not to shift to the high navigation state is executed. In step S602, other low navigation state processing A is executed.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, the high navigation state transition process will be described with reference to FIG. 16B. FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state transition process in step S601 of FIG. 16A.

In step S701, the high navigation state transition determination is executed. In this high navigation state transition determination, when the high navigation state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when a winning combination other than a loss is won in the winning combination internal lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the next Decide to move from the game to the high navigation state.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state transition is determined, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the high navigation state transition process is terminated.

In step S703, the initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter. Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1000, and may be, for example, 1500. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games to be executed after shifting to the high navigation state is set, and for example, the initial value (700 in this example) is set to the value of the ceiling counter.

In step S701, in the high navigation state transition determination, the transition to the high navigation state is determined when a winning combination other than the loss is won, but the high navigation transition condition is not limited to this, for example, a random number value is used. The transition to the high navigation state may be decided based on the result of the lottery used, or the lottery is performed using the lottery value provided for each winning combination, and the transition to the high navigation state is performed based on the result of the lottery. May be determined.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 15A.

In step S801, high navigation state common processing (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S803, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, the normal state process A (detailed later) is executed. Details will be described later, but in this normal state processing A, for example, a counter related to the number of games in the effect state (precursor state) is subtracted. In addition, the effect setting is performed for the game according to the result of the internal lottery process for the winning combination.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the finalized notification state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S805, the final notification state process A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S807, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the judge state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S809, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S809, the judge state process A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S811, and if not, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, AT2 state processing A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, the pullback state process A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S814, the instruction information setting process (detailed later) related to the setting of the instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, the high navigation state common process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state common process A in step S801 of FIG.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter> 0. If the effect state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, the value of the effect state counter is subtracted by 1. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. When the number of games in each production state is determined by a lottery or a table, the result of the lottery or a numerical value obtained from the table or the like may be set in the value of the production state counter, or the system shifts to the high navigation state. At that time, the number of games in a part or all of the production states may be determined at once.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is the LMT state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S904, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S909.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S906. The process proceeds to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but other values may be used.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not applicable, step S906 is performed. Proceed to S909. In this example, the high navigation state is terminated when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3-card betting game is 11 (maximum increase is 8), and the difference exceeds 2000. Therefore, the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets-8 sheets x 20 G), but other values may be used.

In step S906, the LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S907, freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set. Further, in step S908, the process proceeds to step S909 after setting the LMT state in the effect state. As a result, the effect state shifts from the game to the LMT state.

In this example, the initial value of LMT is set to 19 (= 20G-1G) in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, but other numerical values may be used. Further, the process itself in step S906 may be deleted. With such a configuration, after shifting to the LMT state, it is possible to stay in the high navigation state until the number of games reaches the maximum number of games or the difference number reaches the maximum difference number. , The player's motivation to play can be increased.

In step S909, the high navigation state common process A is terminated after the other high navigation state common process A is executed.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, the normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter> 0. If the ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, the value of the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games up to the ceiling. In this embodiment, the initial value (700 in this example) is set in the ceiling counter in step S705 of the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. 16B, but other numerical values are used. You may.

In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step 1005. In step S1005, the AT1 transition lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 transition lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the AT1 state, and in this example, the winning or losing is determined based on the result of the internal lottery processing of the winning combination, the random number value, and the like. The content of the AT1 transition lottery is not limited to this example, and for example, the winning or failing may be determined in consideration of the value of the high navigation state counter, etc., and points are based on the result of the internal lottery processing of the winning combination. May be given and the result may be decided based on the points.

In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the AT1 transition lottery in step S1005 has been won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if it is not won, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, it is determined to be either "high" or "low" based on a random number value or the like. The content of the AT1 type lottery is not limited to this example. For example, "high" is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery when the AT1 transition lottery is won, rather than the lottery when the ceiling is reached. The configuration may be easy (or difficult to select).

In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set in the AT1 type, and in the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by the lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. Further, in step S1010, after turning on the AT1 winning flag, the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low", and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1012, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1012, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining a numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1014, a judge mode lottery is performed. Here, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple types of judge modes (in this example, "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven"). Yes, in this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1015, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1014 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1106, the normal state processing A is terminated after the other normal state processing A is performed.

<Final notification status processing A>
Next, the final notification state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A in step S805 of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low", and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step 1107. In step S1102, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1103, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value (for example, 700), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1105, "high" is set for the AT1 type, and in the next step S1106, "high accuracy" is set for the judge mode, and the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1107, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple types of judge modes (in this example, "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven"). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1108, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1107 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, after performing other final notification state processing A, the final notification state processing A is terminated.

<AT1 state processing A>
Next, AT1 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG.

In step S1201, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple types of judge modes (in this example, "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven"). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1202, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1201 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, after performing other AT1 state processing A, AT1 state processing A is terminated.

<Judge state processing A>
Next, the judge state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judge state processing A in step S809 of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the release counter> 0. If the release counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1302, the value of the release counter is subtracted by 1. Here, the release counter is a counter for managing the number of games until the judge mode is released. In the present embodiment, the lottery value is set in the release counter in step S2104 of the AT1 state processing B described later, but other numerical values may be used. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the release counter = 0. If the release counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, a release lottery is performed according to the judge mode, and in the next step S1305, if the release lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. Here, the cancellation lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT2 state. In this example, if the judge mode is heaven and the cancellation lottery is won, the judge mode heaven is continued without shifting to the AT2 state. Also, if the judge mode is heaven and you win a specific rare role (small role 2 or small role 3 in this example) internally, there is a 100% chance that AT2 will be won regardless of the result of the cancellation lottery. Move to the state. The content of the cancellation lottery is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a certain specialized zone.

In step S1306, after setting the determined state in the judge state, the process proceeds to step S1307. In this example, when it is determined in step S1303 that the release counter = 0 (when the heaven of the judge mode ends), the AT2 state is set in the judge state in step S1306. That is, in this example, when the heaven of the judge mode ends, there is a 100% probability of shifting to the AT2 state. Further, in steps S1304 to S1305, when the judge mode is heaven and the cancellation lottery is won, the judge mode heaven is set in the judge state. Further, in steps S1304 to S1305, when the judge mode is heaven and a specific rare role (in this example, small role 2 or small role 3) is internally won, regardless of the result of the cancellation lottery, In step S1306, the AT2 state is set to the judge state.

In step S1307, the AT1 state processing A is terminated after the other judge state processing A is performed.

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, AT2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG.

In step S1401, the AT number addition lottery is performed. Here, the AT number addition lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games to be added (added) to the number of AT games. In step S1402, the lottery result value (the number of additional games) of the AT number addition lottery is added to the effect state counter.

In step S1403, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple types of judge modes (in this example, "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven"). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1403, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1401 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, after performing other AT2 state processing A, AT2 state processing A is terminated.

<Pullback state processing A>
Next, the pullback state process A will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process A in step S813 of FIG.

In step S1501, a pullback lottery is performed, and in step SS1502, it is determined whether or not the pullback lottery has been won. If the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1503, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1503, the determined state is set in the pullback state. In this example, the lottery result of the pullback lottery in step S1501 is set to the pullback state. In step S1504, the pullback state process A is terminated after the other pullback state process A is performed.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, the instruction information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the state in which the instruction information can be notified. Here, the instruction information broadcastable state indicates, in this example, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT state. If the effect state is the state in which the instruction information can be notified, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1602, it is determined in the winning combination internal lottery process whether or not the push order combination has been internally won. In this example, the push order combination means the internal winning of the "small combination 4" in the conditional device. If the push order is internally won, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1603, the correct push order is set in the information (instruction information) related to the notification content of the instruction information notification. As a result, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed (see FIG. 8). Further, although not shown, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, a preparation is made for transmitting an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the order of pressing the correct answer to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157.

In the finalized notification state of this example, the number of medals will continue to decrease until the small winning combination corresponding to the AT1 type wins, so while ensuring that the payout rate is less than 1, for example, in the pushing order role. When the internal winning is won, the operation navigation is executed only in the push order of a specific type (for example, when the small winning combination 4 is internally won, any one of the small winning combination 4LCR, ..., The small winning combination 4RCL or The operation navigation may be executed for a plurality of units), or the operation navigation may be executed once every three times (for example, if the push order cannot be won three times, the next push order). (The push order navigation is executed when the role is internally won).

<Production state control process B>
Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process B in step S113 of FIG.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1703, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1703, since the navigation state is low, the low navigation state process B is executed. Although not shown, in this low navigation state process B, when the transition to the high navigation state is determined, a process of setting the effect state based on the information regarding each effect state is performed.

On the other hand, in step S1704, since it is in the high navigation state, the high navigation state process B (detailed later) is executed. In step S1705, after executing the other effect state control process B, the effect state control process B is terminated.

In the other effect state control process B, the difference number counter update process is performed in the high navigation state. In this difference counter update process, the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (number of inserted cards) is subtracted from the number of medals (number of payouts) acquired by the player (given to the player) in the game. The count value of the difference number counter is updated by adding the calculated value to the counter value of the current difference number counter. Further, preparations are made for transmitting a payout command including at least information on the number of inserts indicating the number of inserts and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of payouts to the first sub control unit 400.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state processing B in step S1704 of FIG. 26.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1802, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1802, normal state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the finalized notification state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1804, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1804, the final notification state process B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1806, AT1 state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the judge state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1808, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1808, judge state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, the pullback state process B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1813, after executing the LMT state process B (detailed later), the high navigation state process B is terminated.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, the normal state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG. 27.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the normal state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903 after setting the finalized notification state in the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the finalized notification state, and the effect (for example, bonus confirmed display) according to the finalized notification state is started. In step S1903, the normal state process B is terminated after the other normal state process B is performed.

<Final notification status processing B>
Next, the final notification state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing B in step S1804 of FIG. 27.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the confirmation flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after turning on the confirmation notification flag, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type.

Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10" of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is If it is high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is the "replaying combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" of the condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2004, the AT1 initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2005, the AT1 state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2006. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state, and the effect (for example, operation navigation) corresponding to the AT1 state is started. In the present embodiment, the initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2004, but other numerical values may be used. In step S2006, after performing other final notification state processing B, the final notification state processing B is terminated.

<AT1 state processing B>
Next, AT1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 of FIG. 27.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the AT1 state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2102, the judge initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the present embodiment, the initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2102, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2104, the release counter is set with the lottery value (number of games) determined by the lottery, and then the process proceeds to step 2105. The content of the lottery in step S2104 is not particularly limited, but in this example, the higher the set value, the smaller the value is selected, and when there is stock in the heaven mode, the smaller value is selected, and the value of the high navigation state counter is small. It is configured so that a smaller number is selected.

In step S2105, after setting the judge state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2106. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2106, the AT1 state process B is terminated after the other AT1 state process B is performed.

<Judge state processing B>
Next, the judge state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judge state processing B in step S1808 of FIG. 27.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the judge state = definite (whether or not the judge succeeds), and if the king is the king, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2202, the AT2 initial number of lottery is performed. This AT2 initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values of 30, 50, 55, 66, 100 is selected by lottery. As an exception, when the set value is set 5, 55 is selected regardless of the lottery, and when the set value is set 6, 66 is selected regardless of the lottery.

In step S2203, the lottery value (number of games) of the AT2 initial number of times lottery is set in the effect state counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2204. In step S2204, after setting the AT2 state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2208. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started.

In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the judge state has ended), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2206, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2206, the pullback initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2207, the pullback state is set to the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the pullback state, and the effect corresponding to the pullback state is started.

In the present embodiment, the pullback initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2206, but other values may be used. Therefore, for example, it may be a fixed value other than 1, or 1 + α (variable value). In step S2208, the judge state process B is terminated after the other judge state process B is performed.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, AT2 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG. 27.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the AT2 state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2302, the judge initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the present embodiment, the initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2302, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2304, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2304, the lottery value (number of games) determined by the lottery is set in the release counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2305. The content of the lottery in step S2304 is not particularly limited, but in this example, the higher the set value, the smaller the value is selected, and when there is stock in the heaven mode, the smaller value is selected, and the value of the high navigation state counter is small. It is configured so that a smaller number is selected.

In step S2305, after setting the judge state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2306. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2306, the AT2 state process B is terminated after the other AT2 state process B is performed.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, the pullback state process B will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process B in step S1812 of FIG. 27.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pullback state = fixed (whether or not to pull back), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2402, the AT2 initial number of lottery is performed. This AT2 initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values of 30, 50, 55, 66, 100 is selected by lottery. As an exception, when the set value is set 5, 55 is selected regardless of the lottery, and when the set value is set 6, 66 is selected regardless of the lottery.

In step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2407 after setting the AT2 state in the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the pullback state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started. In the present embodiment, in the first hit (shift to the first AT state after shifting from the low navigation state to the high navigation state), the effect state shifts to AT1, whereas in the judge state or the pullback state. The effect state is configured to shift to AT2, which is more advantageous to the player than AT1.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the pullback state is completed), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2406, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2406, the process proceeds to step S2407 after turning on the high navigation state end standby flag. In step S2407, the pullback state process B is terminated after the other pullback state process B is performed.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, the LMT state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG. 27.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the LMT state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if not, the LMT state process B ends. In step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503 after setting the high navigation state end standby flag to ON. In step S2503, the LMT state processing B is terminated after the other LMT state processing B is performed.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, the high navigation state end processing will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state end processing in step S114 of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is on. If the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2602, and if not, the high navigation state end process is terminated. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state end wait flag is on. If the high navigation state end wait flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2603, the high navigation state end wait flag is turned off. After the process of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is 0. This corresponds to the case because if there is a game in which the processing prohibition flag is on, the value of the high navigation state counter may become 0 before the high navigation state end wait flag is turned on. Is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2606, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2605.

In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the difference number counter> the maximum value for ending the high navigation state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2606, and if not applicable, the high navigation state end processing is terminated. This is because if there is a game in which the processing prohibition flag is on, the condition of difference number counter> high navigation state end maximum value may be satisfied before the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on. It corresponds to the case.

In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the high navigation state lamp 190 that was lit goes out. In step S2607, the high navigation state end process is terminated after the other high navigation state end processes are executed. In other high navigation state end processing, for example, the AT system game state is set to the low navigation state (normal mode), and various flags and counters used for the transition control of the high navigation state are initialized. Do.

<Normal state processing A (Modification example 1)>
Next, the normal state processing A according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 19, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A according to the first modification. Note that the same processing as the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19 is designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The normal state process A according to the first modification is obtained by deleting the processes of steps S1012 to S1013 and adding the processes of steps S1021 to S1025 to the normal state process A described with reference to FIG.

Step S1021 is a process executed when the ceiling counter is determined to be 0 in step S1004. In this example, in step S1021, a process of setting the ceiling arrival flag to ON is executed.

Further, step S1022 is a process executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is "low". In this example, in step S1022, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on, and this is applicable. In the case, the process proceeds to step S1023, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1023, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1024, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1024, "high" is set for the AT1 type, and in the next step S1025, the judge mode is set to "high accuracy", and then the process proceeds to step S1106.

In the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, the AT1 type is set to “low” or “high” when the ceiling in the normal state is reached, and after shifting to the final notification state, the AT1 type is changed from “low” to “high”. It was configured to be promoted to. On the other hand, in the normal state processing A according to the modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is set to "low". It is configured to be promoted from to "high" and to set the judge mode with high accuracy.

<Normal state processing A (modification example 2)>
Next, the normal state processing A according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 19, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A according to the modification 2. The same processes as the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19 and the normal state process A (modification example 1) described with reference to FIG. 36 are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. To do.

The normal state process A according to the second modification deletes the processes of steps S1012 to S1013 with respect to the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19, the processes of steps S1021 to S1025, and the processes of steps S1031 to S1032. Is added.

Step S1031 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1022 that the ceiling arrival flag is on. In this example, in step S1031, after executing the promotion counter addition lottery, in the next step S1032. , The numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In the normal state processing A according to the modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is changed from "low" to "high". In addition to being promoted, it was configured to set the judge mode with high accuracy. On the other hand, in the normal state processing A according to the modification 2, when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" and the judge mode is set with high accuracy. It is the same in that it is configured as, but further, the status is managed using the promotion counter, and if the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is configured to be promoted from "low" to "high". There is.

<Final notification state processing A (modification example 1)>
Next, the final notification state process A according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A according to the first modification. The same processing as the final notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20 is designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The finalized notification state process A according to the first modification is obtained by deleting the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 and adding the processes of steps S1121 to S1125 to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. ..

In step S1120, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter> 0. If the ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1121, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1101. In step S1121, the value of the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1.

Step S1123 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1101 that the AT1 type is "low". In this example, in step S1123, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on, and this is applicable. In the case, the process proceeds to step S1124, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1124, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1125. If not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1125, the ceiling flag is set to on, and then the process proceeds to step S1105.

In the finalized notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high” after shifting to the finalized notification state. On the other hand, in the final notification state processing A according to the modified example 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the final notification state, AT1 The type is promoted from "low" to "high", and the judge mode is set with high accuracy.

<Final notification state processing A (modification example 2)>
Next, the final notification state processing A according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A according to the second modification. The same processes as the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process A (modification example 2) described with reference to FIG. 38 are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings and described thereof. Is omitted.

The finalized notification state process A according to the second modification deletes the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 with respect to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, the processes of steps S1121 to S1125, and steps S1131 to S1131. S1133 is added.

Step S1131 is a process executed when the AT1 type is determined to be "low" in step S1101, but in this example, after executing the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1131, the next step S1132 In, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1133. In step S1133, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1123.

In the finalized notification state processing A according to the first modification, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized notification state, the AT1 type is set to "low". Was configured to be promoted to "high". On the other hand, the finalized notification state processing A according to the second modification is the same in that the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized notification state. Furthermore, the status is managed using the promotion counter, and when the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high", while the value of the promotion counter is less than the ceiling value. Is configured to promote the AT1 type from "low" to "high" when the ceiling counter is 0.

<Final notification state processing A and final notification state processing B (modification example 3)>
Next, the finalized notification state process A and the finalized notification state process B according to the third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A according to the third modification. Further, FIG. 41 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 29, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing B according to the modification 3. The same processes as those of the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29 are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The finalized notification state process A according to the third modification shown in FIG. 40 is obtained by adding the process of step S1140 to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20. Step S1140 is a process executed when the promotion counter is determined to be equal to or higher than the ceiling value in step S1104. In step S1140, the promotion flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1109.

The finalized notification state process B according to the third modification shown in FIG. 41 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S2010 to S2012 to the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29. Step S2010 is a process executed when it is determined in step S2001 that the confirmation notification flag is on. In step S2010, it is determined whether the promotion flag is on or off, and if it is on, step S2011. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2011, it is determined whether the promotion notification is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2012, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2012, the promotion notification is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S2006.

In the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the promotion counter is not added when the AT1 type is "low", so that the AT1 type promotion and the condition device are used. It was configured so that No. 4 internal winnings would not occur at the same time. On the other hand, in the final notification state processing A and the final notification state processing B according to the modified example 3, the promotion of AT1 type and the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 can be generated at the same time, while the AT1 is generated at the same time. It is configured so that it does not shift to the state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation navigation and the promotion effect at the time of AT1 type promotion from being executed at the same time, so that only the promotion effect can be shown to the player firmly, and the interest of the player is enhanced. You may be able to.

When the normal state processing A according to the modified example 1 described with reference to FIG. 36 and the normal state process A according to the modified example 2 described with reference to FIG. 37 are applied, the AT1 type is promoted in the ceiling reaching game. And the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 may occur at the same time. In this case, as in the case of this modification 3, the promotion flag should be used so that the games generated at the same time do not shift to the AT1 state. Just do it.

<Modified Example of Embodiment 1>
Next, the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In addition, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first embodiment will be described. Further, in principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 51 are used only for the description of the modification of the first embodiment, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals of the first embodiment are used. In the description of the modified example, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 51 are given priority.

<Types of winning roles>
First, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. It should be noted that FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1) and a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying combination 3, small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination that shifts to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 3 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations are sometimes referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination 1 and Winning of the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 3 is included.

The special role 1 is a role (acting role) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is "BAR-BAR-BAR".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2).

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (in this example, "BAR-" BAR-BAR "design combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize. This special role internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of cards (300 cards in this example) are paid out, the game shifts to a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1). The special gaming state (RT3) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 3)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. As for the corresponding symbol combinations, the replay role 1 is "replay-replay-replay (normal replay)", the replay role 2 is "bell-replay-replay (promotion replay)", and the replay role 3 is "replay-". Replay-Bell (falling replay 2) ".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 3)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 and small role 2 for small role 2. "Watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon 1)", small role 3 is "bell-bell-bell (bell)". The corresponding payout number is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol. In addition, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbols are arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbols will be the winning line. Does not stop at.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 43A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention is roughly classified into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state (RT4), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). , And have a special gaming state (RT3). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 43 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a re-game high probability state (RT4), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). ), And the special gaming state (RT3) are also states in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery by acquiring numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. The lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) among other game states (for example, a game state excluding the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 43A.

Winning roles that are internally won in the low probability state of re-game include special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, re-game role 1, re-game role 1 + re-game role 2, small role 1, There are a small role 2, a small role 3a, and a small role 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning a loss".

Here, "special role 1 + small role 1" means that the special role 1 and the small role 1 are internally elected at the same time. Similarly, "special role 1 + small role 2" means that special role 1 and small role 2 are internally elected at the same time. In these cases, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations is displayed according to the operation of the player. More specifically, unless it is impossible to win any of the winning combinations in any of the winning lines, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line are stopped.

Further, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" means that the re-game combination 1 and the re-game combination 2 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, the symbol combination (promotion replay) corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 (Fig. 44). a) In the remarks column, refer to the correct answer in the push order), in other cases, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replay combination 1 is displayed on the winning line (in the remarks column of FIG. 44 (a)). , See when the push order is incorrect).

A combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 1 + replaying combination 2", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the operation order of the correct answer of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" will be described in detail. FIG. 44B is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the present embodiment.

To be precise, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is subdivided into "re-game combination 2L", "re-game combination 2C", and "re-game combination 2R". Different correct operation orders are assigned to each of the subdivided "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2". The range of lottery data associated with each of the three subdivided "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is the same.

For example, when the "re-game combination 2L" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is the correct operation, and other operations. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. In addition, when the "re-game combination 2C" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, and other than that. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. In addition, when the "re-game combination 2R" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is the correct operation, and other than that. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation.

Up to this point, the "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" in FIG. 44A has been described, but the "small combination 3a" also has a different winning combination depending on the operation order of the player.

When the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 44 (Fig. 44). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell winning). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

On the other hand, when the "small winning combination 3b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order, and 11 medals are paid out. (See FIG. 44 (a) Remarks column).

Here, the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 3a" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 44 (b).

To be precise, "small role 3a" is divided into six "small role 3LCR", "small role 3LRC", "small role 3CLR", "small role 3CRL", "small role 3RLC" and "small role 3RCL". It is subdivided and set, and different correct operation orders are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small winning combination 3a". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small winning combinations 3a" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 3LCR" of the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. If the "small winning combination 3CRL" of the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation. The same applies to the "small winning combination 3a" and "small winning combination 3b" described here in the gaming state described below.

In FIG. 43 (a), when the condition (A) is satisfied in the re-game low probability state (RT1), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 2 is displayed on the valid line (re-game). When the winning combination 2 is won), it is shown that the player shifts to the replay high probability state (RT2) described later. Further, the figure shows that when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT3) described later. ing. Further, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed on the valid line (when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won). It is shown to shift to the special gaming state (RT4) described later.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 3a as the pushing order combination is a single combination, but it may be a duplicate combination that is elected at the same time as another small combination. The points in which the small winning combination 3 is won are the same when the first to third stop operations are performed according to the operation order of the correct answer.

For example, if it is set as "small winning combination 3 + small winning combination A + small winning combination B" and (1) the correct answer stop operation (correct answer operation order) is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 3 is on the effective line. When (2) the incorrect answer stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is the correct answer), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination A is displayed on the valid line, and (3) the incorrect answer stop operation is performed. If this is the case (the first stop operation is incorrect) and the stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination B, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination B is displayed on the valid line. (4) If the wrong answer is stopped (the first stop operation is incorrect) and the stop operation is performed outside the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination B, the spill is on the effective line. It may be displayed.

In addition, when "small combination 3 + small combination X" is set, (1) when the correct stop operation (the stop operation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is the correct answer) is performed, the small combination 3 is supported. The symbol combination to be used is displayed on the valid line, and (2) the incorrect stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, and the second stop is performed. If the operation is correct) and the third stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination X, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination X is displayed on the valid line, and (3) the incorrect answer stop operation (The first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop operation is correct), and the third stop is outside the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination X. When the operation is performed, the spilled eyes may be displayed on the effective line. In the third stop operation, the small winning combination X may be won by aiming at the small winning combination X. Here, the correct answer for the stop operation means that the operation order is correct and / and the operation timing is suitable (operation within the pull-in range of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined small winning combination).

Further, when "small combination 3 + small combination Y" is set in addition to the above-mentioned "small combination 3 + small combination X" and (1) the correct answer is stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the valid line, and (2) when the incorrect answer stop operation is performed and the third stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination X, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination Y is displayed. It is displayed on the effective line, and (3) if the incorrect answer stop operation is performed and the third stop operation is performed outside the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination Y, a spill is displayed on the effective line. You may do so. In this case, in the third stop operation in the incorrect stop operation, since it is not known whether the winning combination is the small winning combination X or the small winning combination Y, it is possible to prevent the small winning combination winning in the third stop operation. In some cases.

<Replay high probability state (RT4)>
The re-game high probability state (RT4) is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of the re-game low probability state (RT1). In the re-game high probability state (RT4), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44A.

The winning roles that are internally won in the re-game high probability state (RT4) are special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, re-game role 1, re-game role 1 + re-game role 3, small. There are a combination 1, a small combination 2, a small combination 3a, and a small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

Here, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" means that the re-game combination 1 and the re-game combination 3 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replay combination 1 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 (Fig. 44). a) In the remarks column, refer to the correct answer in the push order), in other cases, the symbol combination (falling replay) corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed on the winning line (in the remarks column of FIG. 44 (a)). , See when the push order is incorrect). That is, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is also a push order combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the operation order of the correct answer of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" will be described in detail.

To be precise, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" are "re-game combination 3L", "re-game combination 3C", and "re-game combination 3R", as shown in FIG. 44 (b). It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3". The range of the lottery data associated with each of the three subdivided "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is the same.

For example, when the "re-game combination 3L" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is the correct operation, and other operations. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. In addition, when the "re-game combination 3C" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is internally won, the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, and other than that. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. In addition, when the "re-game combination 3R" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is internally won, the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is the correct operation, and other than that. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation.

In the present embodiment, when the push order combination (re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2, re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3, small combination 3a) is internally won, it is unique based on the subdivided internal winning combination. The correct operation order was determined, that is, the correct operation order was determined by one lottery process. However, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the push order combination is not subdivided, after the push order combination is internally won in the internal lottery process of the winning combination, a lottery process for further determining the correct operation order is executed to operate the correct answer. The order may be determined.

In FIG. 43 (a), when the condition (B) is satisfied in the re-game high probability state (RT4), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 3 is displayed on the valid line (re-game). When the winning combination 3 is won), it is shown that the player shifts to the above-mentioned replay low probability state (RT1). Further, the figure shows that when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state (RT2) described later. Furthermore, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed on the valid line (when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won). , It is shown to shift to the special gaming state (RT3) described later.

<Special role internal winning state (RT2)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, this flag is set. It is a gaming state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special role can be displayed. In the special combination internal winning state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44A. The winning combination that is internally won in the special role internal winning state includes a replaying combination 1, a small winning combination 1, a small winning combination 2, a small winning combination 3a, and a small winning combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

Further, in FIG. 44A, when the condition (D) is satisfied in the special winning combination internal winning state (RT2), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2 is displayed. It is shown to shift to the special gaming state (RT4) described later.

<Special game state (RT3)>
The special gaming state (RT3) is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player among all the gaming states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44A. In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 3b. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 44 (a) shows that in the special game state (RT3), when the condition (E) is satisfied, that is, when the specified number of sheets is paid out, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). Has been done. Specifically, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when more than 275 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Move to.

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of cards are paid out, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when a prize is won (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c). 43 (b) and 43 (c) are transition diagrams of the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the AT-type gaming state is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also called a normal mode.

The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and there are an AT mode and a chance mode. Here, the operation navigation is the correct operation order when the push order combination (specifically, re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2, re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3, small combination 3a) is internally won. It refers to the production of notifying. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (b) and 45. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 44B shows display data showing the correct operation order of the push order combination of the present embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a diagram in which the display data is associated with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when the re-game combination 2L of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is the correct answer, so the first stop operation is on the left. The display data 01 is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 01 (see FIG. 45A), and the effect image display device 157 displays the lighting mode. , An image (eg, the letters "1-−") suggesting that the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is displayed (not shown).

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111. The data suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112 and the display data 07 are such that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting the stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 3CLR of "small winning combination 3a" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to (see FIG. 45B) is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 has the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel. An image (for example, the letters "213") suggesting that it is the right reel 112 is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replay combination or the small combination 3a based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3a may be set to three options as in the replay combination, and the small winning combination 3a may also be notified by using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the correct answer stop operation of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 3a, and the re-game combination may also be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous for the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings about a favorable result for the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 43B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state is the normal state, and the high navigation state effect state is the normal state, the final notification state, the judge state, the pullback state, the BB state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. I have. As for the effect state of the high navigation state according to the modified example of the first embodiment, since the BB state is only added to the effect state described with reference to FIG. 6C, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 according to the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main process according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the main control unit main process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

In the main control unit main process according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the effect state control process A in step S106 of the main control main process according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 10, the effect process in step S107, and the effect process in step S107. The content of the effect state control process B in step S113 is changed.

<Production state control process A>
Next, the effect state control process A in step S121 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect state control process A according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (a). Is.

Since the effect state control process A according to the modified example of the first embodiment is the same process as the effect state control process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 15 (a), the same reference numerals are given in the drawings. , The description is omitted.

<Common processing for each game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47 (b), the common processing for each game in step S401 of FIG. 47 (a) will be described. FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of each game common process according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to each game common process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (b). ..

In the game common process according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the content of step S501 of the game common process according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 15B is changed to the content of step S521. Specifically, in step S521, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is that the game state is either during the internal winning of the bonus or during the operation of the bonus with a setting difference. The condition is not limited to the operation of bonuses having different settings, and may be the operation of all bonuses. As a result of the determination in step S521, if the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S502, and if not, the process proceeds to step S503.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state process A in step S405 of FIG. 47 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state processing A according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

In the high navigation state process A according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the processes of steps S821 and S822 are added to the high navigation state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S822, the BB state process A is executed. In this BB state processing A, processing related to the BB game and the like are performed.

<Processing for production>
Next, the effect processing of step S122 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect processing according to the modified example of the first embodiment.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103. The process proceeds to step S2102. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but other values may be used.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not applicable, step S. Proceed to S2104. In this example, the high navigation state is terminated when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3-card betting game is 11 (maximum increase is 8), and the difference exceeds 2000. Therefore, the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets-8 sheets x 20 G), but other values may be used.

In step S2103, freeze information is set, and in the next step S2104, the effect processing is terminated after executing other effect processes.

In the first embodiment, the freeze state is set when the effect state is the LMT state in the high navigation state common process A, but in the modified example of the first embodiment, the effect state is the LMT state. Regardless of whether or not, the freeze state is set when the conditions of step S2101 or step S2102 are satisfied.

<Production state control process B>
Next, the effect state control process B in step S123 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect state control process B according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 26.

Since steps S1701 to S1704 of the effect state control process B according to the modified example of the first embodiment are the same processes as the effect state control process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 26, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings. The description will be omitted. In step S1721, the effect state control process B is terminated after executing the other effect state control process B. In the other effect state control process B, for example, when the high navigation state end condition is satisfied in the BB state and the high navigation state is changed to the low navigation state, the effect state is changed from the BB state to the normal state. ..

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state process B in step S1705 of FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state processing B according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 27.

In the high navigation state processing B according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the processing of steps S1821 and S1822 is added to the high navigation state processing B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 27. Specifically, in step S1821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1822, the BB state process B is executed. In this BB state processing B, after the end of the BB state, a process of returning the effect state to the state immediately before the BB state is performed.

<Specific examples of various effects, various displays, etc.>
Next, specific examples of various effects, various displays, and the like executed by the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 78. 52 to 78 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

Here, the item of "low / high navigation state" in each figure indicates the AT system gaming state (in this example, the high navigation state or the low navigation state), and the item of "directing state" in each figure is. , The effect state (in this example, the normal state, the final notification state, the judge state, the pullback state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the LMT (limit) state) in each game state of the AT system is shown. In addition, the item of "high navigation state counter" in each figure shows the number of remaining games in the high navigation state, and the item of "effect state counter" in each figure shows the number of remaining games in each effect state. ing. In addition, the item "BET" in each figure indicates the number of bets (the number of BETs) of the game medium in each game.

<Specific example of counter update display>
First, a specific example of the update display of the counter will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52 to 54 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3-card betting game only>
In FIG. 52, when the effect state shifts to the AT2 state → the judge state → the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, only a three-card betting game is performed. It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter at the time.

The game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 28 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R28, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 2, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. ..

The condition for starting the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not limited to the case where the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted. For example, until the third stop operation is accepted, " After executing the display of "LAST 3G" and accepting the third stop operation, the display of "LAST 2G" may be started. Further, the production mode of the AT2 effect is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a series of effects executed over a plurality of games, or an effect completed in one game. Further, the display mode of the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not limited to this example, and for example, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is the number of icons and the like. May be indicated by.

The following game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R27, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation as in the game R28, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

The following game R26 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 26 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R26, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as in the games R28 to R27, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (book). In the example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R26, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (for example). The display including the image showing the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. The conditions for starting the AT2 end screen and the result display are not limited to the case where the third stop operation is accepted, and the effect mode of the AT2 end screen and the display contents of the result display are not particularly limited.

The following game R25 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R25, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state from the AT2 state. Since the state has been changed, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter) is concerned. The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 10G") is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R25 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the judge state. Therefore, since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") is being executed. Since the flow of production of games R24 to R20 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the judge state to the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has occurred, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation is executed, and the LMT is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed. The fill in the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not yet been performed at the same timing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R19 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the above and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20") is executed. There is. Since the flow of production of games R18 to R1 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") is executed. ing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect), the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is executed. Then, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. ing. The conditions for starting the ED effect end screen and the result display are not limited to the case where the third stop operation is accepted, and the effect mode of the ED effect end screen and the display contents of the result display are not particularly limited.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3-card betting game and 2-card betting game>
FIG. 53 shows a 3-card betting game and a 2-card bet when the effect state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state after shifting to the AT2 state → the judge state → the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when both games are played. It should be noted that the same effects and displays as those described in "Specific example of counter update display / 3-card betting game only" described with reference to FIG. 52 will be omitted as appropriate (the same applies to the following examples).

The game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 28 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R28, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 2, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. ..

The following game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and a two-card betting game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since the two-card betting game was performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since the two-card betting game was played in the AT2 state, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed even when the push order is internally won. In this example, an example is shown in which the AT2 effect is executed even when the two-card betting game is performed in the AT2 state, but a plurality of related AT2 effects are executed over a plurality of games. When the two-card betting game is played in the AT2 state, the scene of the AT2 effect may not be updated in the game.

The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 2, and a two-card betting game is performed. In this game R1, since the two-card betting game was performed in the LMT state, the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

Therefore, in the game R1, the effect state is the LMT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state is not executed. Further, since the two-card betting game was played in the LMT state, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed even when the push order is internally won. In this example, an example in which the ED effect is executed even when the two-card betting game is performed in the LMT state is shown, but a plurality of related ED effects are executed over a plurality of games. When the two-card betting game is played in the LMT state, the scene of the ED effect may not be updated in the game.

In this example, after the first display (display of an image including the characters "LAST 2G" in this example) is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state in this example), the first game (in this example). When the execution of the three-card betting game is started, the specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated to display the second display in the first game (three-card betting game). (In this example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 1G") is configured to be displayable.

On the other hand, after the first display (display of the image including the characters "LAST 2G") is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state), the execution of the second game (in this example, the two-card betting game) starts. If so, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated and the second display (display of the image including the characters "LAST 1G") is displayed in the second game (two-card betting game). It is configured not to be displayed.

Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of counter update display / When no judge effect is performed>
FIG. 54A is a diagram showing an example of the update display of the counter when the judge effect is not performed by the two-card betting game.

The game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and a two-card betting game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since the two-card betting game was performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since the two-card betting game was played in the AT2 state, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed even when the push order is internally won.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed during the period from the game R27 to the game R18, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2. However, since the three-card betting game was played in the subsequent game R17, the production state shifts to the LMT state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state. For this reason, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is not executed. Further, in this example, since the AT2 state is changed to the LMT state, the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is not displayed.

The game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has occurred, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation is being executed. ..

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is being executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is 2. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the remaining number of games in the LMT state (effect state) is used by using the effect image display device 157. Although the count value of the counter is 2, since it is the final game in the high navigation state, the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the game medium) is executed. While displaying the number of acquired games, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) (in this example, "2/20 more" The display of the image including the characters "") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

In this example, the game after shifting to the LMT state is a 3-card bet game, but since the 2-card bet game is played in the AT2 state immediately before, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter). The number of games remaining in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is digested without being digested. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed without being able to digest some games in the LMT state.

<Specific example of counter update display / When judge effect and ED effect are not performed>
FIG. 54B is a diagram showing an example of the update display of the counter when the judge effect and the ED effect are not performed by the two-card betting game.

The game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and a two-card betting game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since the two-card betting game was performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since the two-card betting game was played in the AT2 state, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed even when the push order is internally won.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed during the period from game R27 to game R0, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the production state counter) is not updated and remains at 2. , The effect state shifts from the high navigation state to the low navigation state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state or the LMT state. Therefore, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the ED effect corresponding to the LMT state are not executed. Further, in this example, since the AT2 state is shifted to the low navigation state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state and the display of the judge end screen corresponding to the end of the judge state are not executed.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a two-card betting game is performed. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is used by using the effect image display device 157. The count value) is 2, but since it is the final game in the high navigation state, the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is displayed and the high navigation state is displayed even though the game has not shifted to the LMT state. While the result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is being executed, the AT2 effect is finished.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed during the period from game R27 to game R0, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the production state counter) is not consumed, and the high navigation state is achieved. Only the remaining number of games in (count value of high navigation state counter) is consumed. As a result, the transition to the judge state or the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed without being able to digest all the games in the LMT state (20 games in this example). There is.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production>
Next, specific examples of the ED effect, the freeze effect, and the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIGS. 55 to 58 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 3-card betting game only>
FIG. 55 shows the ED when only a three-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of production and freeze production.

The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to produce the effect state. Has transitioned from the judge state to the LMT state, so the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3") suggesting a stop operation. (Display) is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number in the LMT state. The display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R19 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the above and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20") is executed. There is. Since the flow of the subsequent production of games R18 to R2 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Execute a display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "1/20"). ing. Further, in this game R1, the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest a setting suggestion effect (setting value can be inferred) indicating a set value (setting 1 to setting 6) indicated by reference numeral A or “suggestion A” in the figure. (Direction) is being executed. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap a part of the ED effect.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") is executed. ing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. .. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a part of the background display. Further, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and suggestion A and suggestion B may be performed at the same time in the final game in the LMT state.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 3-card betting game and 2-card betting game>
FIG. 56A shows a three-card betting game and a two-card bet when the production state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect and the freeze effect at the time of performing a game.

The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and a two-card betting game is played in the judge state. In this game R19, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the game R19, the effect state is the judge state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, which satisfies the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but is a two-card betting game. Therefore, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

In this example, an example is shown in which the judge effect is executed even when the two-card betting game is performed in the judge state, but there are a plurality of related cases in which the judge effect is executed over a plurality of games. When the two-card betting game is played in the judge state, the scene of the judge effect may not be updated in the game.

The following game R18 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R18, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to produce the effect state. Has transitioned from the judge state to the LMT state, so the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3") suggesting a stop operation. Show) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R18 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. High navigation because the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19. The number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (book). In the example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20 more") is executed. Since the flow of the subsequent production of games R17 to R1 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is being executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is 1. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "1/20 remaining"). Display) is being executed. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value indicated by reference numeral A or “suggestion A” in the figure. .. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap a part of the ED effect.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "1/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. .. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a part of the background display. Further, the display timing of the ED effect end screen is not limited to this example, and the display may be started when other conditions such as acceptance of the pressing operation of the start lever 135 are satisfied.

In this example, it is configured so that the execution of a specific effect (ED effect in this example) can be started in an advantageous state (LMT state in this example), and a certain requirement is satisfied when the execution of the game is started. In the case (in this example, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 20G), if the game is the first game (in this example, a 3-card betting game), a specific count value (book). In the example, the high navigation state counter) is updated so that the execution of a specific effect (ED effect) can be started in the first game (three-card betting game).

On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of execution of the game (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 20G), the game is the second game (in this example, a two-card betting game). In the case of, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that the execution of the specific effect (ED effect) is not started in the second game (three-card betting game). Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

In this example, it is configured so that the execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in an advantageous state (in this example, the LMT state), and when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of execution of the game (in this example, high). When the number of remaining games in the navigation state reaches 20G), if the game is the first game (in this example, a 3-card betting game), a specific count value (in this example, a high navigation state counter). ) Is updated so that the execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in the first game (three-card betting game).

On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of execution of the game (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 20G), the game is the second game (in this example, a two-card betting game). In the case of, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that the execution of a certain freeze effect is not started in the second game (three-card betting game). Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, in this example, the game after shifting to the LMT state is a 3-card betting game, but since the 2-card betting game is performed in the immediately preceding judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (directing). The count value of the status counter) is not digested, and only the remaining number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation status counter) is digested. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed without being able to digest some games in the LMT state.

FIG. 56B is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 56A. In this example, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and in the game R18, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18, and the conditions for transition from the judge state to the LMT state, respectively. (The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but since it is a two-card betting game, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

In addition, since the two games of game R19 and game R18 are betting games in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is not consumed, and the navigation is high. Only the remaining number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is exhausted, and the number of games in the LMT state is 18. Therefore, the ED effect of the final game in the high navigation state (the LMT state when shifting to the LMT state) is not executed without executing the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) that is executed when the 19th game in the LMT state is triggered. Only the setting suggestion effect (suggestion B), which is executed when the end screen is displayed, is executed.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 2-card betting game only>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect when the two-card betting game is continued in the judge state in the high navigation state.

The games R25 to R19 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25 to 19, and the two-card betting game is performed in the judge state. In the period from the game R25 to the game R19, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 9.

Therefore, in the games R25 to R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state. Since it is in the state, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, but the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, which satisfies the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but is a two-card betting game. Therefore, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 9, and a two-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the judge state. , Performs a judge production corresponding to the judge state.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the judge state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") and the display of the judge effect are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

In this example, since the two-card betting game is continued in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is not consumed from the remaining 9 games, and the remaining in the high navigation state. Only the number of games (count value of the high navigation status counter) has been consumed. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed without being able to digest all the games in the LMT state.

Further, since it has not shifted to the LMT state, the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) that is executed at the 19th game of the LMT state is not executed, and the high navigation state (when shifting to the LMT state) Only the setting suggestion effect (suggestion B), which is executed when the display of the ED effect end screen of the final game in the LMT state) is displayed, is executed.

<Specific examples of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting suggestion effect / Modified example of freeze effect>
58 (a) and 58 (b) are views showing an example of a modification of the freeze effect. In this example, another freeze effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “second freeze effect”) different from the freeze effect that is executed at the same time as the ED effect is configured to be executable.

FIG. 58A is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect when a three-card betting game is performed. The game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 31, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the start condition of the interlocking effect is satisfied), the effect for managing the number of games up to the game in which the second freeze effect is started is performed. Start counting the start counter.

The game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R327, a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the three-card betting game is started, and the effect start counter that started counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value). The interlocking effect executed from the game R327 to the game R326 is ended (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect.

In this example, since the AT of 200G was added in the game R325, an image including the number of additional games of AT was displayed after the end of the second freeze effect (in this example, "+ 200G !!" After executing (displaying an image containing the characters), when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect state is changed by using the effect image display device 157. Since it is in the AT2 state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 229, the number of games (count of the effect state counter). The display including the image indicating the value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 229G") is being executed.

On the other hand, FIG. 58B is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect when a two-card betting game is performed in the middle of the AT2 state. The game R325 of this example is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and a two-card betting game is performed. In this game R325, since the two-card betting game was performed in the AT2 state, the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not updated and remains at 30.

Therefore, in the game R325, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. Therefore, while executing the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated.

The following game R324 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 324 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R324, a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the three-card betting game is started, and the effect start counter that started counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value). The interlocking effect executed from the game R327 to the game R325 is terminated (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect. The flow of the effect after the second freeze effect is the same as the flow of the effect of the game R325 in FIG. 58 (a).

<Specific example of ED production in non-AT state>
Next, a specific example of the ED effect in the non-AT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60. 59 to 60 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a three-card betting game is performed. The game R550 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 550 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the normal state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R550, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT1 state. , The AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed, and the operation navigation (display of "2-1-3" in this example) suggesting the stop operation is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 19, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 19G”) is executed. ..

The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the AT1 state is 24, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 24, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 24G”) is executed. ..

The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has occurred, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation is executed, and the LMT is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed.

The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Execute a display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "1/20"). ing. Further, in this game R1, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value indicated by reference numeral A or “suggestion A” in the figure. ..

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") is executed. ing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

FIG. 60A is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when the game shifts to the LMT state after performing a two-card betting game in the normal state. The games R900 to R18 are games in a normal state in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 900 to 18, and a two-card betting game is played. In games R19 to R18, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19 to 18, which satisfies the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but bets two cards. Since it is a game, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the normal state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to produce the effect state. Has shifted from the normal state to the LMT state, so the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3") suggesting a stop operation. Show) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R17 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. High navigation because the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19. The number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (book). In the example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20 more") is executed. Since the flow of production of the following games R16 to R1 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is being executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is 2. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect related to the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) is displayed. While executing (the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 more"). Display) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

In this example, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state (= high navigation state) in this example) in the advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), and the first advantageous gaming state. It is configured to be able to execute the end effect (in this example, the display of the ED effect end screen) related to the end of the state (AT2 state (= high navigation state)), and the first game (high navigation state) in the advantageous state (high navigation state). In this example, when only a three-card betting game is performed, the game may shift to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state) and the end effect may be executed, which is an advantageous state. When only the second game (in this example, the two-card betting game) is played in the (high navigation state), the end effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state). It is configured to.

Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is being performed. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games.

In this example, the state shifts to the LMT state without shifting from the normal state to a state other than the LMT state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but since the three-card betting game was performed, the ED effect and setting suggestion are made. The production is being carried out.

FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when the two-card betting game is continued in the normal state.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and a two-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the normal state. , The normal production corresponding to the normal state is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the high navigation state. , The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state is executed, and the result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the high navigation state is executed, while the display of the normal effect is displayed. It is erasing. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

In this example, in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the low navigation state without shifting to the state other than the normal state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but the ED effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed.

<Specific example of ED production during BB internal winning>
Next, a specific example of the ED effect during the BB internal winning will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect, and shows the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect performed after the BB game. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, only an effect different from the effect described with reference to FIG. 59 will be described.

The game R580 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 580, and the BB is internally elected in the normal state. In this game R580, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the bet operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state to the normal state. In addition to executing the corresponding normal effect, the BB confirmation effect (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "bonus confirmed!") That suggests the internal winning of the BB is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R580 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest a stop operation related to the BB prize. The operation navigation (in this example, the navigation suggesting that the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" corresponding to the BB (bonus combination) is aimed at) is being executed.

The following game R579 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 579 and the BB is won in the normal state. In this game R579, the production image is displayed when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed on the winning line). The device 157 is used to start a BB effect that notifies the start of a BB game.

FIG. 61B is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect performed during the internal winning of the BB. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, only an effect different from the effect described with reference to FIG. 61B will be described.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the BB is internally elected. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the state (the end effect related to the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media). Is running.

Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest an operation navigation related to a BB winning operation (in this example, a symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” corresponding to a BB (bonus combination). The display of the navigation) that suggests aiming at "is being continued, and the setting suggestion effect (the effect that the set value can be guessed) that suggests the set value is being executed, which is indicated by the symbol B or "suggestion B" in the figure. ..

In this example, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (a certain gaming state) (in this example, the AT2 state) in an advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), and is configured to be in a certain gaming state. It is configured to be able to execute the effect related to the end (end effect) (in this example, the display of the ED effect end screen), and shifts to a certain game state (AT2 state) in the advantageous state (high navigation state) to end the effect. (Display of the ED effect end screen) can be started, and when the game is played in the advantageous state (high navigation state) and the special role is internally won, the advantageous state (high navigation state) It is configured so that the execution of the end effect (display of the ED effect end screen) can be started without shifting to a certain game state (AT2 state) in the high navigation state).

For this reason, even if the advantageous state ends without aligning the symbols related to the special role, the player's feelings of disappointment and impatience can be alleviated by making the player feel as if he / she has shifted to a certain advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of interlocking production>
Next, a specific example of the interlocking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 63 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart. Further, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the interlocking effect in chronological order.

<Specific example of interlocking production / When interlocking production proceeds normally>
FIG. 62A is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the interlocking effect normally proceeds.
Here, the interlocking effect refers to an effect that is composed of a plurality of related scenes (story) and is executed over a plurality of games. The production mode of the interlocking effect is not particularly limited, but in the interlocking effect (normal pattern) of this example, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the scene of "enemy selection" indicated by the reference numeral N and the "enemy determination" indicated by the reference numeral N + 1. , Confrontation "scene," enemy attack "scene indicated by code N + 2," ally attack "scene represented by code N + 3," victory (or defeat) "scene indicated by code N + 4.

Returning to FIG. 62, the game R90 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 90 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 9, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R90, a scene of "enemy selection" is executed as one scene of the interlocking effect. Although not shown, in the following period from the game R89 to the game R85, since the three-card betting game was performed, one scene of the interlocking effect is executed in each game, and the interlocking effect normally proceeds.

Subsequent games R86 to R83 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 83 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 2, and the three-card betting game is performed. In the period from game R86 to game R83, as a continuation of the interlocking production, the scene of "enemy decision, confrontation" → "enemy attack" scene → "ally attack" scene → "victory" scene is executed in this order. And the interlocking production is executed until the last scene.

<Specific example of interlocking production / When interlocking production does not proceed normally>
FIG. 62B is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the interlocking effect does not normally proceed.
The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and the three-card betting game is performed. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect normally proceeds.

The following game R84 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84, and a two-card betting game is played in the judge state. In this game R84, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the game R84, the effect state is the judge state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the character "LAST 4G" is included. Display) has not been updated. Further, since the two-card betting game was performed during the interlocking production in the judge state, the scene of the interlocking production is not advanced, and the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is executed again. Therefore, in this example, the same "enemy attack" scene is duplicated in both the game R85 and the game R84, and the interlocking effect does not normally proceed. However, in the subsequent games R83 to R82, a three-card betting game was performed, so during the period of this game R83 to game R82, as a continuation of the interlocking production, the scene of "ally attack" → the scene of "victory" However, they are executed in this order, and the interlocking effect is executed until the final scene.

In this example, a certain effect (first effect) (in this example, the judge effect) can be executed over a plurality of games, and the first effect (judgment effect) is the first scene. (In this example, the "enemy attack" scene) and the second scene (in this example, the "ally attack" scene) are included, and the first scene ("enemy attack" scene) is produced. If the execution of the first game (in this example, the three-card betting game) is started after the game in which the game is played, the second scene (“Friends”) in the first game (three-card betting game) It is configured so that the execution of the production of the "attack" scene) can be started, and after the game in which the production of the first scene (the scene of the "enemy attack") is performed, the second game (two in this example) When the execution of the betting game) is started, the execution of the production of the second scene (the scene of the "ally attack") is not started in the second game (two-card betting game). ..

Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

FIG. 63A is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the ED effect is started without the interlocking effect normally progressing.
The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and the three-card betting game is performed. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect normally proceeds.

Subsequent games R84 to R18 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 18, and two betting games are played in the judge state. In the period from the game R84 to the game R18, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the games R84 to R18, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state. Since it is in a state, while performing a judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, it is called "LAST 4G"). The display including characters) has not been updated. Furthermore, since the two-card betting game was performed during the interlocking production in the judge state, the scene of the interlocking production is not advanced, and the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is continuously executed. .. Therefore, in this example, the same "enemy attack" scene is executed in duplicate during the period of the game R85 to the game R18, and the interlocking effect does not normally proceed.

The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to produce the effect state. Has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, so the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3") suggesting a stop operation. Show) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

In this example, the same "enemy attack" scenes are duplicated during the period from game R85 to game R18, and the interlocking effect does not proceed normally. Therefore, in game R17, the ED effect shifts to the LMT state. It has been started, and the interlocking production has not been executed until the final scene (in this example, the "winning" scene or the "defeating" scene of the interlocking production that functions as a notice of the subsequent game).

FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an interlocking effect when the two-card betting game is continued in the judge state.

The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and the three-card betting game is performed. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect normally proceeds.

Subsequent games R84 to R1 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 1, and two betting games are played in the judge state. During the period from the game R84 to the game R1, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the games R84 to R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state. Since it is in a state, while performing a judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, it is called "LAST 4G"). The display including characters) has not been updated.

Furthermore, since the two-card betting game was performed during the interlocking production in the judge state, the scene of the interlocking production is not advanced, and the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is continuously executed. .. Therefore, in this example, during the period of the game R85 to the game R1, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the same "enemy attack" scene is executed in duplicate, and the interlocking effect does not normally proceed. Therefore, the player can easily notice that the two-card betting game has been performed by watching the progress of the interlocking effect.

The following game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 4, and a two-card betting game is performed. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the final game in the high navigation state is performed by using the effect image display device 157. From, while executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state and the result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the high navigation state, the display of the judge effect. Is being erased. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

In this example, the same "enemy attack" scenes are duplicated during the period of games R85 to R1, and the interlocking effect does not proceed normally. Therefore, the high navigation state ends in game R0 and the ED effect is produced. Has been started, and the interlocking effect has not been executed until the final scene (in this example, the "win" scene or the "defeat" scene of the interlocking effect that functions as a notice of the subsequent game). Therefore, the player can easily notice that the two-card betting game has been performed by watching the progress of the interlocking effect.

64 (B) to 64 (D) are views showing a modified example of the interlocking effect. The interlocking effect according to the present invention is not limited to the interlocking effect described with reference to FIG. 64 (A), and for example, as shown by reference numeral N in FIG. 64 (B), a scene of “enemy selection” and “enemy determination”. , Confrontation "scene may be composed of one scene.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), a new scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" is added, and as shown by the symbol N + 1 in the same figure (C), a scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" is added. And "enemy attack" scene is composed of one scene, or as shown by the code N + 2 in the figure (C), "enemy attack and ally attack" scene and "ally attack" scene are composed of one scene. You may.

Further, after executing the scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" composed of one scene as shown by the reference numeral N + 1 in FIG. 64 (D), one scene as shown by the reference numeral N + 2 in the same figure (D). You may execute multiple "enemy attack" scenes composed of.

Further, the content of the privilege given to the player may be changed or the degree of expectation may be different depending on the type of the interlocking effect shown in FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (D). Further, even when a two-card betting game is performed, all the scenes may be configured to be executed without fail in some aspect of the interlocking effect, and when a two-card betting game is performed, all the scenes may be executed. (Or the last scene suggesting a judge result (eg, a "win" or "defeat" scene) may not be played.

<Specific example of specific display>
Next, a specific example of the specific display will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIGS. 65 to 66 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart. Further, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the specific display in chronological order.

<Specific example of specific display / Three-card betting game when transitioning to a judge>
FIG. 65A is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when a three-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

The game R82 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 82 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R82, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state (for example, the effect in which the character of the palace is running, which is indicated by the reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A)) is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2". Since the number of games remaining in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1, the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is included. Display (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

In this game R82, the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 (in the example shown by the reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A), the characters "GET 1320" are included. Display) and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), it is suggested that the third stop operation is accepted by using the effect image display device 157. (For example, the effect of darkening the entire screen, which is indicated by the reference numeral d1'in FIG. 67 (A)) is executed.

The following game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R81, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as the game R82, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R81, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state (for example, the background image including the character "end" indicated by the reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A)) is displayed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example) For example, while executing the display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state indicated by the reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A), an image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. The display including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In this example, the display of the AT2 end effect screen is executed in the final game in the AT2 state, but it may be executed at other timings (for example, after shifting to the judge state).

The following game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R80, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state from the AT2 state. Since the transition to the state has started, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter) is concerned. The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "defeat within 10G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R80 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the judge state. Therefore, since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") is being executed.

Here, an example of a judge effect executed in the game R80 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (A). In this example, when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the judge effect start screen indicated by the reference numeral d3 is displayed, and when the first stop operation is accepted in the game, the judge effect indicated by the reference numeral d4 (interlocking effect) is displayed. (Enemy selection) scene, which is one scene, and the effect indicating that the enemy is not selected) is executed, and when the third stop operation is accepted in the game, the judge effect indicated by the symbol d4' When a certain amount of time has passed since the third stop operation was received in the game after executing (a scene of "enemy selection" which is one scene of the interlocking effect and indicating that the enemy was selected). In addition, a judge effect (an effect indicating that the enemy has been confirmed, which is a scene of "enemy selection" which is one scene of the interlocking effect) is executed.

<Specific example of specific display / Two-card betting game when transitioning to a judge>
FIG. 65B is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when a two-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Since the flow of the production of the games R82 to R81 and the game R79 is almost the same as the production described with reference to FIG. 65A, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and a two-card betting game is played. In this game R80, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, a display including a judge effect corresponding to the judge state and an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. When a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted) without doing so, a specific display (in this example, black-painted) is used by using the effect image display device 157. Display that includes only the background image) is displayed.

Here, the "specific display (specific display)" means a display not related to the advantageous state, for example, a display displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) (for example, AT2 state). A display different from any of the AT2 end screen display) and a certain display (for example, judge effect) corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the judge state) is applicable. The display mode of the specific display is not particularly limited, and is, for example, the display of an image including a certain character (in this example, the character "preparing for production") represented by the reference numeral d5 in FIG. 67 (B). It may be a display consisting of a certain pattern, a figure, or the like.

In this example, the three-card betting game is performed after the two-card betting game is performed in the judge state, but when the two-card betting game is continued, a certain condition is also satisfied in the two-card betting game. With the establishment (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the specific display is displayed by using the effect image display device 157. Further, in this case, the display of the AT2 end screen may be executed until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). With such a configuration, the player can grasp the end of the AT2 state even when the specific display is displayed, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

<Specific example of specific display / Modified example of 3-card betting game when shifting to judge>
FIG. 66A is a diagram showing a modified example of the flow of the effect when a three-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

The game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R81, as in the game R82, the AT2 effect (for example, the effect in which the character of the palace is running, which is indicated by the reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67A) is executed and the operation navigation is executed, while in the AT2 state. A display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R81, the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 (in the example shown by the reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A), the characters "GET 1320" are included. (Display) and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to determine that the final game is in the AT2 state. While displaying the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state (for example, the background image including the character "end" indicated by the reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A)), the result display 1 in the AT2 state is displayed. Not running.

The following game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R80, the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state, the display including the characters "GET 1328 sheets" shown by the reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A)) is executed. doing.

<Specific example of specific display / Modified example of two-card betting game at the time of judge transition>
FIG. 66B is a diagram showing a modified example of the flow of the effect when a two-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Since the flow of the production of the game R81 is almost the same as the production described with reference to FIG. 66A, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and a two-card betting game is played. In this game R80, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, a display including a judge effect corresponding to the judge state and an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. When a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted) without doing so, a specific display (in this example, black-painted) is used by using the effect image display device 157. Display that includes only the background image) is displayed.

Further, in this game R81, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, in FIG. 67 (B), the reference numeral d2 is used). The number of game media acquired in the high navigation state is displayed, and the display including the characters "GET 1326 sheets (1328 sheets-2 sheets because the player won the loss by multiplying 2 sheets)" is being executed.

In this example, in the advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state in this example). It is configured, and the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state), and the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is After the end, it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state), and the display means (in this example, the effect image display device 157) is the first display (in this example, the AT2 end screen). ), The second display (in this example, the judge effect), and the third display (in this example, the specific display (display including only the black-painted background image)), which is the first means. The display is a display displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), and the second display is a display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state). The third display is a specific display not related to the advantageous state (high navigation state), and the execution of the first game (in this example, the three-card betting game) is started after the first display is displayed. In that case, a specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the first display is displayed. Later, when the execution of the second game (two-card betting game in this example) is started, the specific count value (high navigation state counter in this example) is updated and the third display in the game is displayed. Is configured to be displayable.

Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. Since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (D) are views showing a specific example of the flow of the effect including the specific display. In the above embodiment, the effects of FIGS. (A) and (B) are mainly applied, but the interlocking effects according to the present invention are not limited to these effects, and for example, the effects of FIGS. As shown by reference numeral d6 in FIG. (D), the number of game media acquired in a certain effect state (AT2 state in this example) is displayed instead of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state. May be good.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter>
Next, a specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 74. 68 to 74 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

Here, the item of "ceiling counter" in each figure indicates the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached. Further, the "promotion counter", "AT1 type", "judgment mode", and "confirmation notification flag" in each figure indicate variables, flags, and the like (internal information of the slot machine) in the above-mentioned various flowcharts, respectively. In addition, the item of "conditional device" in each figure is the No. of the conditional device in FIG. (Number) is shown.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling in a 3-card betting game>
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the three-card game is performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is reached, and the effect state shifts in the order of the normal state → the confirmed notification state → the AT1 state.

The game R300 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 4, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction reaches a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and as a normal effect, a precursor effect suggesting that the AT1 state is entered. Has started. Further, in the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), the AT1 type lottery is performed and the AT1 winning flag is turned on. We are preparing to set and shift the production state to the AT1 state. Although not shown, during the following period from game R299 to game R297, the precursory effect is continued as a normal effect.

The following game R296 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 296 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R296, since the effect status counter has become 0 in the normal state (because the normal state has ended), preparations are being made to shift the effect state from the normal state to the finalized notification state, and as a normal effect. , Is performing a precursory effect that suggests a transition to the AT1 state.

The following game R295 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 295 and the game is in the finalized notification state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and the three-card betting game is performed. In this game R295, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "bonus confirmed!") That notifies the transition to the AT1 state (pseudo-bonus in this example) is executed. Further, in this game R295, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not to promote the AT1 type. After that, in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, a process of setting the final notification flag from off to on is performed.

The following game R294 is a second game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 294 and the final notification state is set, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R294, as a normal effect, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmed!") Is continued. Further, in this game R294, in the final notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20, since the AT1 type is low, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed and whether or not to promote the AT1 type is determined. After that, the display related to the promotion lottery of AT1 type (promotion lottery display) is performed.

Further, in this game R294, since the final notification flag is turned on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the condition device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type (in this example, No. 3 or No. 3 or It is determined whether or not it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 5, the production state is maintained in the final notification state.

The following game R293 is a third game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 293 and the final notification state is set, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R293, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmed!") Is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R293, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not to promote the AT1 type. Is going.

Further, in this game R293, since the final notification flag is on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the condition device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type (No. 3 or No. 3 in this example). It is determined whether or not it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 3, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that prompts the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and the preparation for shifting the production state from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is prepared. Is going.

The following game R292 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 292 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalized notification state is 20, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R292, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the BET operation is performed), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT1 state. Therefore, the AT1 state. In addition to executing the AT1 effect corresponding to, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter before subtraction) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 20, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the character “20G”) is executed.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the ceiling is not reached in the 2-card betting game>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the two-card betting game is performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is not reached, and the effect state is maintained in the normal state.

In this example, the ceiling counter is not subtracted because the two-card betting game is continued in the game after the ceiling counter reaches 699. Therefore, in the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, it is not determined that the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), and the effect state shifts to the AT1 state. There is no such thing. Further, since the effect state counter in the normal state is not updated in the two-card betting game, it is not determined that the effect state counter has become 0 in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. 28. , The production state will not be the final notification state.

That is, in this example, there is a second counter (ceiling counter in this example) different from the first counter (high navigation state counter in this example) regarding the advantageous state (high navigation state in this example). It is configured so that a certain count value of the second counter (ceiling counter) can be updated every time the game is played in the advantageous state (high navigation state), and a certain count value is the second one. When the value (0 in this example) is reached, it is configured to shift to a specific advantageous state (AT1 state in this example) which is advantageous for the player, and is the first in the recorded advantageous state (high navigation state). When one game (in this example, a three-card betting game) is played, both a specific count value (value of the high navigation state counter) and a certain count value (value of the ceiling counter) are counted. The value is configured to be updatable, and when a second game (in this example, a two-card betting game) is played in an advantageous state (high navigation state), a specific count value (high navigation state counter) Only the specific count value (value of the high navigation state counter) out of the value) and a certain count value (value of the ceiling counter) is configured to be updatable.

Therefore, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling in a 3-card betting game and a 2-card betting game>
FIG. 70 shows an example of the flow of the production when the 3-card game and the 2-card betting game are performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is reached, and the production state shifts in the order of the normal state → the confirmed notification state → the AT1 state. It is a figure.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-card betting game (in this example, the game starts from the game following the game R999). The ceiling counter is not subtracted during the period of 100 games up to R899). For this reason, in the subsequent games R898 and later, a three-card betting game is performed and the ceiling counter is subtracted. However, the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 and the ceiling is reached). The number of games to reach the ceiling is delayed by 100 games, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 200. Since the flow of the effect in the transition from the normal state to the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is the same as in other embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Update of ceiling counter and promotion counter / When shifting to LMT state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a flow of production when a three-card game and a two-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state and the game shifts to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-card betting game (in this example, the game starts from the game following the game R999). The ceiling counter is not subtracted in the period until the game before R20). For this reason, in the subsequent games after the game R19, a three-card betting game is performed, but compared to the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300). The number of games until reaching the ceiling is delayed, and the game shifts to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling (the ceiling counter never reaches 0). Since the flow of the effect when shifting from the normal state to the LMT state is the same as that of the other embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When shifting to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a flow of production when a three-card game and a two-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state and the game shifts to a low navigation state without reaching the ceiling.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-card betting game (in this example, the game starts from the game following the game R999). The ceiling counter is not subtracted in the period up to R0). Therefore, compared to the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300), the number of games until reaching the ceiling is delayed, and the number of games does not reach the ceiling. (The ceiling counter never becomes 0), the high navigation state ends in the normal state, and the state shifts to the low navigation state.

Since the flow of the effect when shifting from the normal state in the high navigation state to the normal state in the low navigation state is the same as in other embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted, but FIG. 60 (b) will be used. As explained, in this example, in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the low navigation state without shifting to the state other than the normal state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but the ED effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed. ing.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the promotion counter is not updated>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the three-card game and the two-card bet game are performed in the final notification state in the high navigation state and the promotion counter is not updated.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed in a plurality of games in the finalized notification state in which the production state has changed from the normal state, the period of the two-card betting game (in this example, the next of the game R294). The promotion counter is not subtracted during the period from the game to the game R270). For this reason, the number of games from the final notification state to the AT1 state is delayed compared to the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300), and AT1 After displaying the type of promotion lottery (promotion lottery display) over a plurality of game periods (in this example, the period from game R294 to game R270), the state shifts to the AT1 state. Since the flow of the effect when shifting from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is the same as in other embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When operation navigation is not performed>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the operation navigation is not performed in the final notification state of the high navigation state.

In this example, in contrast to the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300), the condition device is No. 1 in the first game in the final notification state. The only difference is that it is 3. In the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, when the final notification flag is on, the condition device is the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 4 in this example) related to the AT1 type. Whether or not it is judged. However, in the game R295, since the final notification flag is off, the determination itself is not performed, so that the operation navigation performed when the conditional device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type (in this example, Seven 1). Alternatively, the navigation that prompts the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 2) is not executed, and the preparation for shifting the effect state from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is not performed.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the AT1 type is promoted>
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of production when the AT1 type is promoted in the final notification state in the high navigation state.

The game R270 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 270 and the promotion counter reaches a certain value (10 in this example) in the finalized notification state, and a three-card betting game is played. is there. In this game R270, since the promotion counter has reached a certain value (10 in this example), the AT1 type is changed from low to high (AT1 type is promoted), and the judge mode is changed from normal to high accuracy. doing.

Further, in this game R270, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT1 type promotion lottery. After performing (promotion lottery display), when another certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the promotion of AT1 type is promoted using the effect image display device 157. Is displayed (promotion display) to suggest that is confirmed.

Since the final notification flag is on in the game R270, if the condition device is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type, in addition to the promotion display, the operation navigation (in this example, Seven 1 or Seven 2). (Navigation that encourages the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of) is executed, and preparations are made to shift the effect state from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state.

The game R268 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 268 and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R268, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmed!") Is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R268, since the final notification flag is on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the condition device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type (in this example, No. 3 or No. 3 or It is determined whether or not it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 4, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that encourages the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of blue 7) is being executed.

<Specific examples of changes in rights due to reaching the ceiling>
Next, specific examples of changes in rights due to reaching the ceiling will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. 76 to 77 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the ceiling is not reached in the final notification state in the high navigation state.

The game R329 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 329, and the game is in the final notification state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and the three-card betting game is performed. In this game R329, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "bonus confirmed!") Notifying the transition to the AT1 state is executed. Further, in this game R329, since the internal winning result was a loss, the production state is maintained in the final notification state.

The following game R328 is a second game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the final notification state is set, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R328, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") Is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R328, the condition device is No. Since it was 3, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that prompts the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and the preparation for shifting the production state from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is prepared. Is going.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327, the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalized notification state is 20, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the BET operation is performed), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT1 state. Therefore, the AT1 state. In addition to executing the AT1 effect corresponding to, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter before subtraction) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 20, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the character “20G”) is executed.

In this example, since the ceiling was not reached in the confirmed notification state in the high navigation state, the AT1 type was not changed from low to high (not promoted).

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the ceiling is reached in the final notification state in the high navigation state.

The game R300 is a game in a finalized notification state with 300 remaining games in the high navigation state. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and the AT1 type is changed from low to high (promoted). There is). Further, in this game R300, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") Notifying the transition to the AT1 state is executed. Further, in this game R300, the condition device is No. Since it was 4, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that encourages the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1) is being executed.

In this example, when the ceiling is reached in the final notification state in the high navigation state, the first right (pseudo-bonus with low profit) is acquired and the second right (pseudo-bonus with high profit) is obtained. Since it is configured to be in the acquired state, even if the game from the determination of the privilege grant to the transition to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state) in the advantageous state becomes long. You can play the game with a sense of expectation.

<Other production examples>
Next, other production examples will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining other production examples.

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a three-card betting game is performed in the LMT state, and FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram showing a case where a two-card betting game is performed in the LMT state. It is a figure which showed an example of the ED production of.

According to the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment, when the normal three-card betting game continues to be executed in the LMT state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the period of 20 games in the LMT state. During the middle, the ED effect is performed, and the end screen is executed in the final game. On the other hand, when the two-card betting game continues to be executed in the LMT state, the display of the end screen is continued as shown in FIG. 78 (b).

FIG. 78 (c) is a diagram showing a modified example of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). In the effect example shown in FIG. 67 (D), the specific display is displayed using all the display areas of the effect image display device 157, but as shown in FIG. 78 (c), at least the first display area (this example). The first display area has a plurality of display areas including the upper half display area) and the second display area (in this example, the lower half display area), and the first display area switches the display in a certain period of time. It is a display area, and the second display area is a display area in which the display is not switched in the certain period, and the specific display may be displayed in the first display area. With such a configuration, a specific display can be displayed in the first display area, and a certain display can be continuously displayed in the second display area, so that the effect can be enhanced. There is.

As described above, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-1”) is an operating means (for example, FIG. 1). Stop button 137 to 139), and shift to either a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). A game table including a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). Stopping each reel of the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) It is configured to be able to notify the position and the stop order (information that can identify the stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for example, the advantageous state) regarding the advantageous state. , The high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain end condition is satisfied. In the case of the above, the state is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, in the advantageous state). This is a condition that is satisfied when the number of games since the transition reaches the upper limit), and the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and the game medium A second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets is the second number is playable, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image showing a certain value. It is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 79), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a value after updating the certain value. It is a display including a representative image (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”; for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 79), and after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the first game When the execution is started, the count value is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game. If the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the profit state, the count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is a game table characterized by being configured as follows. Note that FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-1.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-1 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

The game console according to the present invention 1-1 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the advantageous game state is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the first advantageous game state can notify the operation information. It is a certain gaming state, and the certain value is a value indicating a value regarding the number of games played (for example, the number of remaining games) in the first advantageous gaming state, and is one of the plurality of types of displays. Is a display including an image showing that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”), and is the first display in the first advantageous game state. When the second game is played, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that the player is not embarrassed that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image relating to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth display"). The fourth display includes a display including an image relating to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state (for example, a display including characters such as "+20" and the number of remaining games "LAST 5" to "LAST 25". The display to be changed), and when the first game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may be displayed, and the first advantageous gaming state. When the second game is played, the fourth display may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, the fourth display may not be displayed when the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, so that the impression that the number of games is lost in the advantageous game state is lost. By giving to the player, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, even when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first display is not displayed and the first game is performed. The advantageous gaming state may end.

With such a configuration, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the advantageous gaming state is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is different from the first advantageous gaming state. In another gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the third game is performed. The first advantageous gaming state may end and the second advantageous gaming state may start without displaying the above.

With such a configuration, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. So, while carefully selecting the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games, the second advantageous game state may start when the second game is returned to the first game. It is possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned to the first game, and the motivation to play can be maintained.

Further, the winning combination internal lottery process (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result by performing the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state" means "the first display in a certain state in the advantageous state". Is displayed, and then the execution of the first game is started. ”The above-mentioned“ execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state. ” "When the game is performed" may mean "when the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in a certain state in the advantageous state". Further, when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the above-mentioned advantageous state, the count value is updated and the first game is described. "The second display is configured to be displayable" means "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is described." Is updated so that the second display is displayed in the first game. "

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-2”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, an operation navigation system using the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45) of the game console provided with the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 or the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of a specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state is changed from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. It is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and is a bet on the game medium. The first game in which the number is the first number (for example, a three-card betting game) and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game) can be executed. The second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. The game is configured so that the execution of a specific effect (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) can be started in the advantageous state, and a certain requirement is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game. In the case of the first game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the specific effect can be started in the first game, and the certain requirement at the time of starting the execution of the game. In the case where the above is satisfied, if the game is the second game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the specific effect is not started in the second game. It is a featured game table. Note that FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-2 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-2 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

The game console according to Invention 1-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may be configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the execution of the specific effect can be started on condition of the shift.

Further, the certain requirement is that the first count value is a second specific value, and even if the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. Good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is such that the operation information can be notified. The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state, and the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of games after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a certain number of times, and the second advantageous gaming state is said. It is a gaming state in which the player can stay until the end of the advantageous game state, and the specific effect may be an effect that can be performed in the second advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, when the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed without the second advantageous gaming being performed after the transition to the advantageous state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the second advantage The maximum number of times the first game is executed in the gaming state is the first number of times, and when the second advantageous game is performed after the transition to the advantageous state is performed and then the second advantageous gaming state is entered. (Hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the maximum number of times the first game is executed in the second advantageous game state may be the second number of times, and the number of times is higher than the first number of times. The second number of times is smaller, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed. , The display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"), and in the first case, the first display is displayed when shifting to the second advantageous gaming state. It is configured to be displayed, and in the second case, the first display may be displayed at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the advantageous game state is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information different from the second advantageous gaming state. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image showing that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, "second". "Display"), and when the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state ends without displaying the second display. There may be.

Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without performing the specific effect.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without performing a specific effect, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state, in the subsequent game. It is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

In addition, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be notified.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without being notified of information that is advantageous to the player, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state. It is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, it is configured so that the execution of a certain freeze effect (for example, the freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81) can be started in the advantageous state, and the specific effect is an effect related to the certain freeze effect. May be good.

Further, the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means includes a first display (for example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, the display means). It is a means capable of displaying the first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, and the first display includes an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image showing a certain number of remaining games (for example, the numerical value 29 shown in FIG. 79), and the second display is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that the player is not embarrassed that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the winning combination internal lottery process (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result by performing the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-3”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, an operation navigation system using the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45) of the game console provided with the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 or the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of a specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state is changed from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. It is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and is a bet on the game medium. The first game in which the number is the first number (for example, a three-card betting game) and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game) can be executed. The second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. In the advantageous state, the execution of a certain freeze effect (for example, the freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81) can be started, and when a certain requirement is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game, the said. When the game is the first game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the certain freeze effect can be started in the first game, and the execution of the certain freeze effect is started at the time of starting the execution of the game. When the requirement is satisfied, if the game is the second game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the certain freeze effect is not started in the second game. It is a game table characterized by this. Note that FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-3 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-3 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

The game console according to the invention 1-3 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may be configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the execution of the specific effect can be started on condition of the shift.

Further, the certain requirement is that the first count value is a second specific value, and even if the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. Good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

Further, the advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "second advantageous gaming state"; for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is described. The state is a certain gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, and the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of games after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a certain number of times. The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the player can stay until the end of the advantageous gaming state, and the certain freeze effect is started to be executed in connection with the transition to the second advantageous gaming state. It may be a production.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, when the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed without the second advantageous gaming being performed after the transition to the advantageous state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the second advantage The maximum number of times the first game is executed in the gaming state is the first number of times, and when the second advantageous game is performed after the transition to the advantageous state is performed and then the second advantageous gaming state is entered. (Hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the maximum number of times the first game is executed in the second advantageous game state may be the second number of times, and the number of times is higher than the first number of times. The second number of times is smaller, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed. , The display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"), and in the first case, the first display is displayed when shifting to the second advantageous gaming state. It is configured to be displayed, and in the second case, the first display may be displayed at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the advantageous game state is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information different from the second advantageous gaming state. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image showing that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, "second". "Display"), and when the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state ends without displaying the second display. There may be.

Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without performing the certain freeze effect.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without a certain freeze effect, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state, the subsequent game It is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, it is configured so that the execution of a specific effect (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) can be started in the advantageous state, and the certain freeze effect may be an effect related to the specific effect. Good.

In addition, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be notified.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without being notified of information that is advantageous to the player, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state. It is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means includes a first display (for example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, the display means). It is a means capable of displaying the first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, and the first display includes an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image showing a certain number of remaining games (for example, the numerical value 29 shown in FIG. 79), and the second display is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that the player is not embarrassed that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the winning combination internal lottery process (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result by performing the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-4”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, an operation navigation system using the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45) of the game console provided with the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 or the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of a specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state is changed from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. This is a condition that is satisfied when the count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the number of bets on the game medium is the first. It is configured to be able to execute a first game (for example, a three-card betting game) which is one number and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) where the number of bets on the game medium is the second number. The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. In the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and a certain effect regarding the end of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, shown in FIG. 82). The end effect fn1) is configured to be executable, and when only the first game is performed in the advantageous state, the process shifts to the first advantageous game state and the certain effect is executed. It is configured so that when only the second game is played in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. It is a game table characterized by being configured. Note that FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outline of Inventions 1-4 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-4 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is being performed. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games.

The game console according to the invention 1-4 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means determines the difference number of sheets, which is the difference between the game medium introduced by the player and the game medium acquired by the player. It is a means capable of displaying the difference number display to be shown, and when the difference number is less than 0, the difference number display is configured to display 0, and in the advantageous state, the first The expected value of the difference number is less than 0 when only the second game is played, and the certain one is executed when only the second game is played in the advantageous state. Even if it is an effect, it may be configured so that the difference number display is displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games.

Further, even when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. May be the case.

With such a configuration, a certain effect may be executed without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. , It becomes possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is different from the first advantageous gaming state. In another advantageous gaming state, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the first advantageous gaming state is not performed without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state. It may be configured so that the certain effect may be executed by shifting to the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, the number of games is lost in the advantageous gaming state because the ending effect may be executed by shifting to the second advantageous gaming state without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state. By giving the player an impression, the player is made to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games, while the second advantageous game state is obtained when the second game is returned to the first game. By starting the game, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned to the first game, and the motivation to play the game can be maintained.

Further, the above-mentioned "certain effect regarding the end of the first advantageous gaming state" may mean "a certain effect regarding the end of the advantageous state".

Further, the winning combination internal lottery process (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result by performing the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-5”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139) and the control means (for example, a control means for shifting to either a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In the game table, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52 and the like, etc. , Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the advantageous state. A specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0). It is a condition that is satisfied (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the above-mentioned combination is a special game (for example, FIG. 6A) or FIG. 43 (for example) when a prize is won. The special gaming state shown in a) is included, and the advantageous game state can be shifted to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 or the like) in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to execute a certain effect related to the end of the gaming state (for example, the end effect fn1 shown in FIG. 83), and the execution of the end effect can be started by shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. When a game is played in the advantageous state in which the special combination is internally won, the effect of the certain effect is achieved without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so that execution can be started. Note that FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-5 of the present application.

According to the game table according to the invention 1-5 of the present application, even if the advantageous state ends without aligning the symbols related to the special role, the player feels as if he / she has shifted to a certain advantageous game state. It is possible to reduce feelings of disappointment and impatience. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

The game console according to the present invention 1-5 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means determines the difference number of sheets, which is the difference between the game medium introduced by the player and the game medium acquired by the player. It is a means capable of displaying the difference number display to be shown, and when the difference number is less than 0, the difference number display is configured to display 0, and in the advantageous state, the above-mentioned or Even in the certain effect that is executed without shifting to the advantageous gaming state, the difference number display may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by making it possible to emphasize the small number of acquired sheets, it is possible to give the player the impression of loss, so that the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games can be carefully selected. In addition, a player who is playing the game correctly has a relatively large number of acquired sheets, so that the superiority complex of such a player can be satisfied.

In addition, in the certain effect executed without shifting to the certain advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state, the notification regarding the special combination is not performed even in the state where the special combination is internally elected. It may be configured in.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to satisfy the superiority complex of advanced users.

Further, the above-mentioned "certain effect regarding the end of the advantageous gaming state" may mean "a certain effect regarding the end of the advantageous state".

Further, the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number can be executed, and the second number is described above. Is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the combination is a game medium. Including a re-gaming combination that can play a game regardless of input, in a certain control state, the winning of the re-gambling combination in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gambling combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be higher.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state and the special combination is internally won, the effect of the certain effect is performed without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. It may be configured to start execution.

Further, in the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-6”), the number of bets on the gaming medium is the first number. It is configured to be able to execute one game (for example, a three-card betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number. The number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the number is spread over a plurality of games. It is configured so that a certain effect (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 84) can be executed, and the certain effect is an effect including the effect of a plurality of scenes, and is one of the effects of the plurality of scenes. The production of the scene is the production of the first scene (for example, the first scene shown in FIG. 84), and the production of one of the plurality of scenes is the production of the second scene (for example, FIG. It is the production of the second scene shown in 84), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the first game is described in the first game. The execution of the effect of the second scene is configured to be startable, and when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the second game is started. It is a game table characterized in that the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the above. Note that FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-6 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-6 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

The game console according to the invention 1-6 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, in the first game. It may be configured so that the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player who has returned from the second game to the first game by seeing the correct flow of production.

In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. It may be configured so that the execution of the effect of the scene is not started and the execution of another effect can be started.

With such a configuration, a certain effect is suddenly executed, which strongly impresses the player with the effect, and the player who has returned to the first game is given the first game again. You can reconfirm what you were doing.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game. In addition, at least a part of the effects of the first scene may be configured to be startable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, by repeatedly performing the production, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make the player aware that the second game is being performed. In addition, by attracting the player's attention as if it were a rare production in which the same production is repeated, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the number of bets on the game medium.

Further, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) It is configured to be able to notify the stop position and stop order (information that can identify the stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (information relating to the advantageous state). For example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain end condition is satisfied. When it is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain termination condition is when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, 0). , When the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the above-mentioned "execution of the first game after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed" Is configured to be able to start the execution of the effect of the second scene in the first game, "means" the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. When the execution of the first game is started later, the count value is updated so that the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game. " That is, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the production of the second scene is performed in the second game. "It is configured so that the execution is not started," means "when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the first count value is calculated." It may be updated so that the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game. "

With such a configuration, the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, so that the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game can be ensured. It will be possible.

Further, the winning combination internal lottery process (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result by performing the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The second number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more playable than the second game. It is a game that is advantageous to the player, and is configured to be able to execute a certain effect (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 63 or the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64 (D)) over a plurality of games. The production includes the production of a plurality of scenes, and the production of one of the productions of the plurality of scenes includes the first scene (for example, the “enemy attack” scene shown in FIG. 63, and the production. This is the production of the “enemy attack” scene shown in FIG. 64 (D), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the first game is performed. When the production of the first scene is continuously executable in one game and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed. May be a game table characterized in that the production of the first scene is not continuously executed in the second game.

According to such a game table, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the first game is performed. It may be configured so that the execution of the production of one scene can be started.

In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the first game is performed. The execution of the effect of one scene may not be started, and the execution of another effect may be started.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game. In addition, at least a part of the effects of the first scene may be configured to be startable.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-7”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a first game (for example, a three-card betting game), which is a game table including a main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3 and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and a game medium. A second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets is the second number is playable, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the operation information of the operating means (for example, the payout number indicator 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45). Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as the operation navigation using the above, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.), and the advantageous state is described above. Is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and includes a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and the game is played in the advantageous state. Is configured to be able to update the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter, referred to as “specific count value”) each time the operation is performed, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned normal state is changed from the advantageous state. It is configured to shift to a state, and the certain end condition is that when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state is the upper limit number of times). (When the game is reached), and a certain counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the ceiling counter shown in FIGS. 85, 19, 68, etc.) is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, The count value of the certain counter (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain count value”) can be updated, and when the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0), the player When the first game is performed in the advantageous state, which is configured to shift to the specific advantageous state (for example, the specific advantageous state shown in FIG. 85 or the AT1 state shown in FIG. 68). The count value of both the specific count value and the certain count value is updated in It is configured to be possible, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, only the specific count value among the specific count value and the certain count value is configured to be updatable. It is a game table characterized by being. Note that FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-7 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-7 of the present application, the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, so that the fairness of the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game is fair. Can be secured. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

The game console according to the invention 1-7 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the process may shift to the specific advantageous state in the advantageous state. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to sustain the player's willingness to play by making it possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned from the second game to the first game.

Further, when the number of games of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds a certain number of times, even if the first game is performed in the advantageous state, there is no possibility of shifting to the specific advantageous state. It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, a player who has made a mistake in counting the number of games is allowed to play the second game, while a player who maliciously played the second game (for example, searching for a strategy). By not giving benefits to players who play irregular games such as, etc., preferential treatment is given to the player who is playing the first game correctly, and the player who is playing the second game is corrected. Can be expected.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured so as to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state is a certain advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, and the specific advantageous state. May be a state relating to the transition to the first advantageous gaming state.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information. It is an advantageous gaming state, and when the specific count value becomes a third value (for example, 20), it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the specific value and the said The third value is another value, and even when the number of games of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds the certain number of times, the first game is performed in the advantageous state. In some cases, it may be configured so that the second advantageous gaming state may be entered before the advantageous state ends.

With such a configuration, it is possible to sustain the player's willingness to play by making it possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned from the second game to the first game.

Further, the winning combination internal lottery process (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result by performing the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-8”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a gaming table including a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). Operation information (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc., stop position and stop order of each reel, etc. The advantageous state is configured to be able to notify the information that can identify the above, and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for example, FIG. The high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 52 and the like) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, It is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain termination condition is such that when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, after shifting to the advantageous state). The first game (for example, a three-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and the number of bets on the game medium are the conditions that are satisfied (when the number of games in the game reaches the upper limit). The second number, which is a second game (for example, a two-card betting game), is configured to be playable, and the second number is different from the first number and is in the advantageous state. The first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states. The advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 86 and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like). The advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 86 and the judge state shown in FIG. 6 and the like). The first advantageous gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state is described. After the gaming state ends, it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state. Display (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, the first display d1) shown in FIG. 86, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, “second display””. For example, in the second display d2) shown in FIG. 86, the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a specific display different from any of the first display and the second display. (Hereinafter referred to as “third display”. For example, the third display d1 shown in FIG. 86), and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed. , When the count value is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed. Is configured so that the count value is updated so that the third display can be displayed in the game.

It is a game table characterized by that. Note that FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-8 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-8 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. Since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

The game console according to the invention 1-8 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the second display may be a display relating to the start of the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

Further, the second display is a display composed of displays of a plurality of scenes, and the display of one scene among the displays of the plurality of scenes is a display of the first scene, and the display of the plurality of scenes. The display of one of the scenes is a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene is a display in which the display is started by an operation related to the progress of the game. The display of the second scene may be a display in which the display is started by another operation related to the progress of the game, which is performed following the certain operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

Further, a lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the display of the second scene is the first. The display mode may change in relation to the lottery result in the game in which the display of the second display is started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

Further, the winning combination internal lottery process (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for determining the lottery result by performing the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-9”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). 139), a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10), and a normal state (for example, FIG. 6B). The control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to one of the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. A game console provided with a privilege giving means (for example, an AT number addition lottery for AT2 state processing A shown in FIG. 23) capable of giving a privilege related to the advantageous state in an advantageous state, and a certain counter (for example, FIG. The ceiling counter shown in 87, 19, 68, etc.) is provided, and the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter referred to as “a certain count value”) can be updated every time the game is played. , The advantageous gaming state is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, the BB state shown in FIG. 43B or the AT1 state), and the right to shift to the certain advantageous gaming state (for example, After the BB internal winning or the right to shift to the AT1 state is acquired, the winning notification (for example, the bonus confirmation notification bk1 shown in FIG. 87, the bonus confirmation shown in FIGS. 68, 70, etc.) suggesting the acquisition of the right is acquired. The execution of the display (display of the image including the characters "bonus confirmed!") Is configured to start, and the right to shift to the certain advantageous gaming state includes the first symbol (for example, the figure). The right related to 4 (a) and the Seven 1 symbol shown in FIG. 87 (hereinafter referred to as “first right”; for example, the pseudo bonus 1 shown in FIG. 87) and the second symbol (for example, FIG. 4 (a)). ) And the right related to the Seven 2 symbol shown in FIG. 87 (hereinafter referred to as "second right". For example, the pseudo bonus 2 shown in FIG. 87) is included, and the second right is more than the first right. Is a more advantageous right for the player, and in the state where the first right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started, the first result is obtained as a result of the internal winning. The internal winning is configured so that the execution of the first notification can be started when the determination is made, and in the state where the execution of the winning notification is started and the second right is acquired. The execution of the second notification can be started when the second result is determined as a result of In the first result, the first symbol is displayed when the operating means is operated according to the content of the first notification (for example, the effective line shown in FIGS. 87 and 4 (b)). The result (or displayed on a winning line other than the valid line), and the second result is that the second symbol is displayed when the operating means is operated according to the content of the second notification. (For example, it is displayed on the valid line (or the winning line other than the valid line) shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 4B), and the winning notification is after the execution of the winning notification is started. When the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0) in a certain state from the state in which the first right is acquired to the transition to the certain advantageous gaming state, the first It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so as to change from the state in which the right of the above is acquired to the state in which the second right is acquired. Note that FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-9 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-9 of the present application, even if the game from the determination of the privilege grant to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

The game console according to the present invention 1-9 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the state in which the first right is acquired changes to the state in which the second right is acquired, the first notification may not be executed.

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The second number is different from the first number and is more playable than the second game in the advantageous state (or / and the normal state). The first game is more advantageous to the player, and the first game is performed after the execution of the winning notification is started and the first right is acquired. In that case, the second game is played in a state where the certain count value is updatable and the first right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started. If so, it may be configured so that the certain count value is not updated.

With such a configuration, the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, so that the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game can be ensured. It will be possible. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player when the game is played correctly in the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will correct the game method. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) It is configured to be able to notify the stop position and the stop order (information that can identify the stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (information relating to the advantageous state). For example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter referred to as “specific count value”) is updated every time the game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to be possible, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and in the certain end condition, the specific count value is a specific value. It is a condition that is satisfied when (for example, 0) is satisfied (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the certain counter is different from the specific counter. It is a certain counter regarding the advantageous state, and the certain count value is a value that can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state, and when the first game is played in the advantageous state. Is configured so that both the specific count value and the count value of the certain count value can be updated, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the specific count value is specified. Of the count value and the certain count value, only the specific count value may be configured to be updatable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player when the game is played correctly in the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will correct the game method. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the combination includes a re-game combination capable of playing a game without inputting a game medium, and in a certain control state, the combination is higher than the winning probability of the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability of the re-game combination in the second game may be higher than the winning probability.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the specific count value can be updated and the winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than the normal state.

[Embodiment 2]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first embodiment will be described. In principle, FIGS. 88 to 96 are used only for the description of the second embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the second embodiment is described in FIGS. 88 to 96. The code shown in 96 has priority.

<AT2 state processing A>
First, the AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing A according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the AT2 state processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 23.

In the AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S1451 to S1453 are added to the AT2 state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 23. Specifically, in step S1451, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1452, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1453. In step S1452, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), the AT number addition lottery 1 is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the “LMT standby flag off”, and then the process proceeds to step S1402. On the other hand, in step S1453, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), the AT number addition lottery 2 is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the “LMT standby flag on”, and then the process proceeds to step S1402.

As described above, in this example, the number of AT added games in the AT2 state is different depending on the state of the LMT standby flag. Specifically, when the LMT standby flag is off, the number of AT-added games is selected in the range of 0G to 100G according to the winning combination, but when the LMT standby flag is on, the internal winning is won. Select the number of AT-added games in the range of 0G to 10G according to the combination. That is, in the AT2 state, when the LMT standby flag is on (when shifting from the AT2 state to the LMT state), the AT is more than when the LMT standby flag is off (when the AT2 state does not shift to the LMT state). It is configured to reduce the number of additional games.

<Judge state processing B>
Next, the judge state processing B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89A. FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the flow of the judge state processing B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the judge state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 31.

In the judge state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2251 to S2253 are added to the judge state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 31. Specifically, in step S2251, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied, and if it is not satisfied (when correction is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S2203 and if it is satisfied (correction is performed). If necessary), the process proceeds to step S2252.

Here, in step S2251, the determination as to whether or not the correction condition is satisfied (correction condition determination) is performed in the following procedure. In the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202, any one of the AT2 initial number specified in the AT2 initial number lottery table shown in FIG. 89B is selected. Subsequently, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the determination is acquired, and the AT2 selected by the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202 from the value X of the high navigation state counter. The initial number of times (Y) is subtracted. Then, when the value after subtraction (XY) is equal to or less than the first determination value (100 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

Further, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the difference number (A) at the time of the determination is acquired, and the difference number (A) corresponds to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202. The expected number of sheets (B) to be used is subtracted. Then, even when the value after subtraction (AB) is equal to or less than the second determination value (1500 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

In step 2252, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2253, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2204. Here, the AT correction value in step S2252 is calculated by adding a certain value (20 in this example) to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202. Therefore, for example, when the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of determining the correction condition is 100 and the AT2 initial number of times (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number of times lottery is 30, the correction condition is satisfied. , In step S2252, 50 (= AT2 initial number of times (Y) 30 + 20 selected in the AT2 initial number of times lottery) is set as the AT2 correction value.

In the judge state processing B according to the second embodiment, the lottery value (number of pullback G) is set in the effect state counter in the pullback state in step S2206, but as shown in FIG. 89C, the lottery value (pullback G) is set. The degree of expectation for pullback is higher when the lottery value (number of pullback G) is 1G than when the number) is 2 to 9G.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, the AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the AT2 state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 32.

In the AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2351 to S2353 are added to the AT2 state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 32. Specifically, in step S2351, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2352. In step S2352, the LMT initial value + 1 is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2353, the LMT state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step 2306.

As described above, in this example, in the judge state (judgment state process B shown in FIG. 89), when the AT2 state is set to the effect state and the LMT standby flag is set to ON, the AT2 state is started. It is configured to shift to the LMT state.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). FIG. 91A is a flowchart showing the flow of the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the pullback state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33.

In the pull-back state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2451 to S2453 are added to the pull-back state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 33. Specifically, in step S2451, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied, and if it is not satisfied (when correction is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S2403 and if it is satisfied (correction is performed). If necessary), the process proceeds to step S2452. The correction condition determination (determination of whether or not the correction condition is satisfied) executed in step S2451 is the same as step S2251 of the judge state process B described with reference to FIG. 89 (a). Is omitted.

In step 2452, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2453, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2404.

FIG. 91 (b) is a diagram showing a transition example of the AT state in the high navigation state. FIGS. 91 (b) and 91 (1) show a typical transition example of the AT state, which is an example of transition in the order of AT1 state (20G) → AT2 state (30G to 100G).

On the other hand, FIGS. 91 (b) and 91 (2) show another transition example of the AT state, which is the AT1 state (20G) → the judge state → the AT2 state (30G to 100G) → the pullback state → the AT2 state (10G). This is an example of migrating in order. In this example, the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT1 state. The number of games in the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

Further, FIGS. 91 (b) and 91 (3) show another transition example of the AT state, in which the AT1 state (20G) → the judge state → the AT2 state (30G to 100G) → the pullback state → the AT3 state (10G). This is an example of migrating in order. In this example, the AT state shifted from the pullback state is an AT3 state different from the AT1 state and the AT2 state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT1 state. The number of games in the AT3 state shifted from the pullback state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

<Specific examples of various effects, various displays, etc.>
Next, specific examples of various effects, various displays, and the like executed by the slot machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96. 92 to 96 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pullback state → Low navigation state>
FIG. 92A is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state after shifting to the AT2 state → the judge state → the pullback state in the high navigation state.

The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2. In this game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 2, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. ..

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1. In this game R327, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as the game R328, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

The following game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as in the games R328 to R327, the display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (book). In the example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (for example). The display including the image showing the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9. In this game R325, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state from the AT2 state. Since the state has been changed, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter) is concerned. The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 10G") is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R325 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the judge state. Therefore, since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") is being executed.

The game R315 to game R314 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315 to 314, and the number of remaining games in the pullback state after shifting from the judge state is 1 to 0. In the games R315 to R314, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the judge state. Since the state has shifted to the pullback state, the normal screen (pullback) corresponding to the pullback state is displayed. Further, after the end of the game R314, the pull-back state of the high navigation state ends, the normal state of the low navigation state is entered, and the normal screen corresponding to the normal state of the low navigation state is used by using the effect image display device 157. (Normal) is displayed.

The display mode of the normal screen (normal) may be at least partially the same as the display mode of the normal screen (pull back), or may be completely different from the display mode of the normal screen (pull back). Further, when displaying a screen having the same display mode, it is preferable that the probability that the screen is displayed in the pulled-back state is higher than the probability that the screen is displayed in the low navigation state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state>
FIG. 92B is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the effect state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state after shifting to the AT2 state → LMT state in the high navigation state.

The game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 69 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R69, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as in the immediately preceding games R71 to R70, while the display including an image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is included. (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R69, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (for example). The display including the image showing the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

The game R68 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 68, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19. In this game R68, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has occurred, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation is executed, and the LMT is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed. The fill in the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not yet been performed at the same timing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R68 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the above and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20") is executed. There is. Since the flow of production of games R67 to R50 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R49 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 49 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0. In this game R49, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") is executed. ing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R49 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, after the end of the game R49, the LMT state in the high navigation state ends, the normal state shifts to the low navigation state, and the normal screen corresponding to the normal state in the low navigation state is used by using the effect image display device 157. (Normal) is displayed.

In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is possible to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (judgment state or pullback state in this example). After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to the normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (this example). Then, the aspect of the AT2 effect) is different from the aspect of the effect (ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous gaming state.

According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pullback state → AT2 state>
FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the effect state shifts in the order of AT2 state → judge state → pullback state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, and FIG. 92 (a) is used. It shows the continuation of the explanation.

The game R315 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315 and the number of remaining games in the pullback state after shifting from the judge state is 1, and a specific rare role (in this example, a small role 2 or a small role). Since the game was internally won in 3), it is a game that shifts to the AT2 state from the next game. In this game R315, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the judge state to the pullback state. Since the transition has occurred, the normal screen (pull back) corresponding to the pullback state is displayed.

The following game R314 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 314 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is 9. In this game R314, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the judge state to AT2. Since the state has been changed, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the number of games remaining in the AT2 state before the update (count value of the effect state counter) is 50. A display including an image (in this example, an image including the characters "50G") indicating the effect state counter count value) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R314 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed and the number of games remaining in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 49, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 49G") is being executed.

In this example, when shifting from the pullback state to the AT state, it is configured to shift to the AT2 state, which is more advantageous to the player than the AT1 state. Although not shown, when a 3-card bet game is played after a 2-card bet game is played in the pullback state, the game shifts to another high navigation state (for example, LMT state) without shifting to the AT2 state. May be done. Further, although not shown, if the two-card betting game is continued in the pull-back state, the high navigation state may end and the low navigation state may be shifted without shifting to the AT2 state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state → normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state>
In FIG. 93 (b), the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the LMT state in the high navigation state, then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, shifts to the high navigation state again, and the effect state shifts to the normal state → It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of transitioning in the order of a final announcement state → AT1 state, and shows the continuation of the effect explained using FIG. 92 (b).

In this example, after shifting to the normal state of the low navigation state, the state shifts to the high navigation state again, and the effect state shifts in the order of the normal state → the finalized notification state → the AT1 state.

The game R658 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 658, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalized notification state is 19. In this game R658, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the finalized notification state. Since the transition to the AT1 state has started, the AT1 effect corresponding to the start of the AT1 state is started, and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT1 state before the update is 20, so that the number of games is concerned. A display including an image showing (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the characters "20G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R658 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT1 state by using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, since the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed and the number of games remaining in the AT1 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 19G") is being executed.

In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is possible to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (judgment state or pullback state in this example). After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to the normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (this example). Then, the aspect of the AT2 effect) is different from the aspect of the effect (ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous game state, and the operation information is started from the fourth advantageous game state (judgment state or pullback state). Is configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) when shifting to the game state in which the game can be notified, and from the state after the third advantageous gaming state (LMT state) is completed. When shifting to a gaming state in which operation information can be notified, the game is configured to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (AT1 state in this example).

According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to have expectations even after the end of the advantageous gaming state that can be expected.

Further, in this example, when the LMT state is changed to the low navigation state, the high navigation state is changed again, and the AT state is changed to the high navigation state, the AT1 state is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT2 state. It is configured to migrate.

<Notification when a combination is established in the AT2 state>
FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a combination is established in the AT2 state.

The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2. In this game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation of the push order combination is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is executed. Since (count value of the effect state counter) is 2, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 2G") is displayed. Running.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is increased from 1 to 51. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the internally won combination (for example, the watermelon of the small combination 3) cannot be specified. The non-specific display g2 (in this example, "!-!-!" Is displayed. ) Is executed, and since the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state before the addition is 1, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is included (this example). , Displaying an image including the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image is overlapped and displayed in the non-specified display, and then the number of games added to the AT is added. (In this example, the character "+ 50G" is displayed), and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) has increased from 1 to 51 due to the addition of AT. A display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "LAST 51G") is executed.

The display mode of the non-specified display is not limited to this example, and for example, the internal winning of the first or second role of the same type is displayed as the first non-specified display (for example, "!-!-!"". (Indication of), and the internal winning of the second or third role of the same type is performed in the second unspecified display (for example, "?-?-?" Display), so that the second role can be won. It may be configured so that the internal winning cannot be specified. In addition, the internal winning of a different type of first role or fourth role is performed with the first unspecified display (for example, "!-!-!" Display), and the second or third role of the same type is displayed. By performing the internal winning of the above in the second non-specified display (for example, the display of "?-?-?"), The internal winning of any combination may not be specified.

<Notification when a combination is established in the LMT state>
FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a combination is established in the LMT state.

The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1. In this game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation of the push order combination (in this example, "2-1-3" in the same display mode as the operation navigation in the AT2 state. The total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2. Therefore, the total number of games in the LMT state and the total number of games in the LMT state are displayed. A display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 more" is displayed) is being executed.

Further, in this game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a certain time has elapsed after receiving the pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used. While executing the identifiable display g1 (displaying the watermelon symbol in this example) capable of identifying the internally won combination (for example, the watermelon of the small combination 3), the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) Since the count value of (count value) is 1, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the characters “1/20”) is executed. ing.

Further, in this game R327, the identifiable display is erased when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). In this example, unlike the notification at the time of establishment of the winning combination in the AT2 state described with reference to FIG. 94A, it is shown that there is no AT addition (regulated).

In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is possible to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (judgment state or pullback state in this example). After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to the normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (this example). Then, the aspect of the AT2 effect) is different from the aspect of the effect (ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous game state, and the lottery result is the first in the third advantageous game state (LMT state). In the case of the combination of (in this example, the small combination 2 (watermelon 1)), the first notification (in this example, the display of the watermelon pattern) that can identify the first combination can be notified. If the lottery result is the first winning combination in the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), a second notification indicating that it is a chance (in this example, "!-!-!" Is displayed. ) Can be notified.

According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, in the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, the player is made to play the game with a sense of expectation, and in the advantageous gaming state in the regulated state, the player is prevented from being missed and the advantageous state is comfortably ended without inciting the player. Can be made to.

The display mode of the identifiable display is not limited to this example, and for example, a character suggesting the name of the combination (for example, the character "Rep" suggesting replay and the character "watermelon" suggesting the small combination 3). ) May be displayed, or some or all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination may be displayed. Further, the display area, display position, display size, display timing, display mode after display, etc. of each display may be different between the non-specified display and the identifiable display.

In addition, the display indicating the possibility of giving a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, the identifiable display g1 shown in FIG. 94 (b)) is not performed in the AT state before the start of the ED effect or during the execution of the ED effect. It may be configured.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of times>
Next, a specific example of the correction of the AT2 initial number of times described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 will be described.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of times / When performing correction>
FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the AT2 initial number of times is corrected.
The game R120 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 120 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 0. In this game R120, in the judge state process B described with reference to FIG. 89A, after the AT2 initial number of times lottery is performed, it is determined by the correction condition determination that the correction condition is satisfied, and the AT2 initial number of times is corrected. ing. Specifically, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of determining the correction condition is 120, the AT2 initial number of times (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number of times lottery is 30, and "X (= 120) -Y". Since the correction condition of (= 30) <= 100 "is satisfied, Y (= 30) +20 = 50 is set as the AT2 correction value, and the LMT standby flag is set to on.

The game R119 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 119 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the judge state is 50. In this game R119, in the AT2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), since the LMT standby flag is on, the AT number addition lottery 2 is performed, but in this example, the small winning combination 2 ( The watermelon 1) was internally elected, and 0G was selected as the number of AT additional games.

Further, in this game R119, the effect state is in the judge state by using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the start lever 135 is pressed (immediately after BET, etc.)). Since the transition from the to AT2 state to the AT2 state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state before the update is 50. A display including an image indicating a number (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the character "50G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R119 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed and the number of games remaining in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 49, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 49G") is being executed.

The game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 69 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R69, in the AT2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 90, since the AT2 state is finished and the LMT standby flag is on, preparations are made to shift the effect state from the AT2 state to the LMT state. ing. Further, in this game R69, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as in the games R119 to R70, a display including an image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is included. (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R69, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (for example). The display including the image showing the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In this example, the result display 1 may be configured not to be displayed, or the result display 1 may be configured to be performed only when the AT2 initial number of times is not corrected.

In this example, since the AT2 initial number of times is corrected, the AT2 state and the LMT state can be seamlessly shifted (without going through other effect states).

<Specific example of correction of the initial number of AT2 / When displaying the number of remaining games in the AT2 state>
FIG. 95 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the number of remaining games is displayed in the AT2 state.
The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 52. In this game R328, in the AT2 state processing A described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), since the LMT standby flag is off, the AT number addition lottery 1 is performed, but in this example, the small winning combination 2 ( The watermelon 1) was internally elected, and 50G was selected as the number of AT additional games.

Further, in this game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to execute and operate the AT2 effect. While executing the navigation, without displaying the image including the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, the image including the characters "LAST 52G") is not displayed. As a false display (gase display), a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (2 in this example) before adding the number of AT added games (50 in this example) (in this example, "LAST 2G"). Display of images containing the characters "") is being executed.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 51. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect in the same manner as in the game R328. While executing the operation navigation, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 51G") is performed. Instead, as a fake display (gase display), a display including an image showing the remaining number of games (1 in this example) before adding the number of AT-added games (50 in this example) (in this example, 50). Displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a certain time has passed from the pressing operation of the start lever 135), a display suggesting AT addition (in this example, " After performing the display of the characters "I'm still going on"), when another certain condition is met (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the number of AT-added games is displayed (display). In this example, the character "+ 50G" is displayed), and a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the production state counter) in the true (true) AT2 state (in this example, "LAST 51G") is displayed. Display of images containing the characters "") is being executed.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number / When displaying the result for transition of AT2 state>
FIG. 96A is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the result is displayed after the transition to the AT2 state.
The game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to use AT2 as in games R328 to R327. While executing the production and the operation navigation, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the production status counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G"). ) Is being executed.

Further, in this game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , While displaying the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, the result display 1 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is not executed.

The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9. In this game R325, the result display 1 in the AT2 state is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). For example, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted) by executing (displaying the number of acquired game media), the effect image display device 157 is used. An image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) because the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9 while starting the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state. (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") is being executed.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number / When the result is not displayed after the end of AT2 state>
FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of an effect when the result is not displayed after the end of the AT2 state, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 95 (a).
In the effect described with reference to FIG. 95 (a), in the game R69, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state because it is the final game in the AT2 state. An example of executing the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media) is shown, but in this example, in the same game R69, the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is shown. Is executed, but the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) is not executed.

According to this example, it is possible to seamlessly shift from the AT2 state to the LMT state (without going through other production states), and since the result is not displayed in the AT2 state at the time of the transition, the AT2 state is changed to the LMT state. It is possible to give a unified impression about the production in the high navigation state without making the player more aware of the transition of.

As described above, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 2-1”) is shown in the operating means (for example, FIG. 1). Stop button 137 to 139), and shift to either a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). It is a game table provided with a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3), and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45) is used. Information capable of identifying the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) can be notified, and the advantageous state is described in the above-mentioned advantageous state. It is in a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of operation information, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and a game is played in the advantageous state. Each time, the count value of the specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end is performed. The condition is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times). In the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states can notify the operation information. A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "second advantageous gaming state"; for example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6B and the like). One of the advantageous gaming states is referred to as a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, "third advantageous gaming state") different from the second advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified. For example, the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 and the LMT state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the second advantageous gaming state. A certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the state and the third advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth advantageous gaming state". For example, the fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 6B). The fourth advantageous gaming state is the second advantageous gaming state and the fourth advantageous gaming state. It is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous in terms of notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming states of the three advantageous gaming states, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the count value is a second specific value (for example, 19). ), Which is a gaming state in which the player can shift from the second advantageous gaming state and can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value. The specific value and the second specific value are different values, and are configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state after the second advantageous gaming state is completed, and the third advantageous gaming state is possible. After the advantageous gaming state is completed, it is configured to shift to the normal state, and the effect in the second advantageous game state (for example, AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 97, AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.). The aspect of the game table is different from the aspect of the effect in the third advantageous gaming state (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 97 and the ED effect shown in FIG. 92 and the like). is there. Note that FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 2-1 of the present application.

According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application, since it is easy to understand the expected advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

The advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified. (Hereinafter, referred to as "first advantageous gaming state"), and the first advantageous gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second advantageous gaming state in terms of notification of the operation information. Good.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 2-2”) is operated by the operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). 139) and the control means (for example, a control means for shifting to either a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, an operation navigation system using the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and operation information of the operating means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45). Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 or the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said It is configured so that the count value of a specific counter can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. It is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state. , It is configured to be able to shift to any advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantage capable of notifying the operation information. It is a gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “first advantageous gaming state”; for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 and the AT1 state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and the plurality of advantageous gaming states. One of the advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "second advantageous gaming state") capable of notifying the operation information (for example, FIG. 98. The second advantageous gaming state shown in the above and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states can notify the operation information. A certain advantageous gaming state different from both one advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "third advantageous gaming state"; the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 and FIG. 6 ( b) and the like (LMT state), and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the said first. A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth advantageous gaming state") that is different from any of the one advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state. The fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 and the pullback state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and the fourth advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. And the advantageous gaming state which is more disadvantageous in terms of notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming states of the third advantageous gaming state, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the count value is the second specific value ( For example, in the case of 19), it is a gaming state in which the transition from the second advantageous gaming state can be made, and the gaming state in which the count value can stay until the first specific value is reached. One specific value and the second specific value are different values, and after the second advantageous gaming state is completed, the fourth advantageous gaming state can be shifted to, and the first advantageous gaming state is configured. After the three advantageous gaming states are completed, the normal state is configured to shift to the normal state, and the effects in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 98 and the AT2 shown in FIG. 92 and the like). The aspect of the effect) is different from the aspect of the effect in the third advantageous gaming state (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 98, the ED effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.), and the first advantageous game When the second advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the state and the transition from the fourth advantageous gaming state to a gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, the second advantageous gaming state is performed. It is configured to shift to the state, and when shifting from the state after the third advantageous gaming state ends to the gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, the transition to the first advantageous gaming state is performed. It is a game table characterized by being configured to do so. Note that FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 2-2 of the present application.

According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-2 of the present application, since it is easy to understand the expected advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to have expectations even after the end of the advantageous gaming state that can be expected.

Further, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 2-3”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to either a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, in a game table provided with a main control unit 300 (shown in FIG. 3), an operation navigation using the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45), FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 and the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of a specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. It is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state. , It is configured to be able to shift to any advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantage capable of notifying the operation information. It is a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "second advantageous gaming state"; for example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99 and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and the plurality of advantageous gaming states. One of the advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state different from the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a "third advantageous gaming state", in which the operation information can be notified, for example, FIG. 99. The third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 6 and the LMT state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the second advantageous gaming state and the first advantageous gaming state. A certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the three advantageous gaming states (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth advantageous gaming state". For example, the fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99, the pullback shown in FIG. 6B, etc. State), and the fourth advantageous gaming state is the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state. It is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous with respect to the notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming states of the state, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the count value becomes a second specific value (for example, 19). In this case, it is a gaming state that can be transferred from the second advantageous gaming state, and is an advantageous gaming state that can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value, and is the same as the first specific value. The second specific value is another value, and is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state after the second advantageous gaming state is completed, and the third advantageous gaming state is After the end, the mode is configured to shift to the normal state, and the mode of the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 99, AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.) The mode is different from the mode of the effect in the third advantageous game state (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 99, the ED effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.), and the lottery result is obtained in the third advantageous game state. In the case of the first combination (for example, the small combination 2 (watermelon 1) shown in FIG. 5), the first notification that can identify the first combination (for example, the second image g1 shown in FIG. 99) or , The identifiable display g1 (display of the watermelon symbol) shown in FIG. 94 (b)) can be notified, and when the lottery result is the first combination in the second advantageous gaming state. , A second notification indicating that it is a chance (for example, a second image g2 shown in FIG. 99 and an unspecified display g2 shown in FIG. 94 (a) (“! -! -! It is a game table characterized in that it is configured to be able to notify (display))). Note that FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 2-3.

According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application, since it is easy to understand the expected advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, in the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, the player is made to play the game with a sense of expectation, and in the advantageous gaming state in the regulated state, the player is prevented from being missed and the advantageous state is comfortably ended without inciting the player. Can be made to.

The game console according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-3 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is performed and the lottery result is determined (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10) is provided and the lottery result is the first winning combination, or The notification is configured to be noticeable, and the certain notification mode in the third advantageous gaming state may be different from the certain notification mode in the second advantageous gaming state. ..

Further, when the lottery result is the second combination (for example, the small combination 4 (bell) shown in FIG. 5A or FIG. 7), the operation information can be notified, and the third combination can be notified. The mode of notifying the operation information of the second combination in the advantageous gaming state may be the same as the mode of notifying the operation information of the second combination in the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, since the operation navigation mode does not change depending on the type of advantageous gaming state, it is possible to prevent the push order combination from being missed and to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

The operation information may be information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel that can display the combination of symbols related to the second combination.

Further, in the second advantageous gaming state, the number of remaining games in the second advantageous gaming state can be increased, and in the third advantageous gaming state, in the third advantageous gaming state. It may be configured so that the number of remaining games is not increased.

With such a configuration, in the advantageous gaming state of the regulated state, the advantageous state can be comfortably ended without inciting the player more than necessary. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

In addition, it is configured so that a display indicating that the number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state increases may be displayed, and the number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state increases. It may be configured so that the display indicating is not performed.

Further, when the second advantageous gaming state ends, a certain end display (for example, the AT end screen suggesting the end of the AT2 state shown in FIG. 92 or the like) can be displayed. A process for restricting the transition to the third advantageous gaming state after the transition to the second advantageous gaming state and before the certain end display related to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed. (For example, the process using the LMT standby flag described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91) may be configured to be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the profit in the expected advantageous gaming state cannot be taken out, satisfy the player's satisfaction, and as a result, give the player a sense of expectation. It becomes possible. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

Further, when shifting to the third advantageous gaming state, a certain freeze effect may be enabled to be executed.

With such a configuration, it is easy to understand an advantageous gaming state that should not be expected, so that it is possible to give an opportunity for the player to switch feelings. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

Further, the initial remaining number of games in the second advantageous game state is variable (for example, a game corrected by the number of games determined by the AT2 initial number lottery in FIG. 89 (a) and the number of games shown in FIG. 89 (b). The number of times), and the initial number of remaining games in the third advantageous gaming state may be fixed (for example, 20G).

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the advantageous state without being agitated in the advantageous gaming state of the regulated state. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

Further, in the second advantageous game state, a display showing the number of times less than the actual number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state (for example, a display showing the number of remaining games as shown in FIG. 95 (b) and the like). (False display)) is configured to be displayed, and in the third advantageous game state, a display indicating the number of times less than the actual number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state. May be configured so that is not displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the advantageous state without being agitated in the advantageous gaming state of the regulated state. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

Further, in one of the advantageous states, after the third advantageous gaming state is completed, the fourth advantageous gaming state (for example, the pullback state) may not be changed.

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The second number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. It is a game, and may be configured so that when the second game is played, the transition to the second advantageous game state is not started.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is played in the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the game shifts to the second advantageous game state. It is possible, and it may be possible to notice that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

Further, when the fourth advantageous gaming state does not shift to the advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, the normal state may be configured to be able to shift.

Further, the above-mentioned "the second advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the first advantageous gaming state" means "acquisition of the gaming medium in the first advantageous gaming state." The expected value of acquisition of the game medium in the second advantageous gaming state is higher than the expected value. "

Further, the above-mentioned "the fourth advantageous gaming state is a notification of the operation information rather than any of the advantageous gaming states of the first advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state." "The fourth advantageous gaming state is an advantage of any of the first advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state." The frequency of notification of the operation information is lower than that of the game state, or the operation information is not notified in an advantageous gaming state. "

[Embodiment 3]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first and second embodiments will be described. In principle, FIGS. 100 to 107 are used only for the description of the third embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 100 to 107 are shown in the description of the third embodiment. The code shown in 107 has priority.

<Various operations>
First, various operations possible in the slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described.
The slot machine according to the third embodiment includes a start lever 135, a stop button 137 to 139, a bet button 130 to 132, a medal return button 133, a settlement button 134, and a cross key 192 shown in FIG. 101, which are described with reference to FIG. It also has operating means such as the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 102, and various operations can be performed by these operating means. Further, in addition to various operations by these operation means, a medal insertion operation or the like by inserting a medal from the medal insertion port 141 is also possible.

In the following, the operation by the start lever 135 may be referred to as "lever operation", the operation by the PUSH button 194 may be referred to as "PUSH button operation", and the operation by the cross key 192 may be referred to as "cross key operation".

<State transition of various operations>
Next, an example of the state transition of various operations will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing state transitions of PUSH button operation, cross key operation, closing operation, and lever operation.

The state indicated by "◯" in FIG. 100 is a state in which acceptance of various operations is valid, and the state indicated by "x" in FIG. 100 is a state in which acceptance of various operations is invalid. The slot machine according to the third embodiment is configured to determine whether various operations are valid or invalid according to the state transitions shown in the figure, and when the operations are valid, perform the corresponding display.

For example, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is displayed (or hidden), and the setting screen is hidden, the operation with the cross key 192 corresponding to the "call setting screen" is effective. , When the operation is accepted, the display of the setting screen is started (calling the setting screen), but since the PUSH button operation, the closing operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed. , The display of the setting screen does not start (the setting screen is not called).

In addition, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is hidden, the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" is effective, so when the operation is accepted. Determines the character of the AT2 effect (AT2 type determination), which will be described later. However, since the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed, the character of the AT2 effect is determined. No decision (AT2 type decision) is made.

On the other hand, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is hidden, the PUSH button operation is also effective in addition to the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination". Even when the button operation is accepted, the character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination).

In addition, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is displayed, all of the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, the input operation, and the lever operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" are performed. Since it is invalid, the character cannot be determined, but since it is valid except for the lever operation corresponding to the "AT2 type selection screen display", it is possible to select the character by an operation other than the lever operation.

In addition, when the previous game is replayed, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is hidden, the lever operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" is effective, so when the operation is accepted, , The character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination), but since the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, and the input operation are invalid, the character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2) even if the operation is performed. Type determination) is not performed.

On the other hand, when the previous game is replayed, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the PUSH button operation is effective in addition to the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination", so that the PUSU button is enabled. Even when the operation is accepted, the character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination). In these cases, the input operation is invalid, but the input operation may be enabled, and when the operation is accepted, the character of the AT2 effect may be determined (AT2 type determination).

<Specific examples of various operations>
Next, specific examples of various operations including PUSH button operation, cross key operation, closing operation, and lever operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 104.
FIG. 101 (A) is a diagram showing an example of various operations for switching the display between the normal screen and the demo screen in chronological order.
In this example, when the normal screen is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 and the operation of the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the setting screen is started. Here, the setting screen is a screen for making various settings related to the slot machine (for example, adjusting the volume, adjusting the amount of light, displaying model information, etc.).

The conditions for starting the display of the setting screen are not particularly limited, but in this example, the display of the setting screen is started and the game is in progress only when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted during the non-game. When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted, the display of the setting screen is not started.

When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the setting screen is being displayed, the display of the demo screen is started. Here, the demo screen is a screen mainly displayed during non-game, for example, a screen for introducing a new model or displaying an advertisement / advertisement of a game store. When the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted while the demo screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (the demo screen returns to the normal screen).

FIG. 101 (B) is a diagram showing an example of various operations in the case of performing volume adjustment using the setting screen in chronological order.
In this example, when the normal screen is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 and the operation of the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the setting screen is started. When the operation of the up button 192b (or down button 192c) of the cross key 192 is accepted while the setting screen is displayed, the cursor (arrow) displayed on the setting screen moves upward (or downward). In this example, since the operation of the upper button 192b is accepted on the setting screen, the cursor is moved upward to the volume adjustment position.

When you move the cursor to a certain menu, the submenu corresponding to the cursor starts to be displayed. In this example, since the cursor has been moved to the volume adjustment position, the display of the volume adjustment screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is started. When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. .. In this example, since the operation of the right button 192d is accepted once on the volume adjustment screen, the volume is raised by one step (in this example, the volume is raised from level 3 to level 4 in five levels of levels 1 to 5). ), And the adjusted volume (level 4) is displayed by the volume meter.

Further, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment is ended and the screen returns to the setting screen. In this example, since the operation of the enter button 192a is accepted after adjusting the volume, the volume adjustment is finished and the display of the volume adjustment screen is switched to the display of the setting screen. Further, since the operation of the lower button 192c on the setting screen is subsequently accepted, the cursor is moved downward to the "return" position. The subsequent operations and displays are the same as the examples described with reference to FIG. 101 (A).

FIG. 101 (C) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of various operations when adjusting the volume without displaying the setting screen.
In this example, when the normal screen is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 and the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the volume adjustment screen is started.

The conditions for starting the display of the volume adjustment screen are not particularly limited, but in this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed only when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during non-game. Is started, and when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during the game, the display of the volume adjustment screen is not started.

When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. The points are the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (B). Further, when the operation of the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment is terminated and the screen returns to the volume adjustment end screen indicating that the volume has been determined. Further, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted during the display of the volume adjustment end screen, the display of the demo screen is started.

FIGS. 101 (D) and 101 (E) are diagrams showing examples of various other operations in chronological order.
In the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (A), when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted while the demo screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (returns from the demo screen to the normal screen). ) An example is shown, but as shown in FIG. 101 (D), when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted during the display of the setting screen, the display of the normal screen is started (normally from the demo screen). It may be configured to return to the screen).

Further, in the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (B), when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is received during the display of the demo screen after adjusting the volume, the display of the normal screen is started (demo screen). As shown in FIG. 101 (E), when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen, the display of the normal screen is displayed. It may be configured to start (return from the demo screen to the normal screen). In this case, if the input operation is accepted after the volume adjustment end screen is displayed, the volume may not be adjusted because the volume has not been determined, or the volume adjustment end screen may be configured. Even before the display of (even before the volume is determined), the volume may be adjusted with the volume displayed on the volume adjustment screen at the time of the on operation.

<Specific example of character select operation>
Next, a specific example of the character select operation (hereinafter, may be referred to as “character selection operation”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105.
Here, the character select operation is an operation for selecting a character to appear in various effects according to the preference of the player, and in the slot machine according to the third embodiment, the character select operation is performed by the above-mentioned various operations. It can be performed.

<Specific example of character select operation / Example in which a character cannot be selected at the player's will>
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the character selection operation when the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state in chronological order, and FIG. 102 (A) shows Example 1 of the character selection operation in chronological order. It is a figure shown.

In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen indicating that the transition to the AT2 state is confirmed is displayed, the display of the character selection operation screen for performing the character selection operation in the AT2 state is displayed. It has started. The display mode of this character selection operation screen is not particularly limited, but in this example, it is configured so that the player can select a favorite character from the three types of characters A, B, and C, and the first character selection operation screen is displayed. In the display (default) of, the character A is temporarily selected.

When the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the character selection operation screen is displayed, the operation becomes a character determination operation, and the character temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen becomes a character appearing in the AT2 effect executed in the AT2 state. It is determined. As a result, in the AT2 state, the effect by the character determined by the player is started.

In this example, since the character A is temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A by the character determination operation, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Subsequently, a throwing operation (or BET operation) is performed with the AT2 effect started, and when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the first game in the AT2 state is started.

FIG. 102 (B) is a diagram showing Example 2 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the input operation is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed, the default character is displayed without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character). AT2 production by A has started.

FIG. 102 (C) is a diagram showing Example 3 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 was accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen was being displayed, the character selection operation screen was started to be displayed, but the input operation was accepted while the character selection operation screen was being displayed. Therefore, the AT2 effect by the default character A is started without selecting a character on the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

FIG. 102 (D) is a diagram showing Example 4 of the character selection operation in chronological order. In this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed because the right button 192d of the cross key 192 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed. However, the input operation is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. Therefore, the AT2 effect by the default character A is started without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

<Specific example of character select operation / Example in which a character can be selected at the player's will>
FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing Example 5 of the character selection operation in chronological order. In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is started, and the right button of the cross key 192 is displayed while the character selection operation screen cd1 is being displayed. Since 192d has been accepted, the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed. Further, in this example, since the input operation is accepted while the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed, when the input operation is accepted while the character selection operation screen cd1 is displayed after the character selection operation screen cd1 is redisplayed. Even so, the input operation is not accepted as a character determination operation (the character is not selected against the player's intention), and the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is maintained.

Then, when the pressing operation (lever operation) of the start lever 135 is received while the character selection operation screen cd1 is being displayed, the character that notifies that the character (character A in this example) to appear in the AT2 effect has been determined. After displaying the decision screen ed1, the AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

FIG. 103 (B) is a diagram showing Example 6 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, the flow until the character selection operation screen cd1 is redisplayed after the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 103 (A), but the character selection operation screen cd1 after the redisplay is displayed. Since the operation of the PUSH button 194, that is, the character determination operation is accepted during the display, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, and is made to appear in the AT2 effect. After displaying the character determination screen ed1 that notifies that the character (character A in this example) has been determined, the AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C), the PUSH button 194 is configured to emit light, and the PUSH button 194 is configured to emit light when the character selection operation screen can be displayed. doing.

FIG. 104 (A) is a diagram showing Example 6 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the non-light emitting PUSH button 194, which has been turned off, is made to emit light, and the operation of the PUSH button 194 (character selection operation). When the screen call operation) is accepted, the display of the character selection operation screen is started. Further, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed even while the character selection operation screen is being displayed, when the PUSH button 194 is made to emit light and the operation (character determination operation) of the PUSH button 194 is accepted, The character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A tentatively selected on the character selection operation screen, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Further, during this AT2 production, since the character selection operation screen cannot be displayed, the PUSH button 194 is turned off.

FIG. 104 (B) is a diagram showing Example 7 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the character selection operation screen cannot be displayed while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed and the demo screen is being displayed, the PUSH button 194 is turned off. In this example, the volume adjustment end screen is displayed when the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. For example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 10). Seconds) may elapse, and the display of the volume adjustment end screen may be started.

FIG. 104 (C) is a diagram showing Example 8 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, the flow until the volume adjustment end screen is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 104 (B), but when the operation of the PUSH button 194 (not shown) is accepted, the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed. Is displayed again, and since the character selection operation screen can be displayed during the display, the non-light emitting push button 194, which has been turned off, is made to emit light.

<Specific example / modification of character select operation>
FIG. 105 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, after the character selection operation screen is displayed, the selection decision effect for notifying the information of the character selected on the character selection operation screen (character A in this example) is performed. With such a configuration, the player can confirm whether or not the desired character is selected before the production is started, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the input operation is accepted while the screen other than the character selection operation screen is displayed, the default character selection operation screen is not displayed (the player is not given the opportunity to select a favorite character). Since the AT2 effect by the character A has been started, the selection decision effect is not performed. With such a configuration, the disappointment of the player may be reduced even if the player is not given the opportunity to select a favorite character.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 3-1”) is a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. It is a game table provided with means, the game table is a slot machine, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting an operation for the first determination (hereinafter, "first display"). For example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 106 and the character selection operation screen cd1) shown in FIG. 103 (A), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation for the second determination. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 106 and the volume adjustment screen sd1 shown in FIG. 103 (A)), and the first display is displayed. In this state, any of the first operations (for example, a certain operation h1 shown in FIG. 106, a closing operation shown in FIG. 103 (A), an operation of the PUSH button 194, and an operation of a plurality of buttons included in the cross key 192. When the operation or a plurality of operations among these operations is performed, the decision regarding the first decision (for example, selection of a character to appear in a certain effect) is configured to be feasible. The second display can be started to be displayed in the state where the first display is displayed, and the decision regarding the first decision is executed after the first display is started to be displayed. Even if the first operation is performed in the state where the second display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state") in which the display is started before, the first determination is made. It is a game console characterized in that it is configured so that decisions regarding. Note that FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 3-1 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 3-1 of the present application, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision). Also, after the second display, there is a risk of forgetting the contents of the first display, and the decision regarding the first display becomes unintended by the player (for example, it is first made at the start of the game). There are cases where it is inadvertently determined by an operation (inserting a medal into the insertion slot, pressing the insertion button), but prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her motivation to play. Is possible.

The game console according to the invention 3-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends. It may be configured so that the decision regarding the first decision is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the earlier decision (decision regarding the first decision) even after the display of the operation display for the later decision is finished. This is because, after the second display, the previously displayed content (the content of the first display) may be forgotten, for example, the decision operation regarding the second display and the decision regarding the first display. If the operations are the same, an unintended decision may be made by repeatedly performing a decision operation (for example, a continuous hit operation). Also, even if the decision operation for the second display and the decision operation for the first display are not the same, it is not intended if the decision operation for the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display. Decisions may be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. It may be configured so that the decision regarding the first decision is not executed even if the operation of is performed.

Further, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends, the first operation is performed. The decision regarding one decision is not executed, but when the second operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is made feasible, and the first operation and the second operation are different operations. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) carefully. It can also give the player a sense of discomfort and save time, while reminding him of the first display. In addition, since the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) may be made by the lever operation following the throwing operation, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to the player who is accustomed to the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. Is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed, but when a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation") is performed, the first operation is performed. Decisions regarding one decision may be configured to be viable.

Further, when the operation means (for example, the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103 (B) or the like) that may be used for the effect is provided and the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed. , The decision regarding the first determination is configured to be feasible, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends and the display of the second display ends. When the operation of the operating means is performed after the end, the decision regarding the first determination may be configured to be feasible.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the decision regarding the first decision without being influenced by the display state by the operating means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since stable decisions can be made with the operating means that may be used for the production, it is possible to entertain the production by paying attention to the operating means to the player who is not interested in the operating means. You may be able to do it. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

The operating means that may be used for the production may be an operating means capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output means (for example, a speaker), or an optical output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device). It may be an operation means capable of adjusting the amount of light and the brightness of the light crystal.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, a screen suggesting that the AT2 state has been determined), and the fourth display is displayed from the state in which the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be transitionable to the state in which one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed in the state where the fourth display is displayed, the decision regarding the first decision can be executed. It may be configured in.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

Further, the display of the second display can be started in the state where the fourth display is displayed, and the first display is displayed after the fourth display is started. If the first operation is performed while the second display, which was started before the display is displayed, is performed, even if the decision regarding the first decision is viablely configured. Good.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. In addition, it is considered that the player who displays the second display without displaying the first display in a state where the first display can be displayed is not interested in the decision regarding the first display. It can be decided smoothly for such a player. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

Further, it is provided with a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. Including a re-game combination capable of performing the re-game, and in a state where the execution of the re-game cannot be started, both the first display and the second display can be displayed. In the state where the execution of the re-game can be started, only the first display of the first display and the second display may be displayable.

Further, in the state where the execution of the re-game can be started and the first display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the state where the execution of the re-game can be started and the fourth display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the third display is a display composed of displays of a plurality of scenes. Yes, the display of the plurality of scenes includes the display of the first scene and the display of the second scene, and the display of the first scene is the first in the state where the first display is displayed. The display is started when the operation of is performed, and the display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed. The display may be in some cases.

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The second number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. It is a game, and in the first state in the first game, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed, and the second game is described. In the first state of the above, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision may not be executed.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is played in the first game or the second game, depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. It may be possible to realize that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 3-2”) is provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. The game console is a slot machine, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting an operation for the first decision (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”, for example. , The first display d1 shown in FIG. 107, the character selection operation screen cd1) shown in FIG. 103 (B), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays prompts the operation for the second determination ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 107 and the volume adjustment screen sd1) shown in FIG. 103 (A), and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed. The display after the determination regarding the first determination (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”; for example, the third display d3 shown in FIG. 107 and the character determination screen ed1 shown in FIG. 103 (B)). In the state where one display is displayed, the first operation (for example, a certain operation h1 shown in FIG. 107, the closing operation shown in FIG. 103 (B), the operation of the PUSH button 194, and the cross key 192 are provided. When any operation of a plurality of button operations or a plurality of operations among these operations is performed, the third display is configured to be displayable, and the first display is displayed. The display is configured to be able to start displaying the second display in the state, and the display is started after the first display is started and before the third display is displayed. In a state where the second display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state"), even if the first operation is performed, the third display is not displayed. It is a game table characterized by this. Note that FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 3-2 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 3-2 of the present application, the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) can be made carefully. Also, after the second display, there is a risk of forgetting the contents of the first display, and the decision regarding the first display becomes unintended by the player (for example, it is first made at the start of the game). There are cases where it is inadvertently determined by an operation (inserting a medal into the insertion slot, pressing the insertion button), but prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her motivation to play. Is possible.

The game console according to the invention 3-2 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends. It may be configured so that the third display is not displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the earlier decision (decision regarding the first decision) even after the display of the operation display for the later decision is finished. This is because, after the second display, the previously displayed content (the content of the first display) may be forgotten, for example, the decision operation regarding the second display and the decision regarding the first display. If the operations are the same, an unintended decision may be made by repeatedly performing a decision operation (for example, a continuous hit operation). Also, even if the decision operation for the second display and the decision operation for the first display are not the same, it is not intended if the decision operation for the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display. Decisions may be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. Even if the operation of is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends, the first operation is performed. Although the third display is not displayed, even if the third display is configured to be displayable when a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation") is performed. Good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) carefully. It can also give the player a sense of discomfort and save time, while reminding him of the first display. In addition, since the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) may be made by the lever operation following the throwing operation, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to the player who is accustomed to the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. The third display is not displayed even if the operation of (1) is performed, but when a certain operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") different from the first operation is performed, the third operation is performed. The display may be configured to be displayable.

Further, when the operation means (for example, the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103 (B) or the like) that may be used for the effect is provided and the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed. , The third display can be displayed, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends. When the operation of the operating means is performed, the third display may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the decision regarding the first decision without being influenced by the display state by the operating means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since stable decisions can be made with the operating means that may be used for the production, it is possible to entertain the production by paying attention to the operating means to the player who is not interested in the operating means. You may be able to do it. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

The operating means that may be used for the production may be an operating means capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output means (for example, a speaker), or an optical output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device). It may be an operation means capable of adjusting the amount of light and the brightness of the light crystal.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, a screen suggesting that the AT2 state has been determined), and the fourth display is displayed from the state in which the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to the state where one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed while the fourth display is displayed, the third display can be displayed. It may have been.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

Further, the display of the second display can be started in the state where the fourth display is displayed, and the first display is displayed after the fourth display is started. If the first operation is performed in a state where the second display is displayed before the display is started, the third display may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. In addition, it is considered that the player who displays the second display without displaying the first display in a state where the first display can be displayed is not interested in the decision regarding the first display. It can be decided smoothly for such a player. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

Further, it is provided with a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. Including a re-game combination capable of performing the re-game, and in a state where the execution of the re-game cannot be started, both the first display and the second display can be displayed. In the state where the execution of the re-game can be started, only the first display of the first display and the second display may be displayable.

Further, in the state where the execution of the re-game can be started and the first display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured.

Further, in the state where the execution of the re-game can be started and the fourth display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the fifth display is a display composed of displays of a plurality of scenes. Yes, the display of the plurality of scenes includes the display of the first scene and the display of the second scene, and the display of the first scene is the first in the state where the first display is displayed. The display is started when the operation of is performed, and the display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed. The display may be in some cases.

In addition, a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (hereinafter referred to as "first game"; for example, a three-card bet game) and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (hereinafter referred to as "first game"). , "Second game". For example, a two-card betting game) is playable, and the second number is different from the first number and is different from the second game. The first game is more advantageous to the player, and even if the first operation is performed in the first state of the first game, the third display is not displayed. In the first state of the second game, even if the first operation is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is played in the first game or the second game, depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. It may be possible to realize that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

In the AT2 state (or AT1 state), points may be increased according to the small winning combination (display (title or item) according to the internal points may be displayed). Further, the advantage in the judge state may be changed according to the value. Further, based on the points accumulated by the player, a fanning effect may be performed in a final game such as the AT2 state to determine or notify the mode of the judge state.

Further, in the case of the second game (two-card game), the points and items may be configured so as not to increase. Further, when the second game (two-card game) is configured not to display (skip) a specific scene, it may be configured not to display (skip) the fanning effect.

In addition, on a game table with specifications that the bonus symbols will be aligned unless the symbols are avoided, the operation navigation is performed in a displayable state (in the internal hit state, in the case of other than replay, it comes off, and it is not always pulled in). You may. In addition, when the symbols are aligned, the predetermined effect display is repeatedly performed (for example, the display of the still image is continued), and even if the final game of the advantageous section is reached at that time, the number of acquired sheets, etc. The result of is displayed. In addition, the predetermined effect may be continued even after the transition to the normal section (after the next game).

In addition, the default screen in the normal game state may be displayed after the bonus is completed without shifting to the advantageous section during the bonus. Further, during the bonus, the player may shift to a game state in which only the second game (two-card betting game) is possible. That is, in a game table with specifications in which bonus symbols are aligned unless the symbols are avoided, only the second game (two-card betting game) may be possible during the bonus. During the bonus, a game with 2 INs and 2 OUTs with a difference of 0 may be played over several tens of games, and the bonus may end when the payout exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60). ..

Further, even if the value of the high navigation state counter remains 19 games during the bonus of the two-card game, it may be configured not to shift to the LMT state. Further, the ED effect may be started (or the ED effect is not performed) without shifting to the LMT state. Further, for example, if the bonus ends before the number of remaining games reaches 0, it may be possible to shift to the LMT state (or it may always shift, or when it shifts). There may be). In addition, even after the limiter is reached during the bonus and the state shifts to the low navigation state, the second game (two-card game) is forced, and even if the configuration is such that the state does not shift to the high navigation state during the game. Good.

[Embodiment 4]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configurations different from the game consoles according to the first to third embodiments will be described. In principle, FIGS. 108 to 157 are used only for the description of the fourth embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the fourth embodiment is described in FIGS. 108 to 157. The code shown in 157 is given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110-112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

The notification lamp 123 tells the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp that informs you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up after the bonus notification for notifying the confirmation of the bonus until the end of the bonus game. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert a medal at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. is there.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 for the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 for the stop operation is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamp to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is described as lighting, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 109 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board in which the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is housed. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supply to the control unit and each device. Further, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the closing operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage is less than 9v) is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and is capable of communicating with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can send a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various indicators, and the like are stored. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and uses the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 3A is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110-112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 19 frame of the left reel 110 is a "bell symbol", the number 19 frame of the middle reel 111 is a "blank symbol", and the number 18 frame of the right reel 112 is "seven 2". "Designs" are arranged respectively. In the following, "Seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "blue 7 (symbol)", and "seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "red 7 (symbol)".

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). Note that FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a winning line of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is placed on the upper design of the left reel and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2). The displayed symbol is the left reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the left reel 110 lower (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel 111 upper (4 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed at the position (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the upper symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed at the middle of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). The displayed symbol is the upper symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol on the right reel and the lower symbol on the right reel 112 (9 shown in the figure). The symbols displayed at (position; symbol position 9) are called the lower symbols on the right reel, and the symbols on each reel 110-112 are vertically three on each reel 110-112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of the middle winning line L1 composed of the left reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 2), the middle reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 5), and the right reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a stop position of a symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination described in FIGS. 5A and 5B described later. It is a line that determines whether or not a combination is displayed. FIG. 4B shows the middle winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can bet three or two medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, no winning line is valid and three or two medals are inserted. The winning line L1 becomes effective when one bet is placed. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

Moreover, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three upward-sloping winning lines may be set as valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b). It should be noted that FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2) and a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13, small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 5). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations are sometimes referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1, The prizes for the special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 13 are included.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the 3-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the 2-card betting game. No medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2" for the special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-Seven 1" for the special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). ..

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special) If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 cards are won by BB1 and 55 cards are won by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special gaming state (RT4) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 13)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay 2 (directed replay 1), and replay 3 for replay. (Direction replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 112, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 5)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 (cherry), small role. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 112, such as "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 113A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination in the three-card betting game, and FIG. 114 (c) shows the internal lottery process of the winning combination in the two-card betting game. It is a figure which shows a part of the lottery table used. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination. The item "No." in each figure is a convenient number assigned to each lottery result, and in the case of a single role, one "No." corresponds to one "condition device". However, in the case of duplicate combinations, one "No." corresponds to a plurality of "conditional devices".

The lottery table used in the two-card betting game is different from the lottery table used in the three-card betting game. However, in FIG. 114 (b), only the winning combinations necessary for the explanation of the present invention are shown, and other explanations are given. Omit. In this example, the expected value of the game medium obtained by the small role is configured to be higher in the two-card game than in the three-card game.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery by acquiring numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. The lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) among other game states (for example, a game state excluding the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 114 (a).

Re-game The winning combination that is internally won in the low probability state is special role 1 (condition device No. 1. only for 3-card bet game), special role 2 (not shown, only for 2-card bet game), and re-game combination 1 (replay game). Conditional device No. 2), re-gaming combination 2,4-10 (conditional device No. 3), re-gaming combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13 (conditional device No.4), small combination 1 to small There is a combination 5 (condition device Nos. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning a loss".

Here, "re-game combination 2, 4 to 10" means re-game role 2, re-game role 4, re-game role 5, re-game role 6, re-game role 7, re-game role 8, re-game role 9 , And the replaying combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110-112, the re-game combination 4, the re-game combination 5, the re-game combination 6, the re-game combination 7, the re-game combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 8, the replay combination 9, and the replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. In addition, a combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

In addition, "re-gaming combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means re-gaming combination 3, re-gaming combination 4, re-gaming combination 6, re-gaming combination 8, re-gaming combination 10, re-gaming combination 11 , Re-game combination 12, and re-game combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110-112, the re-game combination 4, the re-game combination 6, the re-game combination 8, the re-game combination 10, the re-game combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 11, the replay combination 12, and the replay combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 114 (Fig. 114). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell winning). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

In addition, even if the "small winning combination 4" is internally won and the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, one medal may be paid out and one winning combination may be won. If the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined incorrect answer operation order, the winning combination is won, and if the stop operation is performed according to the other incorrect answer operation order, the single winning combination is not won. It is configured so that medals are not paid out.

In addition, "small role 4" is composed of "small role 4a" and "small role 4b", and when "small role 4a" is internally elected, "bell-bell-bell" according to the operation order of the player. Is determined whether or not is displayed on the winning line, but if the "small winning combination 4b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as follows.

Here, the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 4" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114 (b). To be precise, there are six "small roles 4": "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small roles 4". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 4LCR" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 113A shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later. It is shown that when the special role 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

In the present embodiment, until the special role 2 is internally elected in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the two-card betting game is promoted by notifying the two-card betting game.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-gaming combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to on, and the player stops at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 114 (a), and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2). In RT3), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 114 (a). The winning combinations that are internally won in the special role internal winning state are re-game combination 1, re-game combination 2,4-10, re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10-13, small role 1-small role 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Further, in FIG. 113 (a), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is performed. It has been shown to transition to state (RT4).

In the present embodiment, in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3), the notification for prompting the two-card betting game is terminated to encourage the three-card game.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player among all the gaming states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 114 (a). In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 5. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 113 (a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of sheets is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the game shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. ..

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of cards are paid out, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when a prize is won (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 113 (a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). FIG. 113B is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT-type game state is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also called a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigation is internally elected as a push order combination (in this example, a replay combination 2,4 to 10, a replay combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, or a small combination 4). In some cases, an effect of notifying the correct operation order (pushing order) (details will be described later) and an effect of notifying the operation timing (for example, the reel symbols are grouped into one or more (color coding, symbols and numbers). It refers to an effect that suggests one or more groups (colors, symbols, numbers, etc.) by giving), or an effect that notifies both the correct operation order (push order) and the operation timing.

That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 (b) and 115. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 115 shows the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a figure.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when the "re-game combination 2,4-10" or the "re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10-13" is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 and displays the effect image. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the character "−-1”) suggesting that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111. The data suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112 and the display data 07 are such that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting the stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the character "213") is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replay combination or the small combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer of the small winning combination 4 may be set to three options as in the replay combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the correct answer stop operation of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 4, and the re-game combination may also be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous for the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings about a favorable result for the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), for example, a route that shifts in the order of the finalized notification state → AT1 state → AT2 state, and shifts from this AT2 state to the normal gaming state via the pullback state. There is a route that shifts (returns) from the AT2 state to the AT1 state again. In the present embodiment, the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is one set, and in principle, when two sets are digested, the state shifts to the pullback state.

Here, the AT1 state is an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the number of games (AT state of managing the number of games), and ends when, for example, a certain number of games (for example, 20G) is exhausted. On the other hand, the AT2 state is an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the difference number of game media (AT state of difference number management). For example, the difference number of game media reaches a certain value (for example, 200 sheets). If you do, it will end.

Further, the payout rate of both the AT1 state and the AT2 state is set to a value larger than 1, but the AT1 state is an AT state for increasing the profit amount of the AT2 state, and is higher than the AT2 state. It is an AT state in which the ball rate is set low, and the AT2 state is an AT state in which the ball output rate is set higher than that in the AT1 state. In the AT1 state, for example, when the push order bell is won, the probability that the operation navigation is executed is lower than that in the AT2 state, the push order is notified by the two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation), or By performing the operation navigation that combines these, the ball output rate is lower than that in the AT2 state.

Here, "two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation)" is a kind of operation navigation, and is an effect of notifying the operation order (pushing order) of the correct stop operation, the timing of the stop operation, etc. by two choices. To say. For example, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct answer, but in the 2-choice navigation, while suggesting that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the operation order of the second stop reel and the third stop reel is concealed (for example, An image including characters and numbers of "? 1?") Is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In this example, the player performs a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, or the first stop reel is the middle reel 111. To perform the stop operation by selecting either one of the stop operation in which the second stop reel is the right reel 112 and the third stop reel is the left reel 110 (select one from two types of push orders). Become.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 113B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state includes a normal state, and the high navigation state effect state includes a normal state, a final notification state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. The AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls is increased.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state. In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 116.
FIG. 116A illustrates an image of an effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 or RAM 408 shown in FIG. 110) of the first sub-control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400 has an effect information (for example, an effect state, a high navigation state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main process described later. The effect status counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent effect control process (step S3605), the effect table corresponding to the effect state, etc. is referred to, and the effect according to the effect state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and the effect data for executing the AT1 effect described later is read from the ROM 406. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 116B is a diagram showing an example of an LMT state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. 116 (b) and sets the counter to the counter. It is determined whether or not the corresponding trigger (start condition, end condition, etc. of the production) has arrived, and when the trigger has arrived, the production corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when performing effect control according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIGS. 116 (b) and (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135. When the pressing operation (lever on) of is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 116 (b) and (2) is used to select from a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3 according to the current set value. A predetermined effect is selected, processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image) is executed.

Further, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIGS. 116 (b) and (2) is displayed. A predetermined effect is selected from a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed to suggest the setting effect B. (For example, the background image of the end screen) is executed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the case of a two-card betting game, when a control for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) is performed in the interlocking effect, the effect state is performed by the main control unit 300. Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continuously displays the scene corresponding to the value of the same effect state counter. The control method for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect is not limited to this example, and is interlocked with, for example, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. It may be configured not to send a command for displaying a subsequent scene in the production.

The effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example, and are, for example, according to the current effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) as shown in FIG. 116 (c). Therefore, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 117 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process (details will be described later) is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 316 are acquired, and the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is shown. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S105, the reel stop data selection process for selecting the reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, the effect control process A (detailed later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the effect processing is executed. In this effect processing, the freeze effect is controlled.

Here, the freeze effect is an effect that makes the originally planned effect seem to be interrupted in the middle, an effect that makes the slot machine seem to have stopped responding, and the like. Further, for light emission, for example, stopping the change in lighting mode is called freeze, for sound output, for example, continuing to output the same sound is called freeze, and for operation, for example, the operation is in the middle. Stopping may be referred to as a freeze.

In step S108, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, the stop button reception command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). For the third stop operation, the stop button reception 2 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel is prepared. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "bell-bell-bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small role 3 (bell). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

In step S113, the effect control process B (detailed later) related to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed. In step S114, the high navigation state end process (detailed later) regarding the end of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 118) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S2003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S2006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S2007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each original register. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 117.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. Note that FIG. 119 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 119 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 119 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 119 (d) is a flowchart of the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (a).
When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Details will be described later, but here, processing such as preparation for the production is performed according to the processing related to the number display and the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 119 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, the command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the effect random number value is updated, and the like.

Next, the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). In step S3301 of this effect control process, a number display-related process (detailed later) is performed, and in the next step S3302, other effect control processes are performed, and then the effect control process ends.

<Processing of the second sub control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. Note that FIG. 120A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 120B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 120 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 120 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 120 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization processing, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization processing of the storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 120A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306. If not, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Bet number setting / start operation reception process>
Next, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (a). FIG. 121A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG. 117.

In step S201, the high navigation state update process (detailed later) relating to the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state and the update of the high navigation state is executed in the state where the medal can be inserted before the start lever operation.

In step S202, other bet number setting / start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the number of bets is set, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated.

<High navigation status update process>
Next, the high navigation state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (b). FIG. 121 (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process in step S201 of FIG. 121 (a).

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state counter> 0. If the high navigation status counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S302, and if not, the high navigation status update process ends. In step S302, the value of the high navigation state counter is subtracted by 1.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the AT system is the high navigation state. When it is on, it indicates a high navigation state, and when it is off, it indicates a low navigation state. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304, and if not, the high navigation state update process ends.

In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In the present embodiment, the initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter in the game in which the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is decided (see step S703 in FIG. 123 (b) described later). , When the start lever of the next game is operated, it shifts to the high navigation state. By turning on the high navigation status flag, the high navigation status lamp 190 starts lighting.

<Production state control process A>
Next, the effect state control process A will be described with reference to FIG. 122A. FIG. 122A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process A in step S106 of FIG. 117.

In step S401, common processing for each game (details will be described later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the processing related to the high navigation state in the high navigation state, and when the processing prohibition flag is off, the game must be able to execute the processing related to the high navigation state. When the processing prohibition flag is on, it indicates that the game does not execute the processing related to the high navigation state. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403. If not, that is, if the processing prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, it is on, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S404, since the navigation state is low, the low navigation state process A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S405, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, the high navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S406, the other effect state control process A is executed.

In the effect state control process A of the present embodiment, the process prohibition flag is provided, and the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is executed only when the process prohibition flag is off, but the process prohibition flag is not provided. You may. In this case, the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is always executed in the effect state control process A.

<Common processing for each game>
Next, the common processing for each game will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (b). FIG. 122 (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the common processing for each game in step S401 of FIG. 122 (a).

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is that the game is a recommended number of games (in this example, a three-card betting game). The recommended number of games is not limited to the three-card game, and the recommended number of games may differ depending on the state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, if the condition for executing the high navigation state-related process is satisfied (for example, if the game is a three-card betting game), the process proceeds to step S502, and if not (for example). , If the game is a two-card betting game), the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S502, the processing prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the processing prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, other common processing for each game is executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, the common processing for each game will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a). FIG. 123 (a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the low navigation state process A in step S404 of FIG. 122 (a).

In step S601, a high navigation state transition process (detailed later) for determining whether or not to shift to the high navigation state is executed. In step S602, other low navigation state processing A is executed.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, the high navigation state transition process will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state transition process in step S601 of FIG. 123 (a).

In step S701, the high navigation state transition determination is executed. In this high navigation state transition determination, when the high navigation state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when a winning combination other than a loss is won in the winning combination internal lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the next Decide to move from the game to the high navigation state.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state transition is determined, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the high navigation state transition process is terminated.

In step S703, the initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter. Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1000, and may be, for example, 1500. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games to be executed after shifting to the high navigation state is set, and for example, the initial value (700 in this example) is set to the value of the ceiling counter.

In step S701, in the high navigation state transition determination, the transition to the high navigation state is determined when a winning combination other than the loss is won, but the high navigation transition condition is not limited to this, for example, a random number value is used. The transition to the high navigation state may be decided based on the result of the lottery used, or the lottery is performed using the lottery value provided for each winning combination, and the transition to the high navigation state is performed based on the result of the lottery. May be determined.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 122 (a).

In step S801, high navigation state common processing (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S803, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, the normal state process A (detailed later) is executed. Details will be described later, but in this normal state processing A, for example, a counter related to the number of games in the effect state (precursor state) is subtracted. In addition, the effect setting is performed for the game according to the result of the internal lottery process for the winning combination.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the finalized notification state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S805, the final notification state process A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S807, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S811, and if not, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, AT2 state processing A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, the pullback state process A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S814, the instruction information setting process (detailed later) related to the setting of the instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, the high navigation state common process A will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state common process A in step S801 of FIG. 124.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter> 0. If the effect state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, the value of the effect state counter is subtracted by 1. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. When the number of games in each production state is determined by a lottery or a table, the result of the lottery or a numerical value obtained from the table or the like may be set in the value of the production state counter, or the system shifts to the high navigation state. At that time, the number of games in a part or all of the production states may be determined at once.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is the LMT state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S904, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S909.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S906. The process proceeds to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but other values may be used.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not applicable, step S906 is performed. Proceed to S909. In this example, the high navigation state is terminated when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3-card betting game is 11 (maximum increase is 8), and the difference exceeds 2000. Therefore, the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets-8 sheets x 20 G), but other values may be used.

In step S906, the LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S907, freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set. Further, in step S908, the process proceeds to step S909 after setting the LMT state in the effect state. As a result, the effect state shifts from the game to the LMT state.

In this example, the initial value of LMT is set to 19 (= 20G-1G) in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, but other numerical values may be used. Further, the process itself in step S906 may be deleted. With such a configuration, after shifting to the LMT state, it is possible to stay in the high navigation state until the number of games reaches the maximum number of games or the difference number reaches the maximum difference number. , The player's motivation to play can be increased.

In step S909, the high navigation state common process A is terminated after the other high navigation state common process A is executed.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, the normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG. 124.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter> 0. If the ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, the value of the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games up to the ceiling. In this embodiment, the initial value (700 in this example) is set in the ceiling counter in step S705 of the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. 123 (b), but other numerical values are used. You may.

In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step 1005. In step S1005, the AT1 transition lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 transition lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the AT1 state, and in this example, the winning or losing is determined based on the result of the internal lottery processing of the winning combination, the random number value, and the like. The content of the AT1 transition lottery is not limited to this example, and for example, the winning or failing may be determined in consideration of the value of the high navigation state counter, etc., and points are based on the result of the internal lottery processing of the winning combination. May be given and the result may be decided based on the points.

In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the AT1 transition lottery in step S1005 has been won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if it is not won, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, it is determined to be either "high" or "low" based on a random number value or the like. The content of the AT1 type lottery is not limited to this example. For example, "high" is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery when the AT1 transition lottery is won, rather than the lottery when the ceiling is reached. The configuration may be easy (or difficult to select).

In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set in the AT1 type, and in the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by the lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. Further, in step S1010, after turning on the AT1 winning flag, the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low", and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1012, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1012, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining a numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1106, the normal state processing A is terminated after the other normal state processing A is performed.

<Final notification status processing A>
Next, the final notification state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A in step S805 of FIG. 124.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low", and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step 1107. In step S1102, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1103, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value (for example, 700), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1105, "high" is set for the AT1 type, and the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, after performing other final notification state processing A, the final notification state processing A is terminated.

Although not shown, when the AT1 type is "high" in this example, an additional lottery may be performed to add (add) the number of sets in the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state). Then, the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, which will be described later, may be performed, or the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state may be added by a lottery different from the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery.

<AT1 state processing A>
Next, AT1 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 (a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG. 124, and FIG. 128 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table used for the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery. is there.

In step S1201, the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery is performed. This AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery is a lottery for adding the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state. In this example, the lottery table (for AT1) shown in FIG. 128 (b) is referred to inside. The number of cards to be added is determined based on the winning combination and the random number value. In the next step S1202, the lottery result (additional number) of the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery in step S1201 is added to the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter stored in the RAM 308, and then the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, after performing other AT1 state processing A, AT1 state processing A is terminated. In the other AT1 state processing A, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information indicating the count value of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter (AT2 planned acquisition number information) to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed.

Here, the lottery table (for AT1) used in the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery in step S1201 is for determining the initial value (initial number) of the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state, and will be described later. It is set so that the probability that the game medium is added is higher than that of the lottery table (for AT2) shown in FIG. 129 (b) (for example, in the lottery table (for AT2), the game medium is lost and replayed. Although it is not added, at the lottery table (for AT1), the game medium is added even if it is lost or replayed).

The lottery table used in the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery in the AT1 state processing A is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 128 (b), and is larger than the lottery table (for AT2) shown in FIG. 129 (b) described later. , The game medium may be set so as to have a high probability of being added. Therefore, for example, the lottery table (for AT1) may have more lottery results (winners) to be added than the lottery table (for AT2), and in the case of the first lottery result, the lottery table (for AT2) It is always added in the lottery table (for AT1), but it may not be added (or may not be added) in the lottery table (for AT2), and in the case of the first lottery result, it is added in the lottery table (AT1). (For AT2) and the lottery table (for AT2) are always added, but the added values may be different (or the same).

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, AT2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 (a) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG. 124.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the previous game is non-replay (whether or not the player has won the replay combination), and if it is non-replay, the process proceeds to step S1302, and if it is replay, the process proceeds to step S1303. .. In step S1302, after subtracting the input number (3 in this example) in the game from the AT2 planned acquisition number counter, the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery is performed. This AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery is a lottery for adding the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state. In this example, the lottery table (for AT2) shown in FIG. 129 (b) is referred to inside. The number of cards to be added is determined based on the winning combination and the random number value. In the next step S1304, the lottery result (addition number) of the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery in step S1303 is added to the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, AT2 state processing A is terminated after performing other AT2 state processing A. In the other AT2 state processing A, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information indicating the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter after the update (AT2 planned acquisition number information) to the first sub-control unit 400, or after the update. A process of transmitting a command including information indicating the count value of the AT planned acquisition number counter (AT2 planned acquisition number counter) to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed.

<Pullback state processing A>
Next, the pullback state process A will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process A in step S813 of FIG. 124.

In step S1501, a pullback lottery is performed, and in step SS1502, it is determined whether or not the pullback lottery has been won. If the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1503, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1503, the determined state is set in the pullback state. In this example, the lottery result of the pullback lottery in step S1501 is set to the pullback state. In step S1504, the pullback state process A is terminated after the other pullback state process A is performed.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, the instruction information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG. 124.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the winning combination has been internally won in the push order combination in the winning combination internal lottery process. In this example, the push order combination means the internal winning of the "small combination 4" in the conditional device. If the push order combination is internally won, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends. The "pushing order" according to the present invention includes a winning combination that enables a prize to be won when an operation is performed according to a predetermined correct operation order (pushing order), and a predetermined operation. Timing (for example, grouping reel symbols into one or more groups (color coding, assigning symbols, numbers, etc.)) and notifying one or more groups (colors, symbols, numbers, etc.) suggests When the winning combination is possible when the operation is performed according to the timing), or when the operation is performed according to both the predetermined correct operation order (pushing order) and the predetermined operation timing. Includes winning roles, etc. that enable winning.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is the AT2 state or the LMT state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, the correct push order is set in the information (instruction information) related to the notification content of the instruction information notification. As a result, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed (see FIG. 115). Further, although not shown, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, a preparation is made for transmitting an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the order of pressing the correct answer to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157.

In the finalized notification state of this example, the number of medals will continue to decrease until the small winning combination corresponding to the AT1 type wins, so while ensuring that the payout rate is less than 1, for example, in the pushing order role. When the internal winning is won, the operation navigation is executed only in the push order of a specific type (for example, when the small winning combination 4 is internally won, any one of the small winning combination 4LCR, ..., The small winning combination 4RCL or The operation navigation may be executed for a plurality of units), or the operation navigation may be executed once every three times (for example, if the push order cannot be won three times, the next push order). (The push order navigation is executed when the role is internally won).

In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is the AT1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1605, and if not applicable, the instruction information setting process ends. In step S1605, the push order (converted push order) in which the correct push order is converted into the information (instruction information) related to the notification content of the instruction information notification is set.

As described above, in the AT1 state, for example, when the push order bell is won, the probability that the operation navigation is executed is lower than that in the AT2 state, or the push order is notified by the two-choice navigation (two-choice operation navigation). The ball output rate is lower than that in the AT2 state by performing operation navigation that combines these or by performing operation navigation, but in this step S1604, the operation order (push order) of the correct stop operation and the stop operation are performed. Performs processing such as converting timing etc. into 2-choice navigation (2-choice operation navigation).

In the present embodiment, the ball output rate in the AT1 state may be lower than that in the AT2 state, and the ball output rates in the AT1 state and the AT2 state may be changed by other methods. Further, as a method of lowering the probability that the operation navigation is executed in the AT1 state than in the AT2 state, for example, when the push order bell is won, the operation navigation is performed only once in N (N is a positive integer) times. Other methods include a method in which operation navigation is not performed, a method in which operation navigation is performed only once every N times, and a method in which two-choice navigation is performed.

<Production state control process B>
Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process B in step S113 of FIG. 117.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1703, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1703, since the navigation state is low, the low navigation state process B is executed. Although not shown, in this low navigation state process B, when the transition to the high navigation state is determined, a process of setting the effect state based on the information regarding each effect state is performed.

In step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705 after the difference number counter update process is performed. In this difference counter update process, the number of medals inserted by the player in the game (number of inserted cards) is subtracted from the number of medals (number of payouts) acquired by the player (given to the player) in the game. The count value of the difference number counter is updated by adding the calculated value to the counter value of the current difference number counter. Further, preparations are made for transmitting a payout command including at least information on the number of inserts indicating the number of inserts and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of payouts to the first sub control unit 400.

In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1706, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1706, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, the high navigation state process B (detailed later) is executed. In step S1707, after executing the other effect state control process B, the effect state control process B is terminated.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state processing B in step S1704 of FIG. 132.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1802, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1802, normal state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the finalized notification state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1804, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1804, the final notification state process B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1806, AT1 state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, the pullback state process B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1813, after executing the LMT state process B (detailed later), the high navigation state process B is terminated.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, the normal state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG. 133.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the normal state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903 after setting the finalized notification state in the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the finalized notification state, and the effect (for example, bonus confirmed display) according to the finalized notification state is started. In step S1903, the normal state process B is terminated after the other normal state process B is performed.

<Final notification status processing B>
Next, the final notification state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing B in step S1804 of FIG. 133.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the confirmation flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after turning on the confirmation notification flag, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type.

Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10" of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is If it is high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is the "replaying combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" of the condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2007.

In step S2004, a lottery is performed for the number of AT sets. In this AT set number lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the number of AT sets (the number of executions of the AT1 state and the AT2 state) using the lottery value and the like. In this example, the number of AT sets that are won with the highest probability is two. The number of AT sets is not limited to the example determined by lottery, and may be a fixed value (for example, twice). In the next step S2005, the lottery result (AT set number) of the AT set number lottery in step S2004 is set in the AT set remaining number counter as the AT set initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007 after performing the AT1 start setting process (details will be described later). In step S2007, after performing other final notification state processing B, the final notification state processing B is terminated.

<AT1 start setting process>
Next, the AT1 start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT1 start setting process in step S2006 of FIG. 135.

In step S2051, one AT set remaining number counter is subtracted, and in the next step S2052, the AT1 initial number of times lottery is performed. In this AT1 initial number lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the number of games in the AT1 state (the number of AT1 games) using the lottery value and the like. The lottery may be performed based on the AT1 type (high / low), etc., and the number of AT1 games is not limited to the example determined by the lottery, and may be a fixed value. In the next step S2053, the lottery result (the number of AT1 games) of the AT1 initial number lottery in step S2052 is set in the effect state counter as the AT1 initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2054. Step S2054 ends the AT1 start setting process after setting the AT1 state in the effect state.

<AT1 state processing B>
Next, AT1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT1 state process B in step S1806 of FIG. 133.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the AT1 state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2102, after setting the AT1 state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, the AT1 state process B is terminated after the other AT1 state process B is performed.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, AT2 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG. 133.

In step S2301, after adding the number of payouts in the game to the AT2 acquisition number counter, the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, even if the internal winning combination is not won (when the internal winning combination is missed), the number of payouts corresponding to the internal winning combination is added.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the count value of the AT acquisition number counter is equal to or greater than the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter. If not, the process proceeds to step S2307, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2303. ..

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the AT set remaining number counter is greater than 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2304 to perform the AT1 start setting process described with reference to FIG. 136, and if not applicable, step S2303. Proceed to S2305. In step S2305, the pullback initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2306, the pullback state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, the AT2 state processing B is terminated after the other AT2 state processing B is performed. In the other AT2 state processing B, for example, a process of transmitting a command including information indicating the count value of the updated AT2 acquisition number counter (AT2 acquisition number information) to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, the pullback state process B will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process B in step S1812 of FIG. 133.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pullback state = fixed (whether or not to pull back), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2402, the AT set number lottery is performed. In this AT set number lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the number of AT sets (the number of executions of the AT1 state and the AT2 state) using the lottery value and the like. In this example, the number of AT sets that are won with the highest probability is two. The number of AT sets is not limited to the example determined by lottery, and may be a fixed value (for example, twice). In the next step S2403, the lottery result (AT set count) of the AT set count lottery in step S2402 is set in the AT set remaining count counter as the AT set initial value, and the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2407 after performing the AT1 start setting process described with reference to FIG. 136.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the pullback state is completed), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2406, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2406, the process proceeds to step S2407 after turning on the high navigation state end standby flag. In step S2407, the pullback state process B is terminated after the other pullback state process B is performed.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, the LMT state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG. 133.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the LMT state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if not, the LMT state process B ends. In step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503 after setting the high navigation state end standby flag to ON. In step S2503, the LMT state processing B is terminated after the other LMT state processing B is performed.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, the high navigation state end processing will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state end processing in step S114 of FIG. 117.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is on. If the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2602, and if not, the high navigation state end process is terminated. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state end wait flag is on. If the high navigation state end wait flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2603, the high navigation state end wait flag is turned off. After the process of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is 0. This corresponds to the case because if there is a game in which the processing prohibition flag is on, the value of the high navigation state counter may become 0 before the high navigation state end wait flag is turned on. Is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2606, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2605.

In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the difference number counter> the maximum value for ending the high navigation state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2606, and if not applicable, the high navigation state end processing is terminated. This is because if there is a game in which the processing prohibition flag is on, the condition of difference number counter> high navigation state end maximum value may be satisfied before the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on. It corresponds to the case.

In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the high navigation state lamp 190 that was lit goes out. In step S2607, the high navigation state end process is terminated after the other high navigation state end processes are executed. In other high navigation state end processing, for example, the AT system game state is set to the low navigation state (normal mode), and various flags and counters used for the transition control of the high navigation state are initialized. Do.

<Processing related to number display>
Next, the number display related processing executed by the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the number display related processing in step S3301 of FIG. 119.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start lever 135 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “lever on”) has been accepted, and if the operation is accepted, the process proceeds to step S2702, and if the operation is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S2702. The process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2702, the count value of the total acquired number display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated based on the input number information and the payout number information received from the main control unit 300.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the game is a three-card betting game, and in the case of a three-card game, the process proceeds to step S2704, and when it is not a three-card game (in this example, a two-card game). Proceeds to step S2715. In step S2704, it is stored in the RAM 408 based on the AT2 planned acquisition number information (count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number information) and the AT2 acquisition number information (count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter) received from the main control unit 300. The count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is updated. In step S2704, it is possible to determine whether or not the AT2 state ends by updating the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter. Therefore, when it is determined that the AT2 state ends, the AT2 state ends. Display (for example, display of an image including the characters "LAST") or the like suggesting that the image is to be performed may be performed.

In step S2705, it is determined whether or not one game is completed, and if one game is completed, the process proceeds to step S2706, and if one game is not completed (during the game), the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2706, the count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated based on the input number information and the payout number information received from the main control unit 300.

In step S2707, it is determined whether or not the game is a three-card betting game, and in the case of a three-card game, the process proceeds to step S2708, and if it is not a three-card game (in this example, a two-card game). Proceeds to step S2712. In step S2708, the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is based on the AT2 planned acquisition number information (count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter) and the AT2 acquisition number information (count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter) received from the main control unit 300. Update the count value of.

In step S2709, it is determined whether or not the total number of acquired sheets has reached a predetermined number (whether or not the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter has reached a certain value), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2710. If not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2710, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is the AT2 state or the LMT state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2711, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2712.

In step S2711, the predetermined number acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter. The method for determining the predetermined number acquisition display is not particularly limited, but in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display is determined based on the set value, the predetermined number, and the random number value with reference to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table.

For example, when it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 135, when the set value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5), the total number of acquired sheets reaches 135 with a probability of 2/100. A predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (for example, a display including a character string of "135 sheets exceeded") is performed, and when the set value is an even number, the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 135 is displayed, it is determined that the set value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). Therefore, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is an odd number (display of an odd number setting suggestion).

Further, when it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 246, when the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), the total number of acquired sheets reaches 246 with a probability of 2/100. A predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (for example, a display including a character string of "246 sheets exceeded") is performed, and when the set value is an odd number, the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 246 is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). Therefore, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is an even number (display of an even number setting suggestion).

Further, when it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 333, when the set value is set 3, a predetermined number acquired display suggesting that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 333 with a probability of 3/100 ( For example, when the display including the character string of "333 sheets exceeded" is performed, the same predetermined number of sheets is acquired and displayed with a probability of 2/100 when the set value is set 4, and when the set value is set 5 or set 6. In addition, the same predetermined number of sheets acquisition display is displayed with a probability of 1/100, and the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display is not displayed when the set value is other than that. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 333 is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is set 3 or more. Therefore, the display can be said to be a display suggesting that the set value is set 3 or more (display suggesting setting 3 or more).

When the total number of acquired sheets reaches 456, 555, and 666, the predetermined number acquired display also indicates that the set value is set to 4 or more (display of suggested to set 4 or more), and the set value is set. It can be said that it is a display suggesting that the value is 5 or more (display of suggestion of setting 5 or more) and a display suggesting that the set value is setting 6 (display of suggestion of setting 6).

Further, when it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 500, a predetermined number acquired display suggesting that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value (for example, "" If it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 1000, the probability of reaching 1000 is 100/100 regardless of the set value. A predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (for example, a display including a character string of "1000 sheets exceeded") is performed to suggest that.

In step S2712, a display update process for updating the total number of acquired sheets display is performed based on the count value of the total acquired number display counter updated in step S2706, and in the next step S2713, the remaining AT2 updated in step S2708 is performed. Based on the count value of the acquired number display counter, the process proceeds to step S2714 after performing the display update process for updating the AT2 remaining acquired number display.

In step S2714, the process proceeds to step S2715 after performing the process for displaying the predetermined number acquisition display determined in step S2711. In step S2715, after performing other number display related processing, the number display related processing is terminated.

In this example, the setting value is suggested by the predetermined number acquisition display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other internal states of the game console (for example, the number of remaining AT sets and the number of remaining sets of AT sets, etc.) In a game table in which a mode related to the advantage related to AT (high (or low) addition probability, etc.) can be set, the mode may be suggested.

<Update and display of count values of various counters>
Next, the update and display of the count values of various counters included in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 153. 143 to 153 are timing charts showing the count values of various counters and the flow of various effects, respectively, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed and the displayed count values in association with the timing charts.

Here, prior to the explanation of the update and display of the count values of the various counters, the update and display control of the count values of the various counters will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 143 (a) is a diagram showing an example of updating the count value of various counters and controlling the display in chronological order. The item of "high navigation state counter" in FIG. 143 (a) indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state updated by the main control unit 300 in the high navigation state, and the contents are as described above. ..

<Difference number counter>
The item of "difference number counter" in FIG. 143 (a) shows the count value of the difference number counter managed by the main control unit 300. The "difference number counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500).

At the end of the game (in the present embodiment, in step S1704 of the effect state control process B (FIG. 132)), the main control unit 300 determines the number of medals (given to the player) acquired by the player in the game. After updating the count value of the difference number counter by adding the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals (inserted number) inserted by the player in the game from the payout number) to the counter value of the current difference number counter. , A payout command including at least information on the number of inserts indicating the number of inserts and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of payouts is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), when the main control unit 300 accepts the rebaon of the three-card game in the state where the count value of the difference number counter before the rebaon is 42, the main control unit 300 , At the end of the game, the value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (42 in this example) of the current difference number counter. By doing so, after updating the count value of the difference number counter to 50 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. ..

<AT2 planned acquisition number counter>
The item of "AT2 planned acquisition number counter" in FIG. 143 (a) shows the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter managed by the main control unit 300. The "AT2 planned acquisition number counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500).

When the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon (in the present embodiment, in the AT1 state processing A (FIG. 128) and the AT2 state processing A (FIG. 129)), the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and the lottery is performed. After adding the lottery result (additional number) to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter, the first sub-control unit 400 issues a command including information indicating the count value of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter (AT2 planned acquisition number information). Send to.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), when the main control unit 300 accepts the rebaon of the three-card game when the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter before the rebaon is 300, the main control unit 300 After accepting Levaon, 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, adds the lottery result (0 in this example) to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter, and then updates the AT2 planned acquisition number counter. A command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

<AT2 acquisition number counter>
The item of "AT2 acquisition number counter" in FIG. 143 (a) shows the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter managed by the main control unit 300. The "AT2 acquisition number counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

When the effect state is the AT2 state and the Levaon is accepted (in the present embodiment, in the AT2 state process A (FIG. 129)), the main control unit 300 inputs the number of sheets in the game from the AT2 acquisition number counter (this example). Then, after subtracting 3), a command including information indicating the count value of the updated AT acquisition number counter (AT2 acquisition number information) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated. If the player wins the re-game combination in the immediately preceding game, the number of cards inserted in the game is 0 because the game can be played without inserting the game medium.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), when the main control unit 300 accepts the rebaon of the three-card game when the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter before the rebaon is 0, the main control unit 300 After accepting Levaon, after subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the AT2 acquisition number counter, the AT2 acquisition number information (-in this example-) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquisition number counter. A command including 3) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, at the end of the game (in the present embodiment, in AT2 state processing B (FIG. 138)), the number of payouts in the game is added to the AT2 acquisition number counter to update the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter, and then update. A command including information indicating the count value of the later AT2 acquisition number counter (AT2 acquisition number information) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), when the main control unit 300 pays out 11 sheets in a state where the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter after Levaon is -3, the main control unit 300 pays out 11 sheets. , At the end of the game, after adding the number of payouts in the game (11 in this example) to the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter (-3 in this example), the count value of the updated AT acquisition number counter (in this example). A command including the AT2 acquisition number information indicating 8) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

<AT2 remaining number of acquisition counter>
The item of "AT2 remaining acquired number display counter" in FIG. 143 (a) shows the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter managed by the first sub-control unit 400. The "AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 or the second sub control unit 500).

The first sub-control unit 400 receives AT2 scheduled acquisition number information received from the main control unit 300 when the main control unit 300 receives the counter (in the present embodiment, in the number display related process (FIG. 142)). And, based on the AT2 acquisition number information, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), in a state where the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter before the lever-on is 300, the first sub-control unit 400 triggers the main control unit 300 to accept the lever-on. As a result, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter after Levaon is updated from 300 to 303 (= 300- (-3)) based on the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) and the AT2 acquired number information (-3). To do. After the lever is turned on, the display corresponding to the count value (303 in this example) of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter may or may not be updated.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is based on the AT2 planned acquisition number information and the AT2 acquisition number information received from the main control unit 300 at the end of the game (in the present embodiment, in the number display related process (FIG. 142)). , AT2 Updates the count value of the remaining acquisition number display counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), when the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter after Levaon is 303, the 3-card game is completed, and 11 cards are paid out in the game. At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter at the end of the game to 303 based on the AT2 planned acquisition number information (300) and the AT2 acquisition number information (8). To 292 (= 300-8).

<Total number of acquisitions display counter>
The item of "total acquired number display counter" in FIG. 143 (a) shows the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter managed by the first sub-control unit 400. The "total acquisition number display counter" may be managed by another control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 or the second sub control unit 500).

The first sub-control unit 400 receives the input number information and the payout from the main control unit 300 when the main control unit 300 receives the lever-on (in the present embodiment, in the number display related process (FIG. 142)). Based on the number of sheets information, the count value of the total acquired number of sheets display counter stored in the RAM 408 is updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), when the main control unit 300 accepts the rebaon of the three-card game in the state where the count value of the total acquired number display counter before the rebaon is 42, the first sub The control unit 400 updates the count value of the total acquired number display counter after the leveron to 39 (= 42-3) based on the input number information (3) when the main control unit 300 accepts the leveron. To do. After the lever-on, the display corresponding to the count value (39 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter may or may not be updated.

Further, although not shown, when the main control unit 300 accepts the rebaon of the two-card game in the state where the count value of the total acquired number display counter before the rebaon is 42, the first sub control unit 400 When the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, the count value of the total acquired number display counter after the Levaon is updated to 40 (= 42-2) based on the input number information (2).

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 obtains the total number of cards based on the input number information and the payout number information received from the main control unit 300 at the end of the game (in the present embodiment, in the number display related process (FIG. 142)). Update the count value of the number display counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), when the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter after Levaon is 39, the 3-card game is completed, and 11 cards are paid out in the game. At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the count value of the total acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 50 (= 39 + 11) based on the payout number information (11). Further, although not shown, when the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Levaon is 40, the two-card game is completed, and 11 cards are paid out in the game, the first sub At the end of the game, the control unit 400 updates the count value of the total acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 51 (= 40 + 11) based on the payout number information (11 sheets).

<Specific examples of updating and displaying the count values of various counters>
Next, specific examples of updating and displaying the count values of various counters will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 (b) to 153.

In addition, the item of "low / high navigation state" in each figure indicates the game state of AT system (in this example, high navigation state or low navigation state), and the item of "directing state" in each figure is The effect state (in this example, the normal state, the confirmed notification state, the pullback state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the LMT (limit) state) in each game state of the AT system is shown.

Further, the item of "high navigation state counter" in each figure indicates the number of remaining games in the high navigation state updated by the main control unit 300 in the high navigation state, and the item of "difference number counter" in each figure is. , The count value of the difference number counter is shown, and the item of "effect state counter" in each figure shows the number of remaining games in each effect state updated by the main control unit 300 in each effect state. Further, the item of "AT2 planned acquisition number counter" in each figure shows the count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter managed (updated) by the main control unit 300, and the details will be described with reference to FIG. 143 (a). That's right. Further, the item of "AT2 acquisition number counter" in each figure shows the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter managed (updated) by the main control unit 300, and the details are as described with reference to FIG. 143 (a). Is.

In addition, the item of "condition device" in each figure indicates the No. (see FIG. 114) corresponding to the winning combination in each game. As described above, the item "No." in FIG. 114 is a convenient number assigned to each lottery result, and in the case of a single combination, one "No." is one "conditional device". However, in the case of duplicate combinations, one "No." corresponds to a plurality of "conditional devices".

In addition, the item "BET" in each figure indicates the number of bets (the number of BETs) of the game medium in each game. Further, the item of "AT2 remaining acquired number display counter" in each figure shows the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter managed (updated) by the first sub-control unit 400, and the details are shown in FIG. 143 (a). As explained using. The item of "total acquired number display counter" in each figure shows the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter managed (updated) by the first sub-control unit 400, and the details are shown in FIG. 143 (a). As explained.

<Specific example 1 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 143 (b) is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

This example is an example in which the effect state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state in the high navigation state. As described above, the AT1 state is an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the number of games (AT state of managing the number of games), and ends when, for example, a certain number of games (for example, 20G) is exhausted. On the other hand, the AT2 state is an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the difference number of game media (AT state of difference number management). For example, the difference number of game media reaches a certain value (for example, 200 sheets). If you do, it will end.

<Specific example 1 / AT1 state (game R378)>
The game R378 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 378 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 28, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state of the game R378 is the AT1 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, and the small winning combination 4 (conditional device) is triggered by the acceptance of the Levaon. Since the player won No. 8) internally, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT1 state (in this example, the display of the two-choice navigation "? -1-?" That notifies the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4 with two choices) is displayed. Running.

Further, since the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT1 state is 28, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, "LAST 28G"". Display of images containing the characters of) is being executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, adds the lottery result (0 in this example) to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter, and then updates the result. While transmitting a command including AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (0 in this example) of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter to the first sub-control unit 400, the production state is the AT1 state, so AT2 acquisition The number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including the image showing the remaining number of acquisitions in the AT2 state (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is also the total number of payouts (total acquisition number display counter). The total payout number display AP including the image showing the count value of) is not displayed.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (0) when the main control unit 300 accepts the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 0 (= 0- (0)).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R378, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (0 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 8 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Since the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining acquisition number in the AT2 state (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter). Neither the display nor the display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total payout number (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is performed.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (0) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game from 0. Update to 0 (= 0-0).

<Specific example 1 / AT1 state (game R377)>
The next game R377 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 377 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 27, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT1 state after the rebaon of the game R377, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, and the small winning combination 1 (condition device No. 5) is set. Since the player has won the internal prize, the small role notification (in this example, the display "!-!-!" Suggesting that the small role 1 has been internally won) is executed.

Further, since the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT1 state is 27, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, "LAST 27G"". Display of images containing the characters of) is being executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (30 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (0 in this example) before the Levaon. ), And then a command including AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (30 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while the effect state is changed. Since it is in the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including the image showing the remaining acquisition number in the AT2 state (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is also displayed. The total payout number display AP including the image showing the total payout number (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is also not displayed.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (30) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 30 (= 30- (0)).

Further, in this game R377, since the number of AT2 planned acquisitions is determined to be 30 by the AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, the additional production UG for AT2 (in this example, the number of AT2 planned acquisitions is increased by 30). Displaying an image containing the characters "+30 sheets" that suggests that the image has been displayed) is being executed. When the AT2 state is not the number management but the number of games management, an effect suggesting the number of additional games in the AT2 state (for example, the character "+ 30G" suggesting that the number of AT2 games is 30G added) is displayed. Display of the including image) may be executed. When the effect state is the AT1 state, the display corresponding to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter is not performed, but it may be displayed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R377, the small role announcement is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 1 (condition device No. 5), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (3 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 1 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (3 in this example) (0 in this example) is added to the counter value (8 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 8 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (3) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Since the effect state is the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the remaining number display DP including an image showing the remaining acquisition number in the AT2 state (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter). Neither the display nor the display of the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total payout number (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is performed.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (30) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game from 0. Update to 30 (= 30-0).

<Specific example 1 / AT1 state (game R376)>
The next game R376 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 376 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 26, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Although not shown, since the effect state is the AT1 state after the game R376 is turned on, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, and the small winning combination 4 (condition). Since the device No. 8) was internally won, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT1 state (in this example, the display of the two-choice navigation "? -1-?" That notifies the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4 with two choices). Is running.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (30 in this example) before the Levaon. ), And then a command including AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (30 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while the effect state is changed. Since it is in the AT1 state, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated, and the display of the remaining number display DP including the image showing the remaining acquisition number in the AT2 state (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is also displayed. The total payout number display AP including the image showing the total payout number (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is also not displayed.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (30) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number display counter is updated from 0 to 30 (= 30- (0)).

Next, since the game is completed in this game R376, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 made a mistake in the operation of the two-choice navigation system and won a prize for the one-card combination of the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the number of payouts corresponding to the one-card combination of the small winning combination 4 ( In this example, after paying out one medal (at the end of the game), the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals (3 in this example) from the number of payouts (1 in this example) (-2 in this example) is calculated. , After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 6 in this example by adding to the counter value of the current difference number counter (8 in this example), the input number information (3) and the payout number information (1) While the payout command including at least is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated because the effect state is the AT1 state, and the remaining acquisition number in the AT2 state ( The remaining number display DP including the image showing the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter count value) is displayed, and the total payout number display AP including the image showing the total payout number (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is also displayed. Absent.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (30) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game from 30. Update to 30 (= 30-0).

<Specific example 1 / AT2 state (game R349)>
The game R349 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 349, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R349, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the prize internally, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 300, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts at the time of Levaon (count value of the total acquired number display counter) is 42. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 42 sheets") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, after receiving the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is obtained. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (-3) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) when the main control unit 300 accepts the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining after the Levaon. The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (= 300- (-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value (42 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter before Levaon. , The count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter after Levaon is updated to 39 (= 42-3).

Next, since the game is completed in this game R349, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (42 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 50 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter, the first sub is a command including AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter. It is transmitted to the control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (8) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Levaon (39 in this example), and the count value of the total acquired number display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 50 (= 39 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 50, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images containing the characters "TOTAL 50 sheets") is being executed.

<Specific example 1 / AT2 state (game R345)>
The game R345 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 345, a three-card betting game is played, and the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is internally won, but the small winning combination 4 is not won. ..

In this game R345, after receiving the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery is used as the AT2 planned acquisition number counter before the Levaon (this example). Then, after adding to 310), a command including AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (310 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the previous AT2 acquisition number counter (16 in this example), the AT2 acquisition number information (13 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquisition number counter. ) Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (13) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (310) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 297 (= 310- (13)), and the input number-of-sheet information (3) is subtracted from the count value (58 in this example) of the total number of sheets acquired before Levaon. The count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter is updated to 55 (= 58-3).

At the end of the game of this game R345, the main control unit 300 did not win the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), so the game was inserted from the number of payouts (0 in this example) without paying out the medals. By subtracting the number of sheets (3 in this example) (-3 in this example) and adding it to the counter value of the current difference number counter (55 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is added in this example. After updating to 55, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the AT2 acquisition number counter (13 in this example) is concerned. After adding the number of payouts in the game (in this example, the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8) was missed, but the number of payouts corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is 11), the AT acquisition number counter after updating A command including the AT2 acquired number information (24 in this example) indicating the count value is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (24) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (310) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 286 ( = 310-24), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Levaon (55 in this example), and the count value of the total acquired number display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 55 (= 55 + 0).

In this example, even if the internal winning combination is not won (when the internal winning combination is missed), the number of payouts (11 in this example) corresponding to the internal winning combination is added to the AT2 winning number counter. Therefore, the number of game media that can be acquired in the AT2 state is reduced.

<Specific example 2 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

This example is an example in which the effect state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, and the difference number reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example) in the AT2 state.

<Specific example 2 / AT2 state (game R221)>
The game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 280, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R221, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 272, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 498. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter before Levaon (280 in this example). ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (280) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 275 (= 280-5), and the input number-of-sheet information (3) is subtracted from the count value (498 in this example) of the total number of acquired number-of-sheet display counter before Levaon. The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 495 (= 498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (498 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (16) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (495 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 506 (= 495 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, it is based on the count value (500 in this example) of the total number of acquired sheets display counter. , The predetermined number acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 sheets" is determined to indicate that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. Display including the character string of "breakthrough") is performed.

<Specific example 2 / AT2 state (game R207)>
The game R207 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 207, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 280, and a three-card betting game is performed.

The game R207 of this example is the same as the game R221 in that the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500) and the effect state is the AT2 state, but the slot machine according to this example is in the AT2 state. In the game R207, the number of acquired medals has reached 500 because the predetermined number acquisition display is not performed in the AT2 state after the predetermined number acquisition display is performed once. The predetermined number of sheets acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

The slot machine according to this example is a first counter (in this example, a difference number counter) that counts the total number of game media acquired by a player based on at least the number of game media paid out in a certain game period. The first count value of the first counter (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) can be updated every time the game is played in the certain game period, and the display means (book). In the example, the effect image display device 157) reaches a predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (in this example, 500 sheets shown in FIG. 144) when the first count value reaches a predetermined value (500 in this example). It is a means capable of displaying a predetermined number of acquisition display TG) suggesting that the game has been played, and the certain game period includes a first game period (in this example, a period in which the effect state is the AT1 state) and a second game. It is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods including a period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is the AT2 state), and is the first game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is the AT1 state). It is configured to be able to shift from to the second game period (in this example, the period in which the production state is the AT2 state), and in the second game period (in this example, the AT2 state), the first count value (this). In the example, after the difference number counter count value reaches a predetermined value (500 in this example), the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value returns to the predetermined value. Even when the number of sheets is reached, the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display TG indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500, which is shown in FIG. 144) is not displayed.

According to the slot machine according to this example, after the first count value reaches a predetermined value in the second game period, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value becomes Even when the predetermined value is reached again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed, so that it is possible to reduce the feeling that the game medium has not increased in the same game period.

<Specific example 3 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

In this example, when the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, the difference number reaches the predetermined number (500 in this example) and then falls below the predetermined number in the AT1 state. After that, in the AT2 state, the difference number reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example) again.

<Specific example 3 / AT1 state (game R243)>
The game R242 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 243 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 20, and a three-card betting game is played.

At the end of the game of the game R243, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value. ), And when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R243 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached a predetermined number (500), but since the effect state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is The predetermined number of sheets acquisition display indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed.

<Specific example 3 / AT2 state (game R222)>
The game R222 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 222, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 280, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the replay of the game R222, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2). Since the player was internally elected, a small role announcement (in this example, an image containing three letters "R" of Replay (replay)) suggesting an internal winning of the replay role is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on is 280, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 498. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (280 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (280) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 280 (= 280-0), and the input number-of-sheet information (0) is subtracted from the count value (498 in this example) of the total number of acquired number-of-sheet display counter before Levaon. The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 498 (= 498-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the small role announcement is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2), the number of medals to be paid out (0 in this example) to the number of inserted cards (0 in this example) are not paid out. By adding the value obtained by subtracting (0 in this example) to the counter value of the current difference number counter (498 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 498 in this example, and then the number of input sheets is input. A payout command including at least the information (0) and the payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout number in the game (in this example) is sent to the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example). After adding 0), a command including AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 280 (). = 280-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Levaon (498 in this example), and the count value of the total acquired number display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 498 (= 498 + 0).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter) at the end of the game is 498, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 498 sheets") is being executed.

<Specific example 3 / AT2 state (game R221)>
The game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 280, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R221, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on is 280, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 498. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (280 in this example) before the Levaon. ), And then a command including AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquisition number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquisition number counter. A command including the above is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (-3) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) when the main control unit 300 accepts the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining after the Levaon. The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 283 (= 280- (-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Levaon (498 in this example). , The count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter after Levaon is updated to 495 (= 498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (498 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is added. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (8) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 272 ( = 280-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (495 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 506 (= 495 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets") is being executed.

Further, at the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value). If the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, it is based on the count value (500 in this example) of the total number of acquired sheets display counter. , The predetermined number acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 sheets" is determined to indicate that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. Display including the character string of "breakthrough") is performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, after the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches a predetermined value (500 in this example), the first count value sets the predetermined value. In the state of being lower, the first game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is the AT1 state) is shifted to the second game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is the AT2 state), and the first When the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the second predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number has reached 500, as shown in FIG. 145). TG) is configured to be displayable.

Further, after the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) reaches a predetermined value (500 in this example), the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value. From the first game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is the AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the effect state is AT2) in the state where the count value of is reaching the predetermined value again. In the case of shifting to the state (period), the second predetermined number suggesting that the predetermined number of cards has been acquired is displayed (in this example, FIG. 145) only by shifting to the second gaming period. The number acquisition display TG) is not displayed, and the predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed based on the execution of the game in the second game period.

According to the slot machine according to this example, since the predetermined number acquisition display is displayed based on the execution of the game in the second game period, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the predetermined number acquisition display.

In addition, the second game period (in this example, the effect state is AT2 state) than the expected value of the number of game media increase per game in the first game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is AT1 state). The expected value of the increase in the number of game media per game in (the period) is higher.

According to the slot machine according to this example, since the predetermined number of acquisitions is displayed during the game period in which the expected value of the increase in the number of game media is higher, the player's willingness to play until the next predetermined number of acquisitions is displayed is displayed. Can be sustained.

<Specific example 4 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

In this example, when the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, the AT2 state shifts to the AT2 state when the difference number reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example) in the AT1 state. This is an example.

<Specific example 4 / AT1 state (game R223)>
The game R223 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 223 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0 (the final game in the AT1 state), and a three-card betting game is played.

At the end of the game of the game R223, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisition display counter reaches a certain value. ), And when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R223 of this example, the total number of medals acquired has reached a predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of medals acquired is The predetermined number of sheets acquisition display indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed. Also, in the game R243 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached a predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the acquired medals The predetermined number acquisition display indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not performed.

<Specific example 4 / AT2 state (game R222)>
The game R222 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 222, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 280, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the replay of the game R222, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2). Since the player was internally elected, a small role announcement (in this example, an image including the letter "R" of Replay (replay)) suggesting the internal winning of the replay role is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on is 280, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 514. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (280 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (280) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 280 (= 280-0), and the input number-of-sheet information (0) is subtracted from the count value (514 in this example) of the total number of acquired number-of-sheet display counter before Levaon. The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 514 (= 514-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the small role announcement is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2), the number of medals to be paid out (0 in this example) to the number of inserted cards (0 in this example) are not paid out. By adding the value obtained by subtracting (0 in this example) to the counter value of the current difference number counter (514 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 514 in this example, and then the number of input sheets is input. A payout command including at least the information (0) and the payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout number in the game (in this example) is sent to the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example). After adding 0), a command including AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 280 (). = 280-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value (514 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 514 (= 514 + 0).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 514, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 514 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R222 of this example, the total number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (500) and the effect state is the AT2 state, but in the slot machine according to this example, one or more medals are paid out in the AT2 state. In the game R222, the predetermined number of medals that suggests that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 is not displayed because the predetermined number of medals is displayed when a certain winning combination is won. ..

<Specific example 4 / AT2 state (game R221)>
The game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 280, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R221, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of lever-on is 280, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "280 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 514. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, after accepting the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (280 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is obtained. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (-3) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) when the main control unit 300 accepts the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining after the Levaon. The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 283 (= 280- (-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value (514 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter before Levaon. , The count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter after Levaon is updated to 511 (= 514-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (514 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 522 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is added. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (8) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 272 ( = 280-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Levaon (511 in this example), and the count value of the total acquired number display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 522 (= 511 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 522, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "TOTAL 522 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

The slot machine according to this example is configured to display a predetermined number of medals when a winning combination with one or more medals paid out is won in the AT2 state, but in the game R221 of this example, the total number of medals is acquired. Since the number of medals has reached the predetermined number (500), the production state is AT2, and the winning combination with the payout of 11 medals has been won, the count value of the total number of acquired number display counter (in this example). Based on 500), the predetermined number acquisition display is determined, and the predetermined number acquisition display TG (this example) suggesting that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. (Display including the character string of "500 sheets exceeded") is performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is the first predetermined value (456 in this example) and the second predetermined value (500 in this example). After shifting from the first game period (AT1 state in this example) to the second game period (AT2 state in this example) while both of the predetermined values of) have been reached, the second game In the period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 sheets have been reached) and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500). Only one of the display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display TG indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500, which is shown in FIG. 146) can be displayed.

According to the slot machine according to this example, from the first game period to the second game period in a state where the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. After shifting to, in the second game period, only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed, so that the predetermined number acquisition display is excessive. By not doing this, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being overwhelmed, and it is possible to prevent the misidentification of the predetermined number acquisition display.

<Specific example 5 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a specific example 5 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

In this example, in a game table set to a certain set value of setting 4 or more, when the effect state shifts in the order of AT1 state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, the difference number is the first in the AT2 state. This is an example in which the second predetermined number of sheets (500 in this example) is reached after reaching the predetermined number of sheets (456 in this example).

<Specific example 5 / AT2 state (game R238)>
The game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquired) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

After the rebaon of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 300, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 450. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 450 sheets") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, after receiving the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is obtained. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (-3) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) when the main control unit 300 accepts the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining after the Levaon. The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (= 300- (-3))), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Levaon (450 in this example). Then, the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter after Levaon is updated to 447 (= 450-3).

Next, since the game is completed in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (450 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 458 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is added. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (8) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (447 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 458 (= 447 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter) at the end of the game is 458, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 458 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (456 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, it is based on the count value (456 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter. , The predetermined number acquisition display is determined by the lottery, and since the lottery is won, the first predetermined number acquisition suggesting that the number of acquired medals reaches 456 and the set value is set to 4 or more. The display TG1 (in this example, the display including the character string of "over 456 sheets") is performed.

In this example, when the total number of acquired sheets reaches a predetermined number (456 sheets), a display suggesting that the set value is set to 4 or more is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the case where the total number of acquired sheets reaches 555 or 666, the display suggesting the setting 5 or setting 6 may be performed, and the same as when the total number of acquired sheets reaches 246. A display suggesting that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6) may be displayed, or the set value is an odd number (setting 1) as in the case where the total number of acquired cards reaches 135. , Setting 3, or setting 5) may be displayed.

<Specific example 5 / AT2 state (game R227)>
The game R227 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 227, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquired) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R227, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 252, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "252 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 498. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, after accepting the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number counter indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon is performed. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (48 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (45 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (45) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (300) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 255 (= 300-45)), and the input number-of-sheet information (3) is subtracted from the count value (498 in this example) of the total number of acquired number-of-sheet display counter before Levaon. The count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter is updated to 495 (= 498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R227, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (498 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (45 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (56 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (56) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 244 ( = 300-56), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Levaon (495 in this example), and the count value of the total acquired number display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 506 (= 495 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 500, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images containing the characters "TOTAL 500 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R227 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, it is based on the count value (500 in this example) of the total number of acquired sheets display counter. , The second predetermined number acquisition display TG2 (in this example, which determines the predetermined number acquisition display and suggests that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value). Display including the character string of "500 sheets exceeded") is performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in the second game period (AT2 state in this example), the first count value (count value of the difference number counter in this example) is the second predetermined value (in this example). , 500), and when the first count value reaches the first predetermined value (456 in this example), the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, FIG. 147) is shown. The first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) suggesting that 456 sheets have been reached is configured to be displayable, and in the second game period (AT2 state in this example), the first count value (this) In the example, the count value of the difference number counter has reached the first predetermined value (456 in this example) and the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, 456 shown in FIG. 147) has been reached. After the first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) suggesting is displayed and the first count value reaches the second predetermined value (500 in this example), the second predetermined number is acquired. The display (in this example, the second predetermined number acquisition display TG2 indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500, which is shown in FIG. 147) can be displayed.

Further, at least one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the first predetermined number suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 456 shown in FIG. 147). The acquisition display TG1) is a display as a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value (in this example, a display suggesting that the set value is set 4 or more).

According to the slot machine according to this example, in addition to the number of acquired game media, information on the set value can be obtained, so that the player's interest and convenience can be further enhanced.

<Specific example 6 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 148 (a) is a diagram showing a specific example 6 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

In this example, when the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, the second difference is reached after the difference number reaches the first predetermined number (456 in this example) in the AT1 state. This is an example of shifting to the AT2 state when the predetermined number of sheets (500 in this example) has been reached.

<Specific example 6 / AT1 state (game R265)>
The game R265 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 265 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 25, and a three-card betting game is performed.

At the end of the game of the game R265, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value. ), And when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R265 of this example, the total number of acquired cards has reached a predetermined number (456 cards), but since the effect state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the total number of cards has reached 456. The predetermined number of sheets acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

<Specific example 6 / AT1 state (game R247)>
The game R247 is a game (final game) in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 247 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played.

At the end of the game of the game R247, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value. ), And when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R247 of this example, the total number of acquired medals has reached a predetermined number (500), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of acquired medals is The predetermined number of sheets acquisition display indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500 is not displayed.

<Specific example 6 / AT2 state (game R239)>
The game R239 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 239, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the replay of the game R239, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2). Since the player was internally elected, a small role announcement (in this example, an image containing three letters "R" of Replay (replay)) suggesting an internal winning of the replay role is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 300, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 514. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 514") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (300) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 300 (= 300-0), and the input number-of-sheet information (0) is subtracted from the count value (514 in this example) of the total number of sheets acquired before Levaon, and after Levaon. The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 514 (= 514-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R239, the small role announcement is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2), the number of medals to be paid out (0 in this example) to the number of inserted cards (0 in this example) are not paid out. By adding the value obtained by subtracting (0 in this example) to the counter value of the current difference number counter (514 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 514 in this example, and then the number of input sheets is input. A payout command including at least the information (0) and the payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout number in the game (in this example) is sent to the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example). After adding 0), a command including AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 300 ( = 300-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value (514 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 514 (= 514 + 0).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 514, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 514 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R239 of this example, the total number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (500) and the production state is the AT2 state, but in the slot machine according to this example, one or more medals are paid out in the AT2 state. In the game R239, the predetermined number of medals that suggests that the number of medals that have been won has reached 500 is not displayed because the predetermined number of medals is displayed when a certain winning combination is won. ..

<Specific example 6 / AT2 state (game R238)>
The game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquired) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

After the rebaon of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 300, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 522. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 522") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, after receiving the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), And then a command containing AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquisition number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquisition number counter. A command including the above is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (-3) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) when the main control unit 300 accepts the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining after the Levaon. The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (= 300- (-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value (514 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter before Levaon. , The count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter after Levaon is updated to 511 (= 514-3).

Next, since the game is completed in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (511 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 519 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is added. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (8) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (511 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 522 (= 511 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 522, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "TOTAL 522 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, the total number of acquired cards is based on the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter. , Determines the predetermined number acquisition display and suggests that the predetermined number acquisition display has reached 500 sheets with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value (in this example, the character string of "500 sheets exceeded" is included. Display) is being performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is the first predetermined value (456 in this example) and the second predetermined value (500 in this example). ) From the first game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is the AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the effect state is the AT2 state) when both predetermined values of) have been reached. After shifting to the period), in the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 sheets have been reached) and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example). In this example, one of the display (in this example, the larger value of the predetermined value) is displayed (in this example, FIG. 148 (a)), which indicates that the number of sheets has reached 500. Only the predetermined number acquisition display TG), which indicates that the number of sheets has reached 500, can be displayed.

According to the slot machine according to this example, from the first game period to the second game period in a state where the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. After shifting to, in the second game period, only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed, so that the predetermined number acquisition display is excessive. By not doing this, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being overwhelmed, and it is possible to prevent the misidentification of the predetermined number acquisition display.

In this example, only the display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display having the larger predetermined value is displayed, but the first predetermined number acquisition display is shown. And the display of the second predetermined number acquisition display in which the numerical value of the predetermined value is smaller may be displayed, or only the display selected by the lottery may be displayed.

<Specific example 7 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 148 (b) is a diagram showing a specific example 7 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

This example shows a continuation of the specific example 6 described with reference to FIG. 148 (a), and is a two-card game after performing a predetermined number acquisition display TG suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 in the AT2 state. Is performed, the difference number is less than the first predetermined number (456 in this example), and then the first predetermined number (456 in this example) is reached again. In this example, although the example in which the two-card game is played over the period of the games R237 to R176 is shown, the three-card game may be played in the same period, or the two-card game and the three-card game may be played. You may do both.

<Specific example 7 / AT2 state (game R174)>
The game R174 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 174, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquired) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

At the end of the game of the game R174, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value. ), And when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R174 of this example, the total number of acquired cards has reached the first predetermined number of cards (456 cards), but in the game R238 in the AT2 state, the predetermined number of cards acquired display TG suggesting that the total number of cards has reached 500 once. Since the above is performed, the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 456 is not displayed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter or the count value of the total acquired number display counter) is the first predetermined value (456 in this example) and the second predetermined value. From the first game period (the period in the AT1 state in this example) to the second game period (the period in the AT2 state in this example) when both predetermined values of the values (500 in this example) have been reached. After the transition to, the second predetermined number acquisition display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, 500 sheets has been reached) in the second game period. After only the suggested predetermined number acquisition display TG) is displayed, the first count value falls below the first predetermined value in the second game period, and then the first predetermined value is set again. Even when it arrives, the first predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed.

According to the slot machine according to this example, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being overly agitated by not performing the predetermined number acquisition display excessively. Further, for example, when the player intentionally plays a game of loss after displaying the larger numerical value and displays the smaller numerical value, the larger numerical value is displayed again. There is room for consideration as to whether or not to perform the game. In this case, if the display is performed again, the predetermined number of acquisition display will be excessively performed, and if the display is not performed again, the game will be played. Since there is a risk of giving distrust to a person (a player who has forgotten that the larger number is displayed once), a predetermined number of cards will be obtained even if a game is intentionally lost. By configuring so that the display is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

<Specific example 8 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a specific example 8 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

In this example, when the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, the second difference is reached after the difference number reaches the first predetermined number (500 in this example) in the AT2 state. This is an example of reaching a predetermined number of sheets (555 in this example).

<Specific example 8 / AT2 state (game R238)>
The game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquired) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

After the rebaon of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 300, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 498. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, after receiving the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is obtained. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (-3) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) when the main control unit 300 accepts the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining after the Levaon. The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (= 300- (-3))), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value of the total acquired number display counter before Levaon (450 in this example). Then, the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter after Levaon is updated to 495 (= 498-3).

Next, since the game is completed in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (498 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is added. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (8) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (495 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 506 (= 495 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter. In the game R238 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, the total number of acquired cards is based on the count value (500 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter. , The second predetermined number acquisition display TG2 (in this example, the character "500 sheets exceeded"" that determines the predetermined number acquisition display and suggests that the number of sheets has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. Display including columns) is performed.

<Specific example 8 / AT2 state (game R227)>
The game R227 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 227, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquired) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R227, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquireable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 244, an image showing the acquired number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "remaining 244") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 554. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 554") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, after accepting the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number counter indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon is performed. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (56 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (53 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (53) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (300) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 247 (= 300-53)), and the input number-of-sheet information (3) is subtracted from the count value (554 in this example) of the total number of acquired number-of-sheet display counter before Levaon. The count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter is updated to 551 (= 554-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R227, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (554 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 562 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (53 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (64 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (64) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 236 ( = 300-64), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (551 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 562 (= 551 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter) at the end of the game is 562, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, Display of images containing the characters "TOTAL 562 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter. In the game R227 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (555 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, it is based on the count value (555 in this example) of the total number of acquired sheets display counter. , The predetermined number acquisition display is determined by the lottery, and since the lottery is won, the second predetermined number acquisition suggesting that the number of acquired medals reaches 555 and the set value is set to 5 or more. Display TG2 (in this example, display including the character string "55 sheets exceeded") is performed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in the second game period (the period in which the AT2 state is in this example), the first count value (the count value of the difference number counter in this example) is the second predetermined value (this example). When the first count value reaches the first predetermined value (456 in this example) before reaching 500), the first predetermined number acquisition display (shown in FIG. 147 in this example). The first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 456 is displayable, and the first count value (the period in which the AT2 state is in this example) in the second game period (AT2 state in this example) is displayed. In this example, the count value of the difference number counter has reached the first predetermined value (456 in this example) and the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, 456 as shown in FIG. 147) has been reached. After the suggested first predetermined number acquisition display TG1) is displayed and the first count value reaches the second predetermined value (500 in this example), the second predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. (In this example, the second predetermined number acquisition display TG2 indicating that the number of sheets has reached 500, which is shown in FIG. 147) is configured to be displayable.

Further, at least one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the first predetermined number suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 456 shown in FIG. 147). The acquisition display TG1) is a display as a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value (in this example, a display suggesting that the set value is set 4 or more).

According to the slot machine according to this example, in addition to the number of acquired game media, information on the set value can be obtained, so that the player's interest and convenience can be further enhanced.

<Specific example 9 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a specific example 9 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

In this example, when the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, the second difference is reached after the difference number reaches the first predetermined number (500 in this example) in the AT1 state. This is an example of shifting to the AT2 state when the predetermined number of sheets (555 in this example) has been reached.

<Specific example 9 / AT1 state (game R265)>
The game R265 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 265 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 25, and a three-card betting game is performed.

At the end of the game of the game R265, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value. ), And when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R265 of this example, the total number of acquired cards has reached a predetermined number (500 cards), but since the effect state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the total number of cards has reached 500. The predetermined number of sheets acquisition display suggesting is not performed.

<Specific example 9 / AT1 state (game R247)>
The game R247 is a game (final game) in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 247 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played.

At the end of the game of the game R247, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, and the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value. ), And when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R247 of this example, the total number of medals acquired has reached a predetermined number (555), but since the production state is the AT1 state and not the AT2 state (or LMT state), the number of medals acquired is The predetermined number acquisition display indicating that the number of sheets has reached 555 is not displayed.

<Specific example 9 / AT2 state (game R239)>
The game R239 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 239, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the replay of the game R239, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2). Since the player was internally elected, a small role announcement (in this example, an image containing three letters "R" of Replay (replay)) suggesting an internal winning of the replay role is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 300, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 570. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 570") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (0 in this example) from the acquired number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (300) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 300 (= 300-0), and the input number-of-sheet information (0) is subtracted from the count value (570 in this example) of the total number of sheets acquired before Levaon, and after Levaon. The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 570 (= 570-0).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R239, the small role announcement is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the replay combination 1 (condition device No. 2), the number of medals to be paid out (0 in this example) to the number of inserted cards (0 in this example) are not paid out. By adding the value obtained by subtracting (0 in this example) to the counter value of the current difference number counter (570 in this example), the count value of the difference number counter is updated to 570 in this example, and then the number of sheets to be input. A payout command including at least the information (0) and the payout number information (0) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout number in the game (in this example) is sent to the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example). After adding 0), a command including AT2 acquired number information (0 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (0) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 300 ( = 300-0), and the payout number information (0) is added to the count value (570 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 570 (= 570 + 0).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 570, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 570 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R239 of this example, the total number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (555) and the production state is the AT2 state, but in the slot machine according to this example, one or more medals are paid out in the AT2 state. In the game R239, the predetermined number of medals that suggests that the number of medals that have been won has reached 555 is not displayed because the predetermined number of medals is displayed when a certain winning combination is won. ..

<Specific example 9 / AT2 state (game R238)>
The game R238 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 238, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquired) is 300, and a three-card betting game is performed.

After the rebaon of this game R238, since the effect state is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 300, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "300 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 570. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 570") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, after receiving the Levaon, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (300 in this example) before the Levaon. ), And then a command containing AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (300 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the AT2 acquisition number counter (0 in this example), the AT2 acquisition number information (-3 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquisition number counter. A command including the above is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (-3) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) when the main control unit 300 accepts the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining after the Levaon. The count value of the acquired number display counter is updated to 303 (= 300- (-3)), and the input number information (3) is subtracted from the count value (570 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter before Levaon. , The count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter after Levaon is updated to 567 (= 570-3).

Next, since the game is completed in this game R238, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (570 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 578 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (-3 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (8 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is added. The included command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (8) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (300) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 292 ( = 300-8), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (567 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 578 (= 567 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter) at the end of the game is 578, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 578 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R238 of this example, the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (555 sheets) and the production state is the AT2 state. However, in the slot machine according to this example, if the lottery is won, the total number of acquired cards is acquired. If a predetermined number of sheets is acquired based on the count value of the number of sheets display counter (555 in this example) and the lottery is not won, a certain value other than the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, 555) is displayed. It is configured to display the acquisition of a predetermined number of sheets based on 500).

Therefore, when the lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 150 (a), a predetermined number acquisition display TGa (in this example, "55 sheets exceeded" is included, which suggests that the number of sheets has reached 555. (Display), and if the lottery is not won, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), a predetermined number acquisition display TGb (in this example, "breaking through 500"" suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500 is displayed. Display including character strings).

In the slot machine according to this example, the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) is the first predetermined value (500 in this example) and the second predetermined value (555 in this example). ) From the first game period (in this example, the period in which the effect state is the AT1 state) to the second game period (in this example, the effect state is the AT2 state) when both predetermined values of) have been reached. After shifting to the period), in the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500) and the second predetermined number acquisition display (in this example) In this example, the display (in this example, the one who won the lottery) of one of the predetermined number of sheets (the predetermined number of sheets acquired display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 555) (in this example, shown in FIG. 150 (a)). A predetermined number acquisition display TGa) suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 555 is displayable.

According to the slot machine according to this example, from the first game period to the second game period in a state where the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. After shifting to, in the second game period, only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed, so that the predetermined number acquisition display is excessive. By not doing this, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being overwhelmed, and it is possible to prevent the misidentification of the predetermined number acquisition display.

In this example, an example of displaying the display of the one who won the lottery (or the display of the person who did not win the lottery) of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display is shown. However, only the display of the winner of the lottery between the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display may be displayed. In addition, when both the predetermined value of the first predetermined value and the predetermined value of the second predetermined value are reached in the first game period, the predetermined number of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display is specified. The display having the larger value (or the display having the smaller predetermined value) may be configured to be displayed regardless of the lottery result.

<Specific example 10 of updating and displaying the count value of various counters>
FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b) are diagrams showing a specific example 10 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

The example shown in FIG. 151 (a) is an example in which only a three-card game is played in the AT2 state, and the difference number reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example).

<Specific example 10 / AT2 state (game R221), 3-card game>
The game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 280, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R221, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 272, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 498. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter before Levaon (280 in this example). ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (280) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 275 (= 280-5), and the input number-of-sheet information (3) is subtracted from the count value (498 in this example) of the total number of acquired number-of-sheet display counter before Levaon. The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 495 (= 498-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (498 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 506 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (16) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (495 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 506 (= 495 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R221 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, it is based on the count value (500 in this example) of the total number of acquired sheets display counter. , The predetermined number acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 sheets" is determined to indicate that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. Display including the character string of "breakthrough") is performed.

The slot machine according to this example is in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 151 (a)) is displayed. When the first game (in this example, a three-slot game) is executed and the first result (in this example, the number of payouts of the game medium is different from the number of used 3 is 11). , The number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) and the second count value (in this example, the number of AT2 remaining acquisitions). It is configured so that it can be reflected in both count values of the display counter), and the number of games used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display.

Further, it is the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example), the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 151 (a)) and the second display (in this example, the remaining number display DP). The first game (in this example, the three-card game) is executed in a state where both displays of the total payout number display AP shown in FIG. 151 (a) are displayed, and the first result (in this example, the three-card game) is executed. , When the number of payouts of the game medium is different from 3 which is the number of uses11), the number of uses of the game medium and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first count values (in this example, the difference). (Count value of the number of sheets counter), the second count value (in this example, the AT2 remaining acquired number of sheets display counter) and the third count value (in this example, the count value of the total acquired number of sheets display counter) It is possible to reflect the number of games used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game to be reflected in both the first display and the second display.

<Specific example 10 / AT2 state (game R221), two-card game>
The example shown in FIG. 151 (b) is an example in which a three-card game is performed after a two-card game in the AT2 state, and the difference number reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example).

The game R221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquired) is 280, and a two-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R221, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small winning combination 4 for the two-card game (condition). The operation navigation is not displayed because the device No. 18) was internally won.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 272, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 498. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter (280 in this example) before the Levaon. ), And then a command containing AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, while multiplying by two. Since it is a game, the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the input number information (2) from the count value (498 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter before the rebaon when the main control unit 300 accepts the rebaon. However, while the count value of the total acquired number display counter after Levaon is updated to 496 (= 498-2), the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter is not updated because it is a two-card game. Further, the display of the remaining number display DP including the image showing the remaining number of possible acquisitions in the AT2 state (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is not updated.

Next, since the game was completed in this game R221, the main control unit 300 won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), so that the number of payouts corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (book) In the example, after paying out 11 medals (at the end of the game), the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted cards (2 in this example) from the number of cards paid out (11 in this example) (9 in this example) is the current difference number. By adding to the counter value of the counter (498 in this example), after updating the count value of the difference number counter to 507 in this example, at least the input number information (2) and the payout number information (11) are included. While the payout command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter is not updated because it is a two-card game.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 adds the payout number information (11) to the count value (496 in this example) of the total acquired number display counter after the game ends at the end of the game, and displays the total acquired number at the end of the game. While the count value of the counter is updated to 507 (= 496 + 11), the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter is not updated because it is a two-card game, and the remaining acquisition number in the AT2 state ( The display of the remaining number display DP including the image showing the AT2 remaining number acquired number display counter count value) is also not updated.

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter) at the end of the game is 507, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "TOTAL 507") is being executed.

<Specific example 10 / AT2 state (game R220), 3-card game>
The game R220 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 220, the planned number of medals acquired in the AT2 state (the planned number of AT2 acquisitions) is 280, and a three-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state is the AT2 state after the rebaon of the game R220, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small combination 4 (condition device No. 8) is used. Since the player has won the internal prize, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed.

Further, since the remaining number of acquisitionable sheets (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) in the AT2 state at the time of Levaon is 272, an image showing the acquisitionable number (count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is displayed. Since the remaining number display DP including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "272 remaining") is executed and the total number of payouts (count value of the total acquired number display counter) at the time of Levaon is 507. , The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 507") including the image showing the count value of the total acquired number display counter is executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 performs an AT2 planned acquisition number addition lottery after receiving the Levaon, and sets the lottery result (0 in this example) of the lottery to the AT2 planned acquisition number counter before Levaon (280 in this example). ), Then a command including the AT2 planned acquisition number information indicating the count value (280 in this example) of the updated AT2 planned acquisition number counter is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 before Levaon. After subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the acquired number counter (8 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (5 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquisition number information (5) from the AT2 planned acquisition number information (280) when the main control unit 300 receives the Levaon, and the AT2 remaining acquisition after the Levaon is acquired. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter is updated to 275 (= 280-5), and the input number-of-sheet information (3) is subtracted from the count value (507 in this example) of the total number of acquired number-of-sheet display counter before Levaon. The count value of the total acquired number display counter is updated to 504 (= 507-3).

Next, since the game has ended in this game R220, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (507 in this example) of the current difference number counter. After updating the count value of the difference number counter to 515 in this example, a payout command including at least the input number information (3) and the payout number information (11) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and AT2 After adding the payout number (11 in this example) to the acquired number counter (5 in this example), the AT2 acquired number information (16 in this example) indicating the count value of the updated AT acquired number counter is included. However, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 subtracts the AT2 acquired number information (16) from the AT2 planned acquired number information (280) at the end of the game, and sets the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter at the end of the game to 264 ( = 280-16), and the payout number information (11) is added to the count value (504 in this example) of the total number of acquisitions display counter after Levaon, and the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter at the end of the game. Is updated to 515 (= 504 + 11).

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter) at the end of the game is 515, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "TOTAL 515 sheets") is being executed.

At the end of the game, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table, the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter reaches a certain value), and When the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number of acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

In the game R220 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, it is based on the count value (500 in this example) of the total number of acquired sheets display counter. , The predetermined number acquisition display TG (in this example, "500 sheets" is determined to indicate that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. Display including the character string of "breakthrough") is performed.

The slot machine according to this example is in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 151 (b)) is displayed. When the second game (in this example, the two-slot game) is executed and the second result (in this example, the number of payouts of the game medium is different from 3 which is the number used 11) is obtained. , The number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are the first count value (in this example, the count value of the difference number counter) and the second count value (in this example, the number of AT2 remaining acquisitions). It is configured so that it can be reflected only in the first count value of the display counter), and the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. There is.

According to the slot machine according to this example, the number of games used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, which is more disadvantageous than the first game. It is possible to notify the player that the second game has been executed in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, even when the second game is executed, the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game medium are reflected in the first count value, so that the player who is executing the first game and the second game It may be possible to ensure the fairness of the player playing the game. Further, even if the game medium is increased in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the advantageous state of the first advantageous game does not progress), the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like can be reduced.

Further, it is the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example), the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 151 (b)) and the second display (in this example, the remaining number display DP). The second game (in this example, the two-card game) is executed in a state where both displays of the total payout number display AP shown in FIG. 151 (b) are displayed, and the second result (in this example, the two-card game) is executed. , When the number of payouts of the game medium is different from 3 which is the number of uses11), the number of uses of the game medium and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first count values (in this example, the difference). The first of the count value of the number counter), the second count value (in this example, the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter), and the third count value (in this example, the count value of the total acquired number display counter). The number of games used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the count value and the third count value. It is configured so that it can be reflected.

According to the slot machine according to this example, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display, so that the player directly By updating the second display related to profits, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

FIG. 151 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition of the three-card game described with reference to FIG. 151 (a), and FIG. 151 (d) is described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition of a two-card game.

When a three-card game is played in the game Rn, as shown in FIG. 151 (c), at the end of the game of the game Rn (at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T1 in FIG. 151 (c)), the first display is displayed. Update both the (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP).

On the other hand, when a two-card game is played in the game Rn, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), in the game Rn, the special screen SP is displayed at both the start and the end of the game and the first Neither the display (remaining number display DP) nor the second display (total payout number display AP) is displayed, and after the game of the game Rn is completed, when the BET operation of the next game Rn + 1 is accepted (FIG. 151 (d)). (At the timing indicated by the reference numeral T2), the display of both the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP) is updated.

That is, in the slot machine according to this example, in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example), the first display (remaining number display DP) and the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second in the three-card game and the two-card game. The timing to update the display of the second display (total payout number display AP) is different.

FIG. 152 (a) is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions when a two-card game is performed after the three-card game described with reference to FIG. 151 (a) and then the three-card game is performed again. ..

When a two-card game is played in the game Rm after a three-card game is played in the game Rn, a freeze effect FG may be executed in the game Rm as shown in FIG. 152 (a). After that, when the three-card game is played again, the first display (remaining number display DP) is the difference number MP including the image showing the count value of the difference number counter (in this example, "LAST 2240 /". Display of an image containing the characters "2400") may change.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 125, in the high navigation state common processing A, when the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), or the difference number counter. When the value of is equal to or greater than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example), the freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set, and the freeze information is set. In this case, for example, the freeze effect FG shown in FIG. 152 (a) is executed.

That is, the slot machine according to this example is in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 152 (a)). When the second game (in this example, the two-slot game) is executed in the state of being played, and then the first game (in this example, the three-slot game) is executed, the first game is executed. The display is not displayed, and the third display (in this example, the difference number display MP shown in FIG. 152A) can be displayed.

According to the slot machine according to this example, when the first game is executed after the second game, the first display can be displayed without displaying the first display, so that the first game can be displayed. It may be possible to make the player aware that he or she was performing a second game that is more disadvantageous.

FIG. 152 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition of the two-card game described with reference to FIG. 151 (d).

When a two-card game is played in the game Rn, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), in the game Rn, the special screen SP is displayed at both the start and the end of the game and the first display ( If neither the remaining number display DP) nor the second display (total payout number display AP) is displayed, and then the three-card game is played again, the first BET operation of the game Rm is accepted. After updating both the display of the first display (remaining number display DP) and the second display (total payout number display AP), the freeze effect FG is executed, and the first display (remaining number display DP) is the difference number. It may change to the difference number MP including the image showing the count value of the counter (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 2240/2400").

That is, the slot machine according to this example is in the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and displays the first display (in this example, the remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 152B). When the second game (in this example, the two-slot game) is executed in the state of being played, and then the first game (in this example, the three-slot game) is executed, the first game is executed. The display is not displayed, and the third display (in this example, the difference number display MP shown in FIG. 152 (b)) can be displayed.

According to the slot machine according to this example, when the first game is executed after the second game, the first display can be displayed without displaying the first display, so that the first game can be displayed. It may be possible to make the player aware that he or she was performing a second game that is more disadvantageous.

<Example 1 of updating the count value of various counters and modifying the display>
FIGS. 152 (c) and 152 (d) are diagrams showing a modified example 1 of updating and displaying the count values of various counters.

The example shown in FIG. 152 (c) is an example in which a button effect is performed after the third stop in a certain game in the AT2 state, and when the operation of the effect operation means is accepted, the additional effect is performed.

In this example, in a certain game in the AT2 state, a chance effect CG (in this example, a display "!-!-!" Suggesting a possibility (chance) that a favorable profit is given to the player is displayed at the time of lever-on. ) Is displayed, and when the third stop is accepted (at the end of the game), the button effect BG (in this example, the appearance of the button) that prompts the operation of the effect operation means (in this example, the effect button (not shown)) is displayed. A display consisting of a model image, the characters "Press!", And an image of a downward arrow) is performed. Then, when the operation of the production operation means (effect button) is accepted, the additional production UG for AT2 (in this example, the character "+30" suggesting that the planned number of AT2 acquisitions has increased by 30 is displayed. Display of images including) is performed.

That is, in the slot machine according to this example, after all the reels of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means (in this example, the stop buttons 137 to 139), the effect operation is performed. A certain effect (in this example, the button effect BG shown in FIG. 152 (c)) can be started to be executed based on the operation of the means (in this example, the effect button).

The example shown in FIG. 152 (d) is an example in which the button effect described with reference to FIG. 152 (c) is performed after the predetermined number acquisition display is started in a certain game in the AT2 state.

In this example, in a certain game in the AT2 state, a chance effect CG (in this example, a display "!-!-!" Suggesting a possibility (chance) that a favorable profit is given to the player is displayed at the time of lever-on. ) Is displayed, and when the third stop is accepted (at the end of the game), a predetermined number acquisition display TG (in this example, "breaking through 500") suggesting that the number of acquired medals has reached 500. (Display including the character string of) and button effect BG (in this example, an image that imitates the appearance of the button) that prompts the operation of the effect operation means (in this example, the effect button (not shown)) and the characters "press!" And the image of the downward arrow, and the display). Further, in this example, at least a part of the predetermined number acquisition display TG overlaps with at least a part of the button effect BG, but the predetermined number acquisition display TG is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds). It will be erased and all of the button effects will be visible.

That is, in the slot machine according to this example, after all the reels of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means (in this example, the stop buttons 137 to 139), the effect operation is performed. Before the means (in this example, the effect button) is operated, the predetermined number acquisition display (in this example, the predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 152 (d)) can be started to be displayed. After all the reels of the plurality of reels are stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means, a certain effect is obtained based on the operation of the effect operation means (in this example, FIG. The button effect BG) shown in d) is configured to be able to start execution.

According to the slot machine according to this example, it becomes easy for the player to recognize both a certain effect and the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display, and it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the certain effect and the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display.

It should be noted that the additional effect UG may be executed when the effect operation means (effect button) is not operated and the input operation or the lever is turned on, or conversely, the effect may not be executed. Further, in the case of being configured to be executed, the display timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 152 (d) and the addition effect UG may overlap. Further, when the effect operation means (effect button) is operated in FIG. 152 (d), the predetermined number acquisition display TG and the additional effect UG overlap each other, but when the input operation or the lever is turned on, the predetermined number acquisition display TG Since the display of is disappeared, it does not overlap with the display of the additional effect UG.

<Example 2 of updating the count value of various counters and modifying the display>
FIGS. 153 (a) and 153 (b) are diagrams showing update of count values of various counters and modification 2 of display.

In the fourth embodiment, the AT2 state is set to the AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the difference number of game media (AT state in which the difference number is managed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and is the same as the AT1 state. In addition, the AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the number of games (AT state in which the number of games is managed) may be set, and may be combined with each of the effect states described in the first to third embodiments.

FIG. 153 (a) shows an example in which a three-card game is played in the game R222 and the game R221.

<Modification 2 / AT2 state (game R222)>
The game 222 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 222 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state of the game R222 is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small winning combination 4 (conditional device) is triggered by the reception of the Levaon. Since the player won No. 8) internally, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed. Further, since the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is 2, the remaining game display RG including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, " Display of an image containing the characters "LAST 2G") is being executed.

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter) at the time of lever-on is 490, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, " Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 490 sheets") is being executed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R222, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (490 in this example) of the current difference number counter. , The count value of the difference number counter is updated to 498 in this example.

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter) at the end of the game is 498, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquired sheets display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 498 sheets") is being executed.

<Modification 2 / AT2 state (game R221)>
The game 221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a three-card betting game is played.

Since the effect state of the game R221 is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, and the small winning combination 4 (conditional device) is triggered by the reception of the Levaon. Since the player won No. 8) internally, the operation navigation corresponding to the AT2 state (in this example, the operation "2-1-3" for notifying the correct operation order of the small winning combination 4) is being executed. Further, since the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is 1, the remaining game display RG including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, " Display of an image containing the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the time of Levaon is 498, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, " Display of images containing the characters "TOTAL 498 sheets") is being executed.

Next, since the game has ended in this game R221, the operation navigation is deleted. Further, since the main control unit 300 has won the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8), the main control unit 300 pays out the number of medals to be paid out (11 in this example) corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (at the end of the game). ), The value obtained by subtracting the input number (3 in this example) from the payout number (11 in this example) (8 in this example) is added to the counter value (498 in this example) of the current difference number counter. , The count value of the difference number counter is updated to 506 in this example.

Further, since the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter) at the end of the game is 506, the total number of payouts display AP including an image showing the count value of the total number of acquisitions display counter (in this example, Display of images including the characters "TOTAL 506 sheets") is being executed.

Further, in the game R221 of this example, since the total number of acquired cards reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, the total number of acquired cards is set to the count value of the display counter (500 in this example). Based on this, the predetermined number acquisition display is determined, and the predetermined number acquisition display TG suggesting that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value (in this example, "" Display including the character string of "over 500 sheets") is performed.

FIG. 153 (b) shows an example in which a three-card game is played in the game R222, a two-card game is played in the game R221, and then a three-card game is played in the game R220. Since the three-card game of the game R222 and the game R220 is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 153 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification 2 / AT2 state (game R221)>
The game 221 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 221 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a two-card betting game is performed.

Since the effect state of the game R221 is the AT2 state, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state when the Levaon is accepted, and the game R221 is used for a two-card game. The operation navigation is not displayed because the small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 18) was internally won.

Further, since the main control unit 300 is a two-card game after receiving the Levaon, the count value of the effect state counter is not updated, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter). ) Is not updated, but the total number of payouts (count value of the total number of acquired number display counter) is 498, so the image showing the count value of the total number of acquired number display counter is included. The total payout number display AP (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "TOTAL 498") is executed.

<Invention 4-1 of the present application>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 4-1”) is shown in the operating means (for example, FIG. 108). Any of a plurality of states including a stop button 137 to 139) and a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)). A control means for shifting to the above state (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 110) and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 108) are provided. In the game table, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 115, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 143 (b), etc. Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the above) can be notified, and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information. A first counter (for example, FIG. 154 or FIG. 143 (a)) that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state The difference number counter shown) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIGS. 154 and 143 (a)) is provided. ) Is updatable, and when the advantageous state end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state ends the normal state, and the advantageous state end condition is the first count value. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first value is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and in the advantageous state, among a plurality of advantageous game states One of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state. A second counter (eg, FIG. 154 and FIG. 143) that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in (including those based on the number of used and paid out). The AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter shown in a) and the like is provided, and the second count value of the second counter (for example, FIGS. 154 and 14) is provided every time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter shown in 3 (a) and the like) can be updated, and the first advantageous gaming state ends when the first advantageous gaming state end condition is satisfied. The first advantageous game state end condition is such that when the second count value reaches the second value (for example, the number of game media paid out after the transition to the AT2 state) It is a condition that can be satisfied when the planned number of AT2 acquisitions is reached), and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, FIG. 154) indicating a value related to the second count value. The remaining number display DP shown in FIG. 143 (b) and the like, the first game (for example, a three-card game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3), and the game medium. A second game (for example, a two-card game) in which the bet number is a second number (for example, 2) is playable, and the second number is different from the first number. It is a number, and in the first advantageous game state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per hour is larger, per hour. The amount of profit is large, the net increase in the number of cards per game is large, it is easy to shift from the normal state to the advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, etc.), and the execution result of the first game is the first. It is configured so that the execution result of the second game may be the second result, and the first result is the payout of the game medium. The result is that the number is different from the first number (for example, 11), and the second result is that the number of payouts of the game medium is different from the second number (for example, 11). The result is that the first advantageous gaming state is displayed and the first display is displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 154 (A) and the state shown in the game R221 of FIG. 151 (a). ) When the first game is executed and the first result is obtained, the number of games used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first count value and the number of payouts. The number of uses (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in both of the count values of the second count value, and can be reflected in the first display. When the second game is executed and the second result is obtained in the state where the first advantageous game state is displayed and the first display is displayed, the second game is performed. Number of game media used for execution of Or the number of payouts) and the number of payouts can be reflected only in the first count value of the first count value and the second count value, and the game medium relating to the execution of the second game. It is a game table characterized in that the number of uses (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts are not reflected in the first display. Note that FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 4-1.

According to the game console according to the invention 4-1 of the present application, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, so that the game is more than the first game. It is possible to notify the player that the second disadvantageous game has been performed in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, even when the second game is executed, the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game medium are reflected in the first count value, so that the player who is executing the first game and the second game It may be possible to ensure the fairness of the player playing the game. Further, even if the game medium is increased in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the advantageous state of the first advantageous game does not progress), the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like can be reduced.

The game console according to the invention 4-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "second counter" according to the present invention is "a counter that counts the total number of gaming media acquired by the player based on at least the number of payouts of the gaming media in the first advantageous gaming state. , And also includes "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of payouts in the first advantageous gaming state". Further, the "first display" according to the present invention may be a display indicating a value related to the second count value, may be a value indicating the second count value itself, or may be a second count value. It may be a value calculated by the calculation of and other values.

In addition, a third counter (for example, the total shown in FIGS. 154 and 143 (a)) that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in a certain game period. The acquisition number display counter) is provided, and the certain game period is a period including at least the game period in the first advantageous game state, and each time one game is played in the certain game period, the third The third count value of the counter (for example, the count value of the total acquired number display counter shown in FIGS. 154 and 143 (a)) can be updated, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed. Is a second display (for example, the total payout number display AP shown in FIGS. 154 and 143 (b)) indicating a value related to the third count value, and is the first advantageous gaming state. The first display is displayed in a state in which both the first display and the second display are displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 154 (A) and the state shown in the game R221 in FIG. 151 (a)). When the game is executed and the first result is obtained, the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the first game are the first count value, the second count value, and the third. It can be reflected in all the count values of the count value, and the number of used and paid out game media related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in both the first display and the second display. The state shown in FIG. 154 (B) and the state in which both the first display and the second display are displayed in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 154 (B)). When the second game is executed in the state shown in the game R221 of 151 (a) and the second result is obtained, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are the first. A game that can be reflected in the first count value and the third count value of the one count value, the second count value, and the third count value, and is related to the execution of the second game. The number of media used and the number of payouts may not be reflected in the first display, but may be reflected in the second display.

With such a configuration, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display, which is a direct benefit of the player. By updating the second display related to, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display (for example, the difference number display MP shown in FIG. 152 (a) or the like) indicating a value related to the first count value, and the first display. The display mode of the third display and the display mode of the second display are different display modes, and the second game is performed in the state where the first advantageous game state is displayed and the first display is displayed. When the first game is executed after that, the third display may be displayable without displaying the first display.

With such a configuration, when the first game is executed after the second game, the first display is not displayed and the third display can be displayed, so that the first game is more than the first game. It may be possible to make the player aware that he or she was performing a second disadvantageous game.

Further, it is configured so that the execution of the second game in the first advantageous game state does not end the first advantageous game state based on the establishment of the first advantageous game state end condition. Even if it is configured so that the execution of the second game in the first advantageous game state may end the first advantageous game state based on the establishment of the advantageous state end condition. Good.

With such a configuration, the execution of the first game may not end the first advantageous game state, while the execution of the second game may end the first advantageous game state. In some cases, the fairness of the player performing the first game and the player performing the second game can be ensured.

<Invention 4-2 of the present application>
As described above, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 4-2”) is a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A first game (for example, 3) in which the game table is provided with means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 108) and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3). A second number (for example, 2) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, 2) can be executed, and the second number is , The number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per hour is larger, per hour. The amount of profit is large, the net increase in the number of cards per game is large, it is easy to shift from the normal state to the advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, etc.), and at least the number of game media paid out in a certain game period. A first counter (for example, a total acquired number display counter shown in FIGS. 155 and 143 (a)) for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player is provided based on the above-mentioned certain game period. The first count value of the first counter (for example, the count value of the total acquired number display counter shown in FIGS. 155 and 143 (a)) can be updated every time one game is played. When the first count value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 500), the display means can display a predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIGS. 155 and 144). This is a means, and when the first count value reaches the predetermined value by executing the first game in the certain game period, the predetermined number of acquisition display is based on the execution of the first game. Is displayable (see, for example, game R221 in FIG. 155 (A) and FIG. 151 (a)), and the first count value is calculated by executing the second game during the certain game period. Is configured so that the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game even when the predetermined value is reached (for example, FIGS. 155 (B) and 151 (for example)). b) Game R211)), which is a game table. Note that FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 4-2.

According to the game console according to the invention 4-2 of the present application, even when the first count value reaches a predetermined value by executing the second game in a certain game period, the execution of the second game is performed. Since the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display is not displayed based on the above, it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like. In addition, since the first count value is updated even when the second game is executed, the fairness between the player who is executing the first game and the player who is executing the second game is fair. May be able to be secured.

The game console according to the invention 4-2 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 108), the normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)), and the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 113 (b)) are shown. A control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 110) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a high navigation state) is provided, and operation information of the operation means (for example, FIG. 115). Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel, such as the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown and the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 143 (b) and the like. ) Can be notified, and the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and is based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. A second counter (for example, a difference number counter shown in FIGS. 155 and 143 (a)) for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state. When the second count value of the second counter (for example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIGS. 155 and 143 (a)) can be updated and the advantageous state end condition is satisfied. In addition, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the advantageous state end condition is when the second count value reaches the first value (for example, shifts to the advantageous state). It is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games from is reached the upper limit), and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any of a plurality of advantageous game states, and the plurality of advantageous game states are configured. One of the advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state, and the third counter related to the management of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 remaining acquisition shown in FIGS. 155 and 143 (a) and the like). A number display counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the first advantageous game state, the third count value of the third counter (for example, AT2 remaining acquisition shown in FIGS. 155 and 143 (a) and the like) is obtained. The count value of the number-of-sheet display counter) can be updated, and when the first advantageous game state end condition is satisfied, the first advantageous game state ends. The advantageous game state end condition of is when the third count value reaches the second value (for example, when the number of game media paid out after the transition to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 planned acquisition number). Naru It is a standable condition, and one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display (for example, the remaining number of sheets shown in FIGS. 155 and 143 (b)) indicating the value related to the third count value. The first game (for example, a three-card game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3) and the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, display DP). The second game (for example, a two-card game) which is 2) is configured to be feasible, and the second number is different from the first number, and the first advantageous game In the state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per hour is large, the amount of profit per hour is large, and the game is per game. There are many net increases, it is easy to shift from the normal state to the advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, etc.), and the execution result of the first game may be the first result. The execution result of the second game may be the second result, and the first result is different from the first number in the number of payouts of the game medium. The result is a number (for example, 11), and the second result is a result that the number of payouts of the game medium is different from the number (for example, 11), which is the first advantage. The first game is executed in a game state in which the first display is displayed (for example, a state shown in FIG. 154 (A) or a state shown in game R221 of FIG. 151 (a)). When the first result is obtained, the number of games used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the counts of both the second count value and the third count value. The value can be reflected, and the number of games used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display, and the first advantageous game can be reflected. The second game is executed in a state in which the first display is displayed (for example, a state shown in FIG. 154 (A) or a state shown in game R221 of FIG. 151 (a)). When the second result is obtained, the number of games used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are the second of the second count value and the third count value. It may be configured so that it can be reflected only in the second count value, and the number of games used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display. ..

With such a configuration, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, so that the second game is more disadvantageous than the first game. It is possible to notify the player that the game has been executed in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, even when the second game is executed, the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game medium are reflected in the first count value, so that the player who is executing the first game and the second game It may be possible to ensure the fairness of the player playing the game. Further, even if the game medium is increased in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts are not reflected in the second count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the advantageous state of the first advantageous game does not progress), the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like can be reduced.

Further, the third counter may be a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of payouts of the game media in the first advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, the fairness of the player performing the first game and the player performing the second game may be ensured.

Further, it is configured so that a certain winning combination (for example, small winning combination 4 (condition device No. 8)) can be won by executing the first game, and the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the certain winning combination is In a certain number (for example, 11) of 1 or more, and in a certain state in which the first count value reaches the predetermined value by the execution of the second game during the certain game period. When the winning combination is not won by the execution of the first game, the predetermined number reaching display is not displayed, and the execution of the second game during the certain game period In a certain state in which the first count value has reached the predetermined value, when the certain combination is won by the execution of the first game, the predetermined number of arrival display can be displayed. (See, for example, game R211 in FIGS. 145 and 146).

With such a configuration, the display is performed in a state preferable for the player, so that the player may feel a sense of accomplishment. In addition, when the production is performed by winning a prize, it is possible to further excite the game by the synergistic effect with the winning production.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display (for example, the total payout number display AP shown in FIGS. 155 and 143 (b)) indicating the value related to the first count value. The first game is executed in the state where both the first display and the second display are displayed in the first advantageous game state, which is the first result. In this case, the number of games used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in all the count values of the first count value, the second count value, and the third count value. In addition, the number of used and paid out game media related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in both the first display and the second display, and the first advantageous game state. When the second game is executed in a state where both the first display and the second display are displayed and the second result is obtained, the second game The number of games used and the number of payouts related to the execution can be reflected in the first count value, the second count value, and the first count value and the second count value of the third count value. However, the number of games used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but may be reflected in the second display.

With such a configuration, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, but can be reflected in the second display, which is a direct benefit of the player. By updating the second display related to, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

<Invention 4-3 of the present application>
As described above, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 4-3”) is a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A game table provided with means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 108), and the game medium acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in a certain game period. A first counter for counting the total number (for example, a difference number counter shown in FIGS. 156 and 143 (a)) is provided, and the first counter of the first counter is provided every time one game is played in the certain game period. (For example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIGS. 156 and 143 (a)) can be updated, and the display means has a predetermined value (for example, the first count value). When the number reaches 500), it is a means capable of displaying a predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIGS. 156 and 144), and the certain game period is the first game period (for example, For example, it is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods including a period in which the effect state is the AT1 state and a second game period (for example, a period in which the effect state is the AT2 state), and the first game. It is configured so that the period can be shifted to the second game period, and the first count value falls below the predetermined value after the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period. After that, even when the first count value reaches the predetermined value again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed (for example, FIG. 156 (A) and FIG. 148 (for example). b) Game R174), the second game from the first game period in a state where the first count value is less than the predetermined value after the first count value reaches the predetermined value. When the period shifts to the period and the first count value reaches the predetermined value in the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed (for example, FIG. 156 (B), (See game R221 in FIG. 144), which is a game table. Note that FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 4-3.

According to the game table according to the invention 4-3 of the present application, after the first count value reaches a predetermined value in the second game period, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value. Even when the count value reaches the predetermined value again, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed, so that it is possible to reduce the feeling that the game medium has not increased in the same game period. Further, in a state where the first count value is lower than the predetermined value, the first game period shifts to the second game period, and the first count value becomes the predetermined value in the second game period. Since the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display can be displayed when the number of sheets is reached, the player's interest may be enhanced by the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display.

When straddling the gaming state (and a player who can detect that the transition has occurred), there are many people who have a sense of expectation for the new advantageous gaming state and think separately from the advantageous gaming state before the transition. Therefore, by displaying the arrival of a predetermined number of sheets to such a player, it is possible to appropriately incite a new advantageous gaming state, and by notifying the reference number of sheets, in a new gaming state. It may be easy to grasp the increased number of sheets.

The game console according to the present invention 4-3 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first counter" according to the present invention may be "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in a certain game period". It also includes "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and paid out in a certain game period".

Further, after the first count value reaches the predetermined value, the first count value falls below the predetermined value, and then the first count value reaches the predetermined value again. When shifting from one game period to the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed only by shifting to the second game period, and the game is executed in the second game period. Based on this, the predetermined number acquisition display may be configured to be displayable (see, for example, FIG. 156 (C) and game R221 of FIG. 145).

With such a configuration, since the predetermined number acquisition display is displayed based on the execution of the game in the second game period, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the predetermined number acquisition display.

Further, the expected value of the increase in the number of game media per game in the second game period is higher than the expected value of the increase in the number of game media per game in the first game period (for example, the net increase in the number of games media per game). May be configured higher.

With such a configuration, since the predetermined number of acquisitions is displayed during the game period in which the expected value of the increased number of game media is higher, the player's willingness to play is maintained until the next predetermined number of acquisitions is displayed. You may be able to.

Further, in a certain effect (for example, the additional effect UG shown in FIGS. 156 (A), 143 (b), 152 (c), and (d), and the additional effect UG shown in FIG. 152 (c) and FIG. The button effect BG) shown is executable, and the execution frequency of the certain effect in the first game period is higher than the execution frequency of the certain effect in the second game period. The certain effect may be an effect related to the profit of the second game period.

With such a configuration, the expectation for the second game period can be increased even in the first game period, and the player's willingness to play is maintained from the first game period to the second game period. You may be able to do it.

The "effect related to the profit of the second game period" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT2 addition effect and the button effect. For example, the number of games of the normal game number management AT and the navigation number management AT (push order bell). It also includes the number of navigations of AT), which is managed by how many times the navigation is performed, and the production of AT2 mode up (the probability of addition is high when the mode is good, the number of additions is large, and the combination of both).

Further, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 108) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and rotationally driven, and a plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the plurality of reels. (For example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 108) and the effect operating means (for example, the effect button (not shown) and the bet button 130 shown in FIG. 108) are provided, and by operating the plurality of stop operation means. After all the reels of the plurality of reels are stopped and before the effect operation means is operated, the predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the predetermined number acquisition shown in FIG. 152 (d)) is acquired. The display TG) is configured so that the display can be started, and the effect operation means is operated after all the reels of the plurality of reels have been stopped by the operation of the plurality of stop operation means. Based on the above, the certain effect (for example, the button effect BG shown in FIGS. 152 (c) and 152 (d)) may be configured so that the execution can be started.

With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to recognize both a certain effect and the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display, and it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the certain effect and the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display.

It should be noted that the certain effect may be configured to be able to start execution based on the operation of the operation means other than the effect operation means (for example, the bet button 130 and the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 108). It may be configured not to execute the certain effect based on the operation of the operation means other than the effect operation means.

Further, a plurality of types of freeze effects (for example, the freeze effect FG shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b)) can be executed, and one of the plurality of types of freeze effects is a freeze effect. 1. The first freeze effect (for example, the effect of locking the reels 110 to 112) performed at the first timing in one game (for example, the timing of accepting Levaon), and among the plurality of types of freeze effects. One freeze effect is performed at a second timing (for example, a timing at which any of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation is accepted) different from the first timing in one game. This is the second freeze effect (for example, the effect of darkening the screen, the additional effect, the effect at the start of the ED effect, etc.), and in the execution of the game in which the first freeze effect is performed during the second game period. Based on this, the predetermined number of arrival display may be displayed, and the predetermined number of arrival display may be displayed based on the execution of the game in which the second freeze effect is performed in the second game period. May be configured so that is not displayed.

With such a configuration, the freeze effect, which is generally highly expected, can be executed with priority, and the predetermined number of acquisition display can be displayed as much as possible so as not to give the player a sense of distrust. be able to.

<Invention 4-4 of the present application>
As described above, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 4-4”) is a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A game table provided with means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 108), and the game medium acquired by the player based on at least the number of payouts of the game medium in a certain game period. A first counter for counting the total number (for example, a difference number counter shown in FIGS. 157 and 143 (a)) is provided, and every time one game is played in the certain game period, the first counter of the first counter is provided. (For example, the count value of the difference number counter shown in FIGS. 157 and 143 (a)) can be updated, and the display means has the first count value of a plurality of predetermined values. When either of them is reached, it is a means capable of displaying a predetermined number of acquisition display, and the certain game period is a first game period (for example, a period in which the effect state is the AT1 state) and a second game period. It is a game period composed of a plurality of game periods including (for example, a period in which the effect state is the AT2 state), and is configured so that the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed in the first game period. In the second game period, the predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed, and the display means displays the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, FIG. 157 (A)) as the predetermined number acquisition display. A means capable of displaying a plurality of predetermined number acquisition displays including the predetermined number acquisition display TG1) shown in FIG. 147 and the second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the predetermined number acquisition display TG2 shown in FIG. 157 (A) and FIG. 147). The first predetermined number acquisition display is a display corresponding to the first predetermined value (for example, 456) among the plurality of predetermined values, and the second predetermined number acquisition display is the plurality. It is a display corresponding to the second predetermined value (for example, 500) among the predetermined values of, and the first count value can be reached in the order of the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. When the first count value reaches the first predetermined value before the first count value reaches the second predetermined value in the second game period. The first predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 157 (A) and the game R238 of FIG. 147), and the first count value is set in the second game period. Reaching the first predetermined value and catching the first predetermined number When the first count value reaches the second predetermined value after the gain display is displayed, the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed (for example, FIG. 157 (Fig. 157). A) and game R227 in FIG. 147), the first gaming period in a state where the first count value has reached a predetermined value of both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. After shifting to the second game period, only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed in the second game period. The game console is configured (see, for example, the game R238 of FIG. 157 (B), the game R238 of FIG. 148 (a), and the game R238 of FIG. 150). Note that FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 4-4 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 4-4 of the present application, the first game period to the second from the first game period in a state where the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. After shifting to the game period of, in the second game period, only one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed. By not displaying the display excessively, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being overly agitated, and it is possible to prevent the misidentification of the predetermined number acquisition display.

The game console according to the invention 4-4 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first counter" according to the present invention may be "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on at least the number of game media paid out in a certain game period". It also includes "a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and paid out in a certain game period".

Further, the first game period is shifted to the second game period in a state where the first count value has reached both the predetermined values of the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. After that, after only the second predetermined number acquisition display of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display is displayed in the second game period, the second Even when the first count value falls below the first predetermined value and then reaches the first predetermined value again during the game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. (See, for example, game R174 in FIG. 148 (b)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being overly agitated by preventing the display of acquiring a predetermined number of sheets from being performed excessively. Further, for example, when the player intentionally plays a game of loss after displaying the larger numerical value and displays the smaller numerical value, the larger numerical value is displayed again. There is room for consideration as to whether or not to perform the game. In this case, if the display is performed again, the predetermined number of acquisition display will be excessively performed, and if the display is not performed again, the game will be played. Since there is a risk of giving distrust to a person (a player who has forgotten that the larger number is displayed once), a predetermined number of cards will be obtained even if a game is intentionally lost. By configuring so that the display is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Further, the first gaming period is in a state where the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value (for example, 456) and the second predetermined value (for example, 500). After shifting to the second gaming period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 sheets have been reached) and the first predetermined number acquisition display in the second game period. After only the first predetermined number acquisition display of the second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500) is displayed, the second predetermined number acquisition display is displayed. The second predetermined number acquisition display may be configured to be displayable during the game period.

With such a configuration, the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display are displayed a plurality of times, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking and the predetermined value is smaller. Since a predetermined number of sheets is acquired and displayed, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the gambling spirit and give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Further, the first gaming period is in a state where the first count value reaches both the first predetermined value (for example, 456) and the second predetermined value (for example, 500). After shifting to the second gaming period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 sheets have been reached) and the first predetermined number acquisition display in the second game period. After both of the second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500) is not displayed, the first predetermined number of sheets is displayed in the second game period. It may be configured so that the acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display are not displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing by configuring the game so that the predetermined number of sheets is not displayed even if the game is intentionally lost.

Further, the plurality of predetermined number acquisition display includes a third predetermined number acquisition display, and the third predetermined number acquisition display is set to a third predetermined value (for example, 1000) among the plurality of predetermined values. Corresponding display, the first count value reaches the predetermined value of both the first predetermined value (for example, 456) and the second predetermined value (for example, 500). After shifting from one game period to the second game period, the first predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 456 sheets have been reached) in the second game period. ) And the second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the second predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 500) are not displayed, and then the second predetermined number acquisition display is performed during the second game period. One predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display are not displayed, but the third predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a third predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that 1000 sheets have been reached) ) May be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the game by not displaying the predetermined number of acquisitions even if the game is intentionally lost, and it is appropriate. It is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment at the right timing.

In addition, at least one of the first predetermined number acquisition display and the second predetermined number acquisition display (for example, the first predetermined number indicating that 456 sheets shown in FIG. 147 have been reached). The acquisition display TG1) may be displayed as a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect suggesting that the set value is set 4 or more).

With such a configuration, in addition to the number of acquired game media, information on the set value can be obtained, so that the interest and convenience of the player can be further enhanced.

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. For example, the AT1 state is an AT state in which the game progress is controlled by the number of games (AT state for managing the number of games). ), For example, it may be configured to be determined by lottery from a plurality of AT types such as game number management, difference number management, and bell navigation number management.

Further, the two-choice navigation may be executed in the AT2 state. For example, in step S2301 of the AT2 state processing B shown in FIG. 138, when the operation is mistaken when all the pressing orders are being navigated by the operation navigation. Adds 11 to the AT2 acquisition number counter, the first stop operation is operated according to the navigation at the time of 2-choice navigation, and if the second stop operation is missed, 1 is added to the AT2 acquisition number counter and the 2-choice navigation Occasionally, even when the first stop operation is operated without following the navigation and the number of sheets becomes 0, 11 may be added to the AT2 acquisition number counter.

Further, in the AT1 state, the total number of acquired sheets "TOTAL 〇 sheets" may not be displayed, or in the AT1 state, a display corresponding to the AT2 planned acquired number counter may be performed, or a display such as +30 may be displayed. The display may be such that the products themselves are stacked.

Further, for example, the time from the timing of the third stop operation for displaying the predetermined number acquisition display TG1 (exceeding 456 sheets) shown in FIG. 147 to the display start timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG2 (exceeding 500 sheets) and FIG. 148. As shown, when the count value of the difference number counter exceeds 500 in the AT1 state, from the timing of the subsequent third stop operation in the AT2 state to the display start timing of the predetermined number acquisition display TG (over 500 sheets). Times may be different.

Further, among the plurality of configurations described in the first to fourth embodiments, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further expand the range of the game. For example, the present invention. 1-1-1-9 (FIGS. 79 to 87), Inventions 2-1 to 2-3 (FIGS. 97 to 99), Inventions 3-1 to 2-3-2 (FIGS. 106 to 107), and the present application. Any one or more of the inventions 4-1 to 4-4 (FIGS. 154 to 157) may be combined.

[Embodiment 5]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in this embodiment 5, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described. In principle, FIGS. 158 to 190 are used only for the description of the fifth embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the fifth embodiment is shown in FIGS. 158 to 158. The code shown in 190 has priority.

<First advantageous gaming state, second advantageous gaming state>
FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the “first advantageous gaming state” according to the present invention, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the “first advantage” according to the present invention from the normal gaming state. It is a figure which showed the example which shifts to the "second advantageous gaming state" which concerns on this invention via "a game state".

The "first advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention is a set game in which the notification of the operation information of the operating means is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (low navigation state) and the game can be executed a predetermined number of times. It is a game that can be executed a plurality of times, and the normal state of this example corresponds to an example of the "first advantageous game state". As shown in FIG. 158 (a), the normal state of this example is composed of the NM1 state, the NM2 state, and the NM3 state, and the NM2 state further includes season 1, season 2, ... Season N (N). Is a positive integer), and consists of a CZ (chance zone) state.

Here, the "operation information" is, for example, each reel of an operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 115, an operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 143 (b), and the like. It is information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc.

The "second advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention is a state more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information of the operating means, and the AT1 state of this example is the "second advantageous gaming state". It corresponds to one example. As shown in FIG. 158 (a), there are two types of AT1 states of this example, AT1 type "high" and AT1 type "low", and this AT1 type is determined by the above-mentioned AT type lottery.

In the example shown in FIGS. 158 (b) and (1), the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state (low or high), and in the normal state, the NM1 state is executed. After that, an example of executing the set game (in this example, the NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season N) → NM3 state) twice is shown. The set game in the normal state is not limited to this example, and for example, "NM1 state-> NM2 state (season 1-> ...-> season N)-> NM3 state" may be set as the set game.

In the example shown in FIGS. 158 (b) and 158 (2), the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → AT1 state (low), and in the normal state, after executing the NM1 state, the set game (book) In the example, an example in which the NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season N) → NM3 state) is executed a plurality of times is shown. Further, in this example, the NM3 state in the normal state is changed to the AT1 state (low) without going through the finalized notification state.

In the example shown in FIGS. 158 (b) and (3), the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state (low or high), and in the normal state, the NM1 state is executed. After that, after executing the first set game (in this example, NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season N) → NM3 state) once, the second set game (in this example, NM2 state (season)) 1 → ... → ... CZ state))) is executed once. Further, in this example, the CZ state in the NM2 state in the normal state shifts to the final notification state without going through the NM3 state.

In the example shown in FIGS. 158 (b) and 158, the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → AT1 state (high preferential treatment), and in the normal state, after executing the NM1 state, the set game (In this example, the NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season N) → NM3 state) is executed only once. Further, in this example, the NM3 state in the normal state is shifted to the AT1 state (high preferential treatment) without going through the finalized notification state.

In the example shown in FIGS. 158 (b) and 158, the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → normal game state → normal state → ..., and in the normal state, the set game (in this example). , NM1 state → NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season N) → NM3 state) is shown as an example of executing once or a plurality of times.

FIG. 158 (c) is a diagram showing a modified example of the “second advantageous gaming state” according to the present invention, and the CZ2 (chance zone 2) state of this example is also an example of the “second advantageous gaming state”. Corresponds to. In the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), the effect state shifts in the order of normal game state → normal state → CZ2 state → final notification state (or normal game state). That is, the "second advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT (for example, the AT1 state described above), and is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state in terms of transmitting the operation information of the operating means. It may be in a gaming state other than AT (for example, the CZ2 state of this example, the final notification state, the judge state, etc.).

<Various tables>
Next, various tables included in the slot machine 100 will be described in detail.

<Lottery table for determining high navigation status scenarios>
FIG. 159 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining a high navigation state scenario. In this high navigation state scenario determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents the set value (settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the horizontal axis represents the scenario number (scenarios 1 to 10 in this example).

The main control unit 300 refers to the lottery table for determining the high navigation state scenario in the high navigation state scenario lottery of the NM1 state processing B described later, and based on the set value and the random number value at the time of the lottery, the scenario number (high navigation). State scenario) is selected. For example, when the set value is set 1, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 20/100, and when the set value is set 2, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 14/100, and the set value is set. In the case of 3, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 18/100, in the case of setting value 4, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 12/100, and in the case of setting value 5, scenario 1 is selected. Scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 16/100, and when the set value is set 6, scenario 1 is selected with a probability of 10/100.

In the lottery table for determining the high navigation state scenario according to this example, scenarios 1, 3, 7, and 8 are more likely to be selected when the set value is an odd number than when the set value is an even number (the winning probability is high), and scenario 2 , 4, 6 and 9 are easier to select when the set value is an odd number than when the set value is even (higher winning probability), and scenario 5 is easier to select when the set value is larger (higher winning probability). , Scenario 10 has the same winning probability regardless of the set value. The relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the scenario number is not limited to this example. For example, the winning probability of scenario 10 may be changed for each set value, or any one of scenarios 1 to 9 or A plurality of winning probabilities may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, the lower the set value, the higher the ceiling rate (probability that the value of the cycle counter described later exceeds the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example)) and the reset rate (high navigation state reset scenario described later (in this example). , The probability that the scenario corresponding to the scenario number 8 or 9) will be selected) may be high, or conversely, the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling rate and the higher the reset rate. In addition, the ceiling rate may be higher and the reset rate may be higher when the set value is odd than when the set value is even, and conversely, when the set value is even, the ceiling may be higher than when the set value is even. The rate may be high and the reset rate may be high.

<High navigation status scenario table>
FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a high navigation state scenario table. In this high navigation state scenario table, the vertical axis represents the scenario number (scenarios 1 to 10 in this example), and the horizontal axis represents the period (cycles 1 to 5 in this example).

The main control unit 300 refers to this high navigation state scenario table in the cycle type setting of the cycle start setting process described later, and based on the scenario number and the cycle at the time of reference, the cycle type (in this example, the cycle type C). , Cycle type B, Cycle type A, Cycle type S). For example, when the scenario number is scenario 1, the cycle type C is set when the cycle is cycles 1, 2, and 4, and the cycle type B is set when the cycle is cycles 3, 5. When the scenario number is scenario 6, the cycle type C is set when the cycle is cycle 1, the cycle type B is set when the cycle is cycle 2, and the cycle type S is set when the cycle is cycle 3. To set.

Further, when the scenario number is scenario 8 or 9 (in the case of the high navigation state reset scenario described later) and when the scenario number is scenario 10 (in the case of the AT confirmation scenario described later), the cycle is only cycle 1. In scenario 8, cycle type C is set, in scenario 9, cycle type A is set, and in scenario 10, cycle type S is set.

<Lottery table for determining the development season>
FIG. 159 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining the development season. In this lottery table for determining the development season, the vertical axis represents the cycle type (cycle type C, cycle type B, cycle type A, cycle type S in this example), and the horizontal axis represents the development season (1 year in this example). Spring-winter (1-4), spring 2nd year (5), summer 2nd year (6), autumn 2nd year (7), winter 2nd year (8), spring 3rd year (9)) Represents.

The main control unit 300 refers to the development season determination lottery table in the development season lottery of the cycle start setting process described later, and selects the development season based on the cycle type and the random number value at the time of the lottery. For example, when the cycle type is cycle type C, there is a 60/100 probability of selecting the second year spring, a 30/100 probability of selecting the second year summer, and a 6/100 probability of selecting the second year. Select autumn, have a 3/100 chance of choosing winter in the second year, and have a 1/100 chance of choosing spring in the third year.

<CZ transition lottery table>
FIG. 159 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a CZ transition lottery table. In this CZ transition lottery table, the vertical axis represents the cycle type (cycle type C, cycle type B, cycle type A, cycle type S in this example), and the horizontal axis represents the cycle (cycles 1 to 5 in this example). Represents.

The main control unit 300 refers to the CZ transition lottery table in the CZ transition lottery of the NM2 state processing A described later, and determines the success or failure of the CZ transition lottery based on the cycle type, cycle, and random number value at the time of the lottery. .. As shown in FIG. 159 (d), in the CZ transition lottery table of this example, it is more difficult to transition to CZ when the cycle is 1 than when the cycle is 2 to 5 (the probability of winning the AT is lower). ) Is configured. This is to suppress gambling and to make the AT state and the non-AT state sharp.

For example, when the cycle type is cycle type C, when the cycle is cycle 1, the CZ transition lottery is won with a low probability (for example, a probability of 5/100), and the cycle is any of cycles 2 to 5. Occasionally, you win the CZ transition lottery with a medium probability (eg, 30/100 probability). Further, when the cycle type is cycle type S, when the cycle is cycle 1, the CZ transition lottery is won with a low probability (for example, a probability of 5/100), and the cycle is any of cycles 2 and 3. Occasionally, a high probability (eg, 90/100 probability) of winning a CZ transition lottery. Needless to say, the low-probability, medium-probability, and high-probability numerical values are not limited to this example.

The winning probability of the AT transition lottery in cycle 1 may be lowered regardless of the CZ transition probability. Further, the winning probability of the AT transition lottery may be lower in the case of transitioning from the NM2 state in the normal state to the AT1 state via the CZ state than in the case of transitioning from the NM2 state in the normal state to the AT1 state. Since the winning probability of the AT transition lottery in the judge effect (CZ state) is the same regardless of the cycle, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the player's expectation for the judge effect.

<AT promotion lottery table>
FIG. 159 (e) is a diagram showing an example of an AT promotion lottery table. In this AT promotion lottery table, the horizontal axis represents a cycle (cycles 1 to 5 in this example) and a lottery value (numerical values are omitted).

The main control unit 300 refers to the AT promotion lottery table in the AT promotion lottery of the NM3 state processing A, which will be described later, and determines the success or failure of the AT promotion lottery based on the cycle at the time of the lottery and the random number value. As shown in FIG. 159 (e), in the AT promotion lottery table of this example, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" when the cycle is 1 than when the cycle is 2 to 5. It is configured to be easy (easy to get benefits).

For example, if the cycle is cycle 1, the AT promotion lottery is won with a high probability (for example, 90/100 probability), and if the cycle is any of cycles 2 to 5, the probability is low (for example, 10). Win the AT promotion lottery with a probability of / 100). Needless to say, the low-probability and high-probability numerical values are not limited to this example.

<Lottery table for determining points that can be transferred to AT>
FIG. 160A is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining AT transferable points. In this AT transferable point determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents the number of points and the horizontal axis represents the lottery value (numerical value is omitted).

The main control unit 300 refers to the AT shiftable point determination lottery table in the AT shiftable point lottery of the cycle start setting process described later, and based on the random number value at the time of the lottery, the AT shiftable point (to the AT state). (Points for determining whether or not the migration is possible) is determined. Although the description of the lottery value is omitted, in this example, points in the numerical range of 0 to 900 PT (points) are selected as AT transferable points by the AT transferable point lottery.

<Lottery table for determining AT transition points>
FIG. 160B is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining AT transition points. In this AT transition point determination lottery table, the vertical axis represents a winning combination, and the horizontal axis represents a lottery value (numerical value omitted) and additional points (numerical value omitted).

The main control unit 300 refers to the AT transition point determination lottery table in the AT transition point lottery of NM1 state processing A and NM2 state processing A, which will be described later, and shifts to AT based on the winning combination and the random number value at the time of lottery. Determine the points to be added to the points (initial value 0). Although the description of the lottery value and the added points is omitted, in this example, points in the numerical range of 0 to 50 PT (points) are selected as the added points by the AT transition point lottery.

<AT transition point production table>
FIG. 160 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an AT transition point effect table. In this AT transition point effect table, the vertical axis represents the AT transition point and the horizontal axis represents the effect mode.

Although not executed in the slot machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment, the main control unit 300 refers to the AT transition point effect table in the AT transition point lottery of the NM1 state processing A and the NM2 state processing A, which will be described later, and at the time of reference. The effect mode to be executed may be determined based on the AT transition point of the above, and the effect suggesting the AT transition point may be performed instead of (or in addition to) the display of the AT transition point described later.

For example, when the AT transition point is 0 to 199, white (for example, an effect of emitting white light using a light emitting means (for example, a lamp or LED) or a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device)) is selected. Then, when the AT transition point is 200 to 399, blue light (for example, a light emitting means (for example, a lamp or LED) or a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is used to emit blue light. When the effect is selected and the effect is executed and the AT transition point is 800 to 999, a rainbow (for example, a light emitting means (for example, a lamp or LED) or a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device)) is used. Use to select an effect that emits rainbow (7 colors) light) and execute the effect.

<Lottery table for determining seasonal type>
FIG. 160 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining the seasonal type. In this lottery table for determining the seasonal type, the vertical axis represents the seasonal type (low, medium, high in this example), and the horizontal axis represents the lottery value (numerical value is omitted).

The main control unit 300 refers to the lottery table for determining the season type in the seasonal type setting of the season start setting process described later, and determines the season type based on the random value at the time of the lottery. Although the description of the lottery value is omitted, in this example, one of low, medium, and high is selected as the seasonal type according to the seasonal type setting.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, the high navigation state transition process will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state transition process according to the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. 123 (b).

The high navigation state transition process according to this example is obtained by adding the normal state start setting process of step S704 to the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). Details will be described later, but in this normal state start setting process, processing for starting the normal state in the high navigation state is performed.

<Normal state start setting process>
Next, the normal state start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal state start setting process (step S704) in the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. 161 (b).

In step S751, a lottery for the number of NM1 state games is performed. In this NM1 state game number lottery, the number of games (number of games) to be executed in the NM1 state is determined based on the acquired random number value. Next, in step S752, the lottery result value (number of games) determined in the NM1 state game number lottery is set in the effect state counter, and then in step S753, information indicating that the normal state is set is set in the effect state. To do. In step S754, information (numerical value 1) indicating that the NM state is 1 is set in the NM state, and in step S755, the normal state start setting process is terminated after executing other normal state start setting processes. ..

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, the high navigation state common process A will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state common process A according to the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state common process A described with reference to FIG. 125.

The high navigation state common process A according to this example is obtained by deleting the processes of steps S901 and S902 from the high navigation state common process A described with reference to FIG. 125, and the high navigation state common process A according to this example. In the above, the effect state counter is not subtracted, but is configured to be subtracted in each of the NM1 to NM3 states.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, the normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal state processing A according to the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 126.

In the normal state processing A according to this example, the processing of steps S1020 to S1024 is applied instead of the processing of steps S1001 to S1016 of the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 126.

Specifically, in step S1020, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1021 to execute the NM1 state process A (details will be described later), and if not applicable. Proceeds to step S1022. In step S1022, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM2 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1023 to execute the NM2 state process A (details will be described later), and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1024. NM3 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed at.

<NM1 state processing A>
Next, NM1 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the flow of the NM1 state process A (step S1021) in the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 164.

In step S1031, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, and in the next step S1032, the AT transition point lottery described with reference to FIG. 160 (b) is performed. In this AT transition point lottery, the lottery table for determining the AT transition point shown in FIG. 160B is referred to, and the additional points to be added to the AT transition points are determined based on the winning combination and the random number value at the time of the lottery.

In step S1033, the lottery result value (addition point) of the AT transition point lottery in step S1032 is added to the current AT transition point to update the AT transition point, and then in the next step S1034, other NM1 state processing is performed. A is executed to end NM1 state processing A.

<NM2 state processing A>
Next, NM2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the flow of the NM2 state process A (step S1023) in the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 164.

In step S1041, it is determined whether or not the CZ state flag is off, and if it is off (not in the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1042, and if it is on (in the case of the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1055 to CZ. After executing the state process A (details will be described later), the process proceeds to step S1056. In step S1042, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, and in the next step S1043, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is off, and if it is off (when the precursor flag is not being produced), the process proceeds to step S1044, which turns on. In the case (when the precursory effect is being produced), the process proceeds to step S1049.

In step S1044, the CZ transition lottery described with reference to FIG. 159 (d) is performed. In this CZ transition lottery, the winner of the CZ transition lottery is determined based on the cycle type, the cycle, and the random number value at the time of the lottery with reference to the CZ transition lottery table shown in FIG. 159 (d). In step S1045, it is determined whether or not the CZ transition lottery in step S1044 has been won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1046, and if it is not won, the process proceeds to step S1050.

In step S1046, the number of precursor games (the number of games that execute the precursor effect suggesting the transition to the CZ state) is determined by a lottery using random values, and in the next step 1047, the lottery determined by the lottery in step S1046 is determined. Set the result value (number of precursor games) in the precursor counter. In the following step S1048, the process proceeds to step S1050 after setting the precursor flag to on. In step S1049, after subtracting 1 from the precursor counter, the process proceeds to step S1050.

In step S1050, the AT transition point lottery described with reference to FIG. 160 (b) is performed. In this AT transition point lottery, the lottery table for determining the AT transition point shown in FIG. 160B is referred to, and the additional points to be added to the AT transition points are determined based on the winning combination and the random number value at the time of the lottery. In step S1051, the lottery result value (addition point) of the AT transition point lottery in step S1050 is added to the current AT transition point to update the AT transition point, and then the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1052, it is determined whether or not the AT transition reservation flag is off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1053, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1056. In step S1053, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the AT transition point updated in step S1051 is equal to or greater than the numerical value of the AT transition possible point, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1054, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1056. move on. In step S1054, since the numerical value of the AT transition point becomes equal to or greater than the numerical value of the AT transition possible point, the process proceeds to step S1056 after turning on the AT transition reservation flag. In step S1056, the NM2 state process A is terminated after the other NM2 state process A is executed.

<CZ state processing A>
Next, CZ state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the flow of CZ state processing A (step S1055) in the NM2 state processing A described with reference to FIG. 166.

In step S1061, 1 is subtracted from the CZ counter, and in the next step S1062, a CZ point addition lottery is performed. In this CZ point addition lottery, the addition points to be added to the CZ points are determined based on the acquired lottery value. In step S1063, the lottery result value (addition point) of the CZ point addition lottery in step S1062 is added to the current CZ point to update the CZ point, and then the process proceeds to step S1064. In step S1064, the CZ state processing A is terminated after the other CZ state processing A is executed. In the other CZ state processing A of step S1064, for example, an AT transition lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, a process of turning on the AT transition reservation flag is executed.

In this example, the CZ point is used separately from the AT transition point, but the AT transition point may be used instead of the CZ point. Further, even when an AT transition point is used instead of the CZ point, it may be used as a point for starting addition from 0 in the CZ state.

<NM3 state processing A>
Next, NM3 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM3 state processing A (step S1024) in the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 164.

In step S1071, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter, and in the next step S1072, it is determined whether or not the AT transition reservation flag is off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1073, and if it is on, step S1076 is performed. move on. In step S1073, an AT transition lottery is performed, and in the next step S1704, it is determined whether or not the AT transition lottery in step S1703 has been won. If so, the process proceeds to step S1705 to set the AT transition reservation flag to ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S1081, and if the player does not win, the process proceeds to step S1081 without setting the AT transition reservation flag to ON.

In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion reservation flag is off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1077, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1081. In step S1707, the AT promotion lottery described with reference to FIG. 159 (e) is performed. In this AT promotion lottery, the winner of the AT promotion lottery is determined based on the cycle at the time of the lottery and the random number value with reference to the AT promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 159 (e).

In the next step S1708, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion lottery in step S1707 is won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1709, the AT promotion reservation flag is set to on, and then the process proceeds to step S1080, and no winner is won. If so, the process proceeds to step S1081. In step S1080, the AT1 type (initial value is 0, which is a numerical value indicating “low”) is changed to 1, which is a numerical value indicating “high”, and then the process proceeds to step S1081. In step S1081, after executing other NM3 state processing, NM3 state processing A is terminated.

In the NM3 state processing A of this example, when the AT transition reservation flag is off, the AT transition lottery is executed regardless of the value of the AT transition point, but the AT transition lottery is executed according to the value of the AT transition point. The winning probabilities may be different, or the AT transition lottery may not be executed when the value of the AT transition points is less than the AT transition possible points.

<Final notification status processing A>
Next, the final notification state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the flow of the finalized notification state process A according to the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 127.

In the final notification state process A according to this example, the processes of steps S111 to S1114 are applied instead of the processes of steps S1101 to S1105 of the final notification process A described with reference to FIG. 127.

Specifically, in step S1110, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion reservation flag is off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1111. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1111, an AT promotion lottery is performed. In this AT promotion lottery, the winner of the AT promotion lottery is determined based on the cycle at the time of the lottery and the random number value with reference to the AT promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 159 (e).

In the next step S1112, it is determined whether or not the AT promotion lottery in step S1111 has been won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1113 to set the AT promotion reservation flag to ON, and then proceeds to step S1114, and the player does not win. If so, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1114, the AT1 type (the initial value is 0, which is a numerical value indicating “low”) is changed to 1, which is a numerical value indicating “high”, and then the process proceeds to step S1109.

<Production state control process B>
Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect state control B according to the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process B described with reference to FIG. 132.

The effect state control process B according to this example applies the processes of steps S171 to S1711 instead of the processes of steps S1701 to S1704 of the effect state control process B described with reference to FIG. 132.

Specifically, in step S1710, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is on, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1711, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1711, the process proceeds to step S1705 after the difference number counter update process is performed. In the difference counter update process in step S1711, the number of medals (number of medals inserted) by the player in the game is based on the number of medals (number of payouts) acquired by the player (given to the player) in the game. Is added to the counter value of the current difference number counter to update the count value of the difference number counter. Further, preparations are made for transmitting a payout command including at least information on the number of inserts indicating the number of inserts and information on the number of payouts indicating the number of payouts to the first sub control unit 400.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, the normal state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal state processing B according to the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 134.

In the normal state processing B according to this example, the processing of steps S191 to S1917 is applied instead of the processing of steps S1901 to S1903 of the normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 134.

Specifically, in step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example), and if applicable (when the ceiling cycle has not been reached), the step The process proceeds to S1912, and if not applicable (when the ceiling cycle is reached), the process proceeds to step S1917.

In step S1912, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1913 to execute the NM1 state process B (details will be described later), and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1914. .. In step S1914, it is determined whether or not the NM state is the NM2 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1915 to execute the NM2 state process B (details will be described later), and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1916. After executing the NM3 state process B (details will be described later) in, the normal state process B is terminated. In step S1917, since the ceiling cycle has been reached, the normal state process B is terminated after the AT1 start setting process (details will be described later) is executed.

<NM1 state processing B>
Next, NM1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the flow of the NM1 state process B (step S1913) in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. 171.

In step S1920, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0, and if it is 0 (in the case of the final game in the NM1 state), the process proceeds to step S1921, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1925. In step S1921, the high navigation state scenario lottery described with reference to FIG. 159 (a) is performed. In this high navigation state scenario lottery, the scenario number is selected based on the set value and the random number value at the time of lottery with reference to the high navigation state scenario determination lottery table shown in FIG. 159 (a).

In step S1922, the lottery result (scenario number) of the high navigation state scenario lottery in step S1921 is set in the high navigation state scenario, and in the next step 1923, 1 (initial value) is set in the cycle counter and the step S1924 is performed. move on. In step S1924, the cycle start setting process (details will be described later) is executed, and in the next step S1905, the other NM1 state process B is executed and then the NM1 state process B is terminated.

In this example, the scenario number is determined when shifting from the NM1 state to the NM2 state, but the timing of determining the scenario number is not limited to this example. For example, the NM1 state from the low navigation state to the high navigation state. The scenario number may be determined at the time of transition to (when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the advantageous state). Further, in this example, since the scenario number is determined when shifting from the NM1 state to the NM2 state, it is not possible to suggest a scenario in the NM1 state, but the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is made. When determining the scenario number (when shifting from the normal gaming state to the advantageous state), the scenario may be suggested in the NM1 state, and in this case, the AT transition point is irrespective of the scenario. You may execute the process of adding.

<Cycle start setting process>
Next, the cycle start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the flow of the cycle start setting process (step S1925) in the NM1 state process B described with reference to FIG. 172.

In step S1930, the cycle type setting described with reference to FIG. 159 (b) is performed. In this cycle type setting, the cycle type is set based on the scenario number and the cycle with reference to the high navigation state scenario table shown in FIG. 159 (b). In the next step S1931, the development season lottery described with reference to FIG. 159 (c) is performed. In this development season lottery, the development season is selected based on the cycle type set in the cycle type setting in step S1930 and the random number value with reference to the development season determination lottery table shown in FIG. 159 (c). In step S1932, the lottery result (development season) of the development season lottery in step S1931 is set as the development season, and in the next step S1933, 1 (initial value) is set in the season counter and the process proceeds to step S1934.

In step S1934, it is determined whether or not the cycle counter does not match the AT winning cycle (cycle type S in this example), and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S1935, and if they do, the process proceeds to step S1937. In step S1935, the AT transferable point lottery described with reference to FIG. 160A is performed. In this AT transferable point lottery, the AT transferable points are determined based on the random number value with reference to the AT transferable point determination lottery table shown in FIG. 160 (a). In the next step S1936, the lottery result (AT transferable points) of the AT transferable point lottery in step S1935 is set as the AT transferable points, and then the process proceeds to step S1938.

In step S1937, the AT shiftable point is set to 0, and then the process proceeds to step S1938. In this example, if it is determined in step S1934 that the cycle counter matches the AT winning cycle (cycle type S in this example), the AT shiftable point 0 is set in step S1937, so that in subsequent processing. , The AT transition reservation flag is set to ON, and the effect state is configured to shift to the AT1 state. In step S1938, the process proceeds to step S1939 after executing the season start setting process (details will be described later). In step S1939, the cycle start setting process is terminated after executing other cycle start setting processes.

<Seasonal start setting process>
Next, the seasonal start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the flow of the seasonal start setting process (step S1938) in the cycle start setting process described with reference to FIG. 173.

In step S1940, the seasonal type setting described with reference to FIG. 159 (c) is performed. In this seasonal type setting, the development season is selected based on the cycle type and the random number value with reference to the lottery table for determining the development season shown in FIG. 159 (c). In step S1941, a seasonal fixed value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and the process proceeds to step S1942. In this example, the seasonal fixed value is set to 20, but it may be another numerical value (fixed value) or a variable value selected by lottery or the like.

In step S1942, it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter is other than 0, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1944, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1943. In step S1943, the precursor counter is set to 1 and then the process proceeds to step S1944.

In step S1944, the NM state is set to the numerical value 2 indicating the NM state 2, and then the process proceeds to step S1945. In step S1945, the seasonal start setting process is terminated after executing the other seasonal start setting process.

<NM2 state processing B>
Next, NM2 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the flow of NM2 state processing B (step S1915) in the normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 171.

In step S1950, it is determined whether or not the CZ state flag is off, and if it is off (if it is not in the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1951, and if it is on (in the case of the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1961. In step S1951, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is off, and if it is off (when the precursor is not being produced), the process proceeds to step S1953, and if it is on (when the precursor is being produced), the process proceeds to step S1952.

In step S1952, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter is other than 0, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1960, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1953. In step S1953, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1954, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1962.

In step S1954, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable (when the value of the seasonal counter <the value of the developing season), the process proceeds to step S1955, and if not applicable. (When the value of the seasonal counter ≤ the value of the developing season), the process proceeds to step S1957. In step S1955, 1 is added to the season counter in order to advance the season to the next season, and in the next step S1956, the season start setting process described with reference to FIG. 174 is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1962. In step S1957, a lottery for the number of judge games that determines the number of judge games based on a random number value is performed in order to advance the production state to the NM3 state (judgment state), and in the next step S1958, the lottery for the number of judge games in step S1957 is performed. The result (number of games) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S1959, a numerical value 3 indicating the NM state 3 (judgment state) is set in the NM state, and then the process proceeds to step S1962.

In step S1960, the process proceeds to step S1962 after performing the CZ state start setting process (details will be described later), and in step S1961, the process proceeds to step S1962 after performing the CZ state process (details will be described later). In step S1962, the NM2 state process B is terminated after the other NM2 state process B is performed.

<CZ state start setting process>
Next, the CZ state start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the flow of the CZ state start setting process (step S1960) in the NM2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 175.

In step S1970, the process proceeds to step S1971 after turning off the precursor flag. In step S1971, a CZ game number lottery for determining the number of CZ games based on a random number value is performed, and in the next step S1972, the lottery result (game number) of the CZ game number lottery in step S1971 is set in the CZ counter. Proceed to S1973. In step S1973, the CZ state flag is set to on and then the process proceeds to step S1974. In step S1974, the CZ state start setting process is ended after the other CZ state start setting processes are performed.

<CZ state processing B>
Next, the CZ state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the flow of CZ state processing B (step S1961) in the NM2 state processing B described with reference to FIG. 175.

In step S1980, it is determined whether or not the value of the CZ counter is 0, and if it is 0 (in the case of the final game in the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1981 to turn off the CZ state flag, and then proceeds to step S1982. If it is other than 0 (if it is not the final game in the CZ state), the process proceeds to step S1995.

In step S1982, it is determined whether or not the AT transition reservation flag is off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1983, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1994. In step S1983, the CZ point is converted into an AT transition point, and in the next step S1984, the conversion value converted in step 1983 is added to the current AT transition point. In the next step S1985, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the AT transition point is equal to or greater than the numerical value of the AT transition possible point, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1986, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1987. In step S1986, after turning on the AT transition reservation flag, in the next step S1987, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1995, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1995. Step S1988 proceeds.

In step S1988, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1989, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1991. In step S1989, 1 is added to the season counter, and in the next step S1990, the season start setting process described with reference to FIG. 174 is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1995. In step S1991, a lottery for the number of judge games that determines the number of judge games based on a random number value is performed, and in the next step S1992, the lottery result (number of games) of the lottery for the number of judge games in step S1991 is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S1993, after setting the numerical value 3 indicating the NM state 3 in the NM state, the process proceeds to step S1995.

In step S1994, the process proceeds to step S1995 after setting a numerical value indicating the final notification state in the effect state. In step S1995, the CZ state processing B is terminated after the other CZ state processing B is performed.

<NM3 state processing B>
Next, NM3 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the flow of the NM3 state process B (step S1916) in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. 171.

In step S2020, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S2021, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S2027. In step S2021, it is determined whether or not the AT transition reservation flag is off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2022, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2026.

In step S2022, it is determined whether or not the current scenario is a high navigation state reset scenario (in this example, the scenario corresponding to scenario number 8 or 9), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2023, which is not applicable. In the case, the process proceeds to step S2025. In step S2023, 1 (initial value) is added to the cycle counter, and in the next step S2024, the cycle start setting process described with reference to FIG. 173 is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S2027. In step S2025, the process proceeds to step S2027 after turning on the high navigation state end wait flag.

In step S2026, the process proceeds to step S2027 after setting a numerical value indicating the final notification state in the effect state. In step S2027, the NM3 state process B is terminated after the other NM3 state process B is performed.

In the NM3 state processing B of this example, an example of shifting from the high navigation state to the low navigation state by turning on the high navigation state end standby flag in step S2025 was shown, but a lottery was performed in step S2025. If the lottery is won, the game is configured to maintain the high navigation state for a predetermined number of games, return to the high navigation state, or shift to another production state before shifting to the low navigation state. May be good.

<Final notification status processing B>
Next, the final notification state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the flow of the finalized notification state process B according to the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 135.

In the finalized notification state process A according to this example, the processes of steps S2001 to S2002 of the finalized notification process A described with reference to FIG. 127 are deleted, and the processes of steps S2011 to S2012 are added.

Specifically, in step S2011, the AT transition reservation flag is turned off, and in the next step S2012, the AT promotion reservation flag is set to off, and then the process proceeds to step S2007.

<Control of production state>
Next, control of the effect state of the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 189.

First, various counters and flags in each figure will be described in detail. The item of "high navigation state counter" indicates the number of games remaining in the high navigation state that the main control unit 300 updates in the high navigation state, and the item of "effect state counter" indicates that the main control unit 300 is in each production state. Shows the number of games remaining in each production state to be updated.

The “high navigation state scenario” indicates a scenario number selected in the high navigation state scenario lottery described with reference to FIG. 159 (a), and in the present embodiment, any one of 1 to 10 corresponding to scenarios 1 to 10. Numerical value (scenario number) is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 180, since the high navigation state scenario at the start of the NM2 state is scenario 5, a numerical value “5” corresponding to this is set. The “periodic counter” indicates a counter that is set / updated in the NM1 state processing B, the NM3 state processing B, and the like, and the initial value is 1.

The “cycle type” indicates the cycle type set in the cycle start setting process described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). In the present embodiment, the cycle type C, the cycle type B, the cycle type A, or the cycle type S Numerical values (0, 1, 2, 3 in this example) corresponding to are set. In each figure, in order to facilitate understanding, letters (C, B, A, S) are used instead of the numerical values corresponding to the cycle type C, cycle type B, cycle type A, or cycle type S. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 180, since the cycle type at the start of the NM2 state is the cycle type C, the corresponding character "C" is described.

The “seasonal type” indicates the seasonal type described with reference to FIG. 160 (d), and in the present embodiment, numerical values corresponding to low, medium, or high (0, 1, 2 in this example) are set. Will be done. In each figure, in order to facilitate understanding, characters (low, medium, high) are shown instead of the numerical values corresponding to low, medium, or high, and are shown in FIG. 180, for example. In the example, since the seasonal type at the start of the NM2 state is low, the corresponding character "low" is described.

The “development season” indicates the development season set by the cycle start setting process described with reference to FIG. 159 (c). In the present embodiment, the first year spring, the first year summer, the first year autumn, 1 A numerical value of 1 to 9 corresponding to the winter of the year, the spring of the second year, the summer of the second year, the autumn of the second year, the winter of the second year, or the spring of the third year is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 180, since the development season at the start of the NM2 state is the spring of the second year, a numerical value "5" corresponding to this is set. The "seasonal counter" indicates a counter that is set / updated in the NM1 state processing B, the NM2 state processing B, and the like, and the initial value is 1.

“AT transferable points” indicates AT transferable points selected in the AT transferable point lottery described with reference to FIG. 160 (a), and in the present embodiment, 0 to 0 corresponding to 0 to 900 PT (points). Any numerical value of 900 is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 180, since the AT shiftable point at the start of the NM2 state is 850, the corresponding numerical value “850” is set.

The "AT transition point" is the value of the AT transition point after adding the AT transition points (0 to 50 PT (points) in this example) selected in the AT transition point lottery described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). Is shown. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 180, since the AT transition point at the start of the NM1 state (before the start of the AT transition point lottery) is 0, a numerical value "0" corresponding to this is set, and then the AT transition point is set. In the game in which is added, the AT transition point after the addition (in this example, the description of a specific numerical value is omitted due to the notation of "XXX") is set.

The "AT transition reservation flag" is a flag indicating that the transition to the AT state has been decided. In the present embodiment, when the numerical value of the AT transition point becomes equal to or greater than the numerical value of the AT transition possible point, or the AT transition It is set to on when the lottery is won. The "AT promotion reservation flag" is a flag indicating that promotion has been decided in the AT state, and in the present embodiment, it is set to ON when the AT promotion lottery is won, and "AT1 type" is set to "Low". Change from to "high".

<Example 1 of transition of production state>
Next, the transition example 1 of the effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182 and 183 (a). 180 to 182 are diagrams showing changes in various counters and flags in the effect state transition example 1 in chronological order, and FIG. 183 (a) shows changes in various displays and effects in the effect state transition example 1. Is a diagram showing in chronological order.

In this example, the effect state shifts in the order of high navigation state (AT2 state) → low navigation state (normal game state) → high navigation state (normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state (low)). Further, in the normal state of the high navigation state, after executing the NM1 state, the set game of the cycle 1 (NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season 5) → NM3 state) is executed, and then the cycle 1 is executed. A set game (NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season 8) → NM3 state) having a cycle 2 in which the number of seasons is different from the set game is executed.

<Normal state (NM1 state)>
Specifically, the game (game R999) having a high navigation state counter of 999 shown in FIG. 180 is the first game immediately after shifting from a low navigation state (normal game state) to a high navigation state (NM1 state in the normal state). The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 999, and the number of remaining games in the NM1 state is 19.

In this game R999, since it is immediately after the transition from the low navigation state (normal game state) to the high navigation state (normal state), the initial value (0) is set for the AT transition point, and the AT transition reservation flag and AT promotion The initial value (off) is set for the reservation flag.

The game (game R980) having a high navigation state counter of 980 shown in FIG. 180 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 980 and the number of remaining games in the NM1 state is 0 (final game in the NM1 state). ..

In this game R980, since the AT transition points have been updated (added), the updated (added) numerical values are set for the AT transition points.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 1: Season 1 (Spring 1st year)>
The game (game R979) having a high navigation state counter of 979 shown in FIG. 180 is the first game immediately after the transition from the NM1 state in the normal state to the season 1 (spring of the first year) of the cycle 1 in the NM2 state. , The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 979, and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the NM1 state processing B of the previous game R980 (the final game of the NM1 state), since the scenario 5 was selected by the high navigation state scenario lottery, the scenario number (5) corresponding to this scenario 5 is set. Even when the game R979 starts, the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained. Further, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "cycle type C" was selected based on the scenario number (5) and the cycle (1) by the cycle type setting. , A numerical value (for example, 0) corresponding to this is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

Further, in the season start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "low" was selected as the season type by the season type setting, so a numerical value (for example, 0) corresponding to this is set. Even when the game R979 starts, the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained. In addition, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "Spring of the second year (5)" was selected based on the cycle type (low) by the development season lottery. The numerical value (5) corresponding to is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

Further, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), the AT transferable points were determined to be 850 by the AT transferable points lottery, so a numerical value (850) corresponding to this was set. Therefore, even when the game R979 starts, the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained. Further, in the NM1 state processing B of the previous game R980 (the final game of the NM1 state), the initial value (1) is set in the cycle counter, and in the cycle start setting process, the initial value (1) is set in the season counter. Therefore, even when the game R979 starts, the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained.

In the game R979, since the AT transition points were added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state processing A, the AT transition points are updated to the added values.

Further, in the game R979, as shown by the reference numeral R979 in FIG. 183 (a), the seasonal display SD corresponding to the seasonal counter, the game state, and a certain privilege can be given by using the effect image display device 157. A seasonal production SE that suggests sex, a remaining game display RG that indicates the number of remaining games in the current production state (in this example, season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state), and an AT that indicates the AT transition point. Perform the transition point display AP.

In this example, as the seasonal display SD, a display including the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1 is performed, and as a seasonal effect SE, an effect regarding whether or not to shift to the AT1 state is performed, and the number of remaining games is displayed. As the display RG, a display including the characters "19G" indicating that the remaining games of season 1 (spring of the first year) are 19 games is performed. In this example, the cycle is not displayed, but the cycle may be notified by displaying the cycle (for example, a display including the character "cycle 1").

Although not shown in FIG. 180, the game (game R978) having a high navigation state counter of 978 has 978 remaining games in the high navigation state, and the remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) of the NM2 state. The number is 18 games.

In this game R978, as shown by the reference numeral R978 in FIG. 183 (a), the seasonal display SD includes the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1, and the current seasonal effect SE is displayed. The production is performed to suggest that the production state is normal and the expectation that a certain privilege will be given is high, and as the remaining game number display RG, the remaining games of season 1 (spring of the first year) are 18 games. It is displayed including the character "18G" indicating that.

In the game (game R960) having a high navigation state counter of 960 shown in FIG. 180, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 960, and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) of the NM2 state is 0. (The final game of Season 1 (Spring 1st year) in NM2 state).

In this game R960, as shown by the reference numeral R960 in FIG. 183 (a), the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1, and is currently used as the seasonal effect SE. A production that suggests that the production state is in the normal state and that there is a high expectation that a certain privilege will be given is performed, and the remaining games of season 1 (spring of the first year) are 0 games as the remaining game number display RG. It is displayed including the character "0G" indicating that.

In this game R960, in the NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable, 1 is added to the seasonal counter. In this example, the season Since the value of the counter is 1 and the value of the developing season is 5, 1 is added to the seasonal counter and the seasonal counter is updated to 2 which represents the summer of the first year.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 1: Season 2 (1st year summer)>
The game (game R959) in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 180 is 959 is the first game immediately after the transition from season 1 (first year spring) to season 2 (first year summer) of cycle 1 in the NM2 state. Therefore, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 959, and the number of remaining games in season 2 (summer of the first year) in the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R960 (the final game of the first year spring of the NM2 state), the season counter is updated from 1 to 2, and the setting of the previous game R960 is also set at the start of the game R959. Is maintained. Further, in the game R959, since the AT transition points are added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state processing A, the AT transition points are updated to the added values.

In the game R959, as shown by the reference numeral R959 in FIG. 183 (a), the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "summer of the first year" corresponding to the seasonal counter 2, and the seasonal effect SE is set to the AT1 state. An effect regarding whether or not to shift is performed, and as the remaining game number display RG, a display including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games in season 2 (summer of the first year) is 19 games is displayed.

In the game (game R940) having a high navigation state counter of 940 shown in FIG. 180, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 940, and the number of remaining games in season 2 (summer of the first year) of the NM2 state is 0. (The final game of Season 2 (summer of the first year) in the NM2 state).

In this game R940, although not shown, the remaining games in season 2 (summer of the first year) are 0 games as the remaining game number display RG while continuing the seasonal display SD and seasonal production SE of the game R959. A display including the character "0G" indicating that is performed. Further, in the game R940, in the NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable, 1 is added to the seasonal counter. In this example, Since the value of the seasonal counter is 2 and the value of the developing season is 5, 1 is added to the seasonal counter and the seasonal counter is updated to 3 which represents the autumn of the first year.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 1: Season 2 (Autumn of the first year)>
The game (game R939) in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 180 is 939 is the first game immediately after the transition from season 2 (summer of the first year) of cycle 1 to season 3 (autumn of the first year) in the NM2 state. Therefore, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 939, and the number of remaining games in season 3 (autumn of the first year) in the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R940 (the final game of the first summer of the NM2 state), the season counter is updated from 2 to 3, and even when the game R939 starts, the previous game R940 The settings are maintained. Further, in the game R939, since the AT shift points were added by the AT shift point lottery in the NM2 state processing A, the AT shift points are updated to the values after the addition.

In this game R939, although not shown, the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "Autumn of the first year" corresponding to the seasonal counter 3, and the seasonal effect SE is related to whether or not to shift to the AT1 state. The production is performed, and the number of remaining games is displayed as the RG including the characters "19G" indicating that the remaining games in season 3 (autumn of the first year) are 19 games.

In the game (game R920) having a high navigation state counter of 920 shown in FIG. 180, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 920, and the number of remaining games in season 3 (autumn of the first year) of the NM2 state is 0. (The final game of Season 3 (Autumn of the 1st year) in the NM2 state).

In this game R920, although not shown, the remaining games in season 3 (autumn of the first year) are 0 games as the remaining game number display RG while continuing the seasonal display SD and seasonal production SE of the game R939. A display including the character "0G" indicating that is performed. Further, in the game R920, in the NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable, 1 is added to the seasonal counter. In this example, Since the value of the seasonal counter is 3 and the value of the developing season is 5, 1 is added to the seasonal counter and the seasonal counter is updated to 4 which represents the winter of the first year.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 1: Season 2 (1st year winter)>
The game (game R919) in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 181 is 919 is the first game immediately after the transition from season 3 (first year autumn) to season 4 (first year winter) of cycle 1 in the NM2 state. Therefore, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 919, and the number of remaining games in season 4 (winter of the first year) in the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R920 (the final game of the first autumn of the NM2 state), the season counter is updated from 3 to 4, and even when the game R919 starts, the previous game R920 The settings are maintained. Further, in the game R919, since the AT transition points were added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state processing A, the AT transition points are updated to the added values.

In this game R919, although not shown, the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "1st year winter" corresponding to the seasonal counter 3, and the seasonal effect SE is related to whether or not to shift to the AT1 state. The production is performed, and the number of remaining games is displayed as the RG including the characters "19G" indicating that the remaining games in season 4 (winter of the first year) are 19 games.

In the game (game R900) having a high navigation state counter of 900 shown in FIG. 181, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 900, and the number of remaining games in season 4 (winter of the first year) in the NM2 state is 0. This is a game (the final game of Season 4 (winter of the first year) in the NM2 state).

In this game R900, although not shown, the remaining games in season 4 (winter of the first year) are 0 games as the remaining number of games display RG while continuing the seasonal display SD and seasonal production SE of the game R919. A display including the character "0G" indicating that is performed. Further, in the game R900, in the NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable, 1 is added to the seasonal counter. In this example, Since the value of the seasonal counter is 4 and the value of the developing season is 5, 1 is added to the seasonal counter and the seasonal counter is updated to 5 which represents the spring of the second year.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 1: Season 2 (Spring 2nd year)>
The game (game R899) having a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 181 is the first game immediately after the transition from season 4 (first year winter) to season 5 (second year spring) of cycle 1 in the NM2 state. Therefore, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 899, and the number of remaining games in season 5 (spring of the second year) in the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R900 (the final game of the first winter of the NM2 state), the season counter is updated from 4 to 5, and even when the game R899 starts, the previous game R900 The settings are maintained. Further, in the game R899, since the AT transition points were added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state processing A, the AT transition points are updated to the added values.

In this game R899, although not shown, the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "spring of the second year" corresponding to the seasonal counter 5, and the seasonal effect SE is related to whether or not to shift to the AT1 state. The production is performed, and as the remaining game number display RG, a display including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games in season 5 (spring of the second year) is 19 games is performed.

In the game (game R880) having a high navigation state counter of 880 shown in FIG. 181, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 880, and the number of remaining games in season 5 (spring of the second year) of the NM2 state is 0. This is a game (the final game of Season 5 (Spring of the second year) in the NM2 state).

In this game R880, as shown by the reference numeral R880 in FIG. 183 (a), while continuing the seasonal display SD and the seasonal production SE of the game 900, the remaining number of games display RG is the rest of season 5 (spring of the second year). Display including the character "0G" indicating that the game of is 0 game. Further, in the game R880, in the NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable, 1 is added to the seasonal counter. In this example, Since the value of the seasonal counter is 5 and the value of the developing season is 5, the seasonal counter is not updated. Further, in the game R880, after setting the number of judge games (9 in this example) determined by the number of judge games lottery in the effect state counter, the setting is made to shift the NM2 state to the NM3 state.

<Normal state (NM3 state)>
The game (game R879) with the high navigation state counter 879 shown in FIG. 181 is the first game immediately after the transition from season 5 (spring of the second year) of the cycle 1 of the NM2 state to the NM3 state, and is the high navigation state. The number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 879, and the number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 9.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R880 (the final game of the second spring of the NM2 state), the season counter is maintained at 5, and the setting of the previous game R880 is maintained even at the start of the game R879. Has been done.

In this game R879, as shown by the reference numeral R879 in FIG. 183 (a), the seasonal display SD includes the characters "spring of the second year" corresponding to the seasonal counter 5, and the current production state (book). In the example, a judge effect JE suggesting (NM3 state) is performed.

The game (game R870) having a high navigation state counter of 870 shown in FIG. 181 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 870 and the number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 0 (final game in the NM3 state). is there.

In this game R870, although not shown, the seasonal display SD and the judge effect JE of the game 870 will be continued. Further, in the game R870, in the NM3 state process B, 1 is added to the cycle counter and updated to 2, and then in the cycle start setting process, "cycle type A" is selected based on the scenario number (5) and the cycle (2). Select. In addition, in the cycle start setting process, "1st year spring (1)" is selected based on the cycle type (low) by the development season lottery, and the AT transferable points are determined to 900 by the AT transferable point lottery. There is.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 2: Season 1 (Spring 1st year)>
The game (game R869) in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 180 is 869 is the first game immediately after the transition from the NM3 state to the season 1 (spring of the first year) of the cycle 2 of the NM2 state, and is the high navigation state. The number of remaining games in the NM2 state is 869, and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) of the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), "cycle type A" was selected based on the scenario number (5) and the cycle (2) by the cycle type setting. Therefore, a numerical value (for example, 2) corresponding to this is set, and the setting of the previous game R870 is maintained even at the start of the game R869.

Further, in the season start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), "low" was selected as the season type by the season type setting, so a numerical value (for example, 0) corresponding to this is set. Even when the game R869 is started, the setting of the previous game R870 is maintained. In addition, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), "second year winter (8)" was selected based on the cycle type (low) by the development season lottery. The numerical value (8) corresponding to is set, and the setting of the previous game R870 is maintained even at the start of the game R869.

In this way, in cycle 2, "winter of the second year (8)" is selected as the development season, and there are more seasons than the development season of cycle 1, "spring of the second year (5)" (the number of games played). As a result, it is easier to obtain AT possible points in cycle 2 than in cycle 1 (because there are many), and as a result, the probability of shifting to AT is high. That is, with respect to the possibility of shifting to AT, cycle 2 is more advantageous than cycle 1.

Further, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), the AT transferable points were determined to be 900 by the AT transferable point lottery, so a numerical value (900) corresponding to this was set. Therefore, even when the game R869 is started, the setting of the previous game R870 is maintained. Further, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R870 (the final game in the NM3 state), the initial value (1) is set in the season counter, and the setting of the previous game R870 is maintained even at the start of the game R869. ing.

In the game R869, since the AT transition points were added by the AT transition point lottery in the NM2 state processing A, the AT transition points are updated to the added values.

Further, in the game R869, as shown by the reference numeral R869 in FIG. 183 (a), the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1, and the AT1 is used as the seasonal effect SE. A production regarding whether or not to shift to the state is performed, and as the remaining game number display RG, a display including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) is 19 games is performed. There is.

In the game (game R850) having a high navigation state counter of 850 shown in FIG. 181, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 850, and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) of the NM2 state is 0. (The final game of Season 1 (Spring 1st year) in NM2 state).

In addition, the following normal state (NM2 state) cycle 2 season 2 (1st year summer), season 3 (1st year autumn), season 4 (1st year winter), season 5 (2nd year spring), The explanation of the counter update in season 6 (summer of the second year) and season 7 (autumn of the second year) is omitted, and the explanation is resumed from season 8 (winter of the second year) shown in FIG. 182.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 2: Season 8 (2nd year winter)>
The game (game R729) having a high navigation state counter of 729 shown in FIG. 182 is the first game immediately after the transition from season 7 (autumn of the second year) of cycle 2 of the NM2 state to season 8 (winter of the second year). Therefore, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 729, and the number of remaining games in the NM2 state of season 8 (winter of the second year) is 19.

Further, in the game (game R724) having the high navigation state counter of 724 shown in FIG. 182, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 724, and the number of remaining games in the NM2 state season 8 (winter of the second year) is 14. It is a game of.

In the NM2 state, in the NM2 state processing A, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT transition point is equal to or greater than the value of the AT transition possible point, and if applicable, the AT transition reservation flag is set to on. In R724, since the value of the AT shift point is 905 and the value of the AT shift possible point is 900 or more, the AT shift reservation flag is set to ON.

In the game (game R710) having a high navigation state counter of 710 shown in FIG. 182, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 710, and the number of remaining games in the NM2 state season 8 (winter of the second year) is 0. (The final game of Season 8 (winter of the second year) in the NM2 state).

In this game R710, as shown by the reference numeral R710 in FIG. 183 (a), the remaining games of season 8 (winter of the second year) are used as the remaining game number display RG while continuing the seasonal display SD and the seasonal production SE. A display including the character "0G" indicating that the game is 0 is performed. Further, in the game R710, in the NM2 state processing B, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable, 1 is added to the seasonal counter. In this example, Since the value of the seasonal counter is 8 and the value of the developing season is 8, the seasonal counter is not updated. Further, here, after setting the number of judge games (9 in this example) determined by the number of judge games lottery in the effect state counter, the setting is made to shift the NM2 state to the NM3 state.

<Normal state (NM3 state)>
The game (game R709) with the high navigation state counter 709 shown in FIG. 182 is the first game immediately after the transition from the season 8 (winter of the second year) of the cycle 2 of the NM2 state to the NM3 state, and is the high navigation state. The number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 709, and the number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 9.

Here, in the NM2 state processing B of the previous game R710 (the final game of the second winter of the NM2 state), the season counter is maintained at 8, and the setting of the previous game R710 is also set at the start of the game R709. It is maintained.

In this game R709, as shown by the reference numeral R709 in FIG. 183 (a), the seasonal display SD includes the characters "winter of the second year" corresponding to the seasonal counter 8, and the current production state (book). In the example, a judge effect JE suggesting (NM3 state) is performed.

The game (game R700) having a high navigation state counter of 700 shown in FIG. 181 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 700 and the number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 0 (final game in the NM3 state). ..

In this game R700, although not shown, the seasonal display SD and the judge effect JE of the game R709 will be continued. Further, in the game R700, since the AT transition reservation flag is on in the NM3 state processing B, a setting is made to shift the NM3 state to the finalized notification state.

<Confirmed notification status>
The game (game R699) having a high navigation state counter of 699 shown in FIG. 182 is the first game immediately after the transition from the NM3 state to the final notification state, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 699. ..

In the finalized notification state after this game R699, if the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is the "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10" of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is determined. When is high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is the "re-game combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" of the condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, if applicable, a lottery is performed for the number of AT sets, the number of AT sets (the number of executions of the AT1 state and the AT2 state) is determined using the lottery value, etc., and the final notification state is shifted to the AT1 state. Make settings.

Further, in the game R699, as shown by the reference numeral R699 in FIG. 183 (a), a definite notification effect KE suggesting the current effect state (in this example, the definite notification state) is performed.

<AT1 state>
The game having a high navigation state counter of 689 (game R689) shown in FIG. 182 is the first game immediately after the transition from the final notification state to the AT1 state, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 689. ..

In the game R689, as shown by the reference numeral R689 in FIG. 183 (a), an AT1 effect AE suggesting the current effect state (AT1 state in this example) is performed, and AT is started.

<Specific production mode>
Next, the specific effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (b). FIG. 183 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a certain effect executed in the specific effect mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 183 (b), when the effect state shifts in the order of the normal game state → NM1 state → NM2 state, the specific effect mode is set from the normal game state to the NM1 state. In this specific effect mode, a certain effect RE (in this example, an effect including an image in which the character of the palace is sitting on a sandy beach) that does not suggest an advantageous state (high navigation state) is executed, and the advantageous state is set. The advantageous state notification means (in this example, the advantageous section lamp composed of LEDs) to be notified is turned off.

According to this example, by providing a specific effect mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the transition from the normal game state to the advantageous state, so that the player does not realize that the normal game state is prolonged and there is no chance. Can be. The number of games in the NM1 state is not particularly limited and may be fixed or variable, but if it is variable, it is more difficult for the player to understand the transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous state. can do.

Further, in this example, when the NM1 state ends and the state shifts to the NM2 state, the specific effect mode is ended, and the suggestion effect SE (this example) suggesting that the NM2 state is in an advantageous state (high navigation state). Then, the character string "Isn't it time yet?" Is displayed). The advantageous state notification means (in this example, the advantageous section lamp) is turned off (off) even during the period of the NM2 state, and then turned on (on) when the final notification state is entered.

<Example 2 of transition of production state>
Next, the transition example 2 of the effect state will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags, various displays and effects in the transition example 2 of the effect state in chronological order. Here, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, only the points different from the production state transition example 1 described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183 will be described.

In this example, the production state is high navigation state (AT2 state) → low navigation state (normal game state) → high navigation state (normal state) → low navigation state (normal game state) → high navigation state (normal state → confirmed) The transition is made in the order of notification state → AT1 state (low). In the normal state of the first high navigation state, after executing the NM1 state, the first set game of the cycle 1 (NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season 5) → NM3 state) is executed. In the subsequent normal state of the high navigation state, after executing the NM1 state, the second set game of the cycle 1 (NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season 5) → NM3 state) is executed. ..

<Season 1 (Spring 1st year) in normal state (NM2 state)>
The game (game R979) in which the high navigation state counter in the first set game shown in FIG. 184 is 979 is the first game immediately after the transition from the NM1 state in the normal state to the season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state. The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 979, and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the NM1 state processing B of the previous game R980 (the final game of the NM1 state), since the scenario 8 was selected by the high navigation state scenario lottery, the scenario number (8) corresponding to this scenario 8 is set. Even when the game R979 starts, the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained. Further, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "cycle type C" was selected based on the scenario number (8) and the cycle (1) by the cycle type setting. , A numerical value (for example, 0) corresponding to this is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

Further, in the game R979, as shown by the reference numeral R979 in FIG. 184, the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1, and the game shifts to the AT1 state as the seasonal effect SE. The effect of whether or not to play is performed, and the number of remaining games is displayed as the RG including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games of season 1 (spring of the first year) are 19 games.

<Normal state (NM3 state)>
In the game (game R870) having a high navigation state counter of 870 in the first set game shown in FIG. 184, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 870, and the number of remaining games in the NM3 state is 0 (NM3). The final game of the state).

In this game R870, in the NM3 state processing B, it is determined whether or not it is a high navigation state reset scenario (in this example, a scenario corresponding to scenario number 8 or 9), but in this example, scenario 8 is set. Therefore, it is determined that the scenario is a high navigation state reset scenario, and the high navigation state end wait flag is turned on. By turning on the high navigation state end standby flag, in the high navigation state end process described with reference to FIG. 141, the high navigation state lamp 190 is turned off and the AT system game state is set to the low navigation state (normal mode). ), And various flags and counters used for transition control in the high navigation state are initialized.

<Season 1 (Spring 1st year) in normal state (NM2 state)>
The game (game R979) in which the high navigation state counter in the second set game shown in FIG. 184 is 979 is the first game immediately after the transition from the NM1 state in the normal state to the season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state. The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 979, and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the NM1 state processing B of the previous game R980 (the final game of the NM1 state), since the scenario 9 was selected by the high navigation state scenario lottery, the scenario number (9) corresponding to this scenario 9 is set. Even when the game R979 starts, the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained. Further, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), "cycle type A" was selected based on the scenario number (9) and the cycle (1) by the cycle type setting. , A numerical value (for example, 2) corresponding to this is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

Further, in the game R979, as shown by the reference numeral R979 (2) in FIG. 184, the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1, and the AT1 is used as the seasonal effect SE. A production regarding whether or not to shift to the state is performed, and as the remaining game number display RG, a display including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) is 19 games is performed. There is.

The subsequent processing is the same as the effect state transition example 1 described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183, and the effect state shifts in the order of NM2 state → NM3 state → finalized notification state → AT1 state.

<Example 3 of transition of production state>
Next, the transition example 3 of the effect state will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags, various displays and effects in the transition example 3 of the effect state in chronological order. Here, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, only the points different from the production state transition example 1 described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183 will be described.

In this example, the effect state shifts in the order of high navigation state (AT2 state) → low navigation state (normal game state) → high navigation state (normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state (low)). Further, in the normal state of the high navigation state, after executing the NM1 state, the set game of the cycle 1 (NM2 state (season 1 → ... → season 5) → NM3 state) is started, but one game of the NM2 state. The AT transition reservation flag is set to on in the eyes.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 1: Season 1 (Spring 1st year)>
The game (game R979) in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 185 is 979 is the first game immediately after the transition from the NM1 state in the normal state to the season 1 (spring of the first year) of the cycle 1 in the NM2 state. The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 979, and the number of remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) in the NM2 state is 19.

Here, in the NM1 state processing B of the previous game R980 (the final game of the NM1 state), since the scenario 10 was selected by the high navigation state scenario lottery, the scenario number (10) corresponding to this scenario 10 is set. Even when the game R979 starts, the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained. Further, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), the "cycle type S" (AT confirmation scenario) is set based on the scenario number (10) and the cycle (1) by the cycle type setting. Since it has been selected, a numerical value (for example, 3) corresponding to this is set, and the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained even at the start of the game R979.

Further, in the cycle start setting process of the previous game R980 (the final game in the NM1 state), it is determined that the cycle counter matches the AT winning cycle (cycle type S in this example), and the AT shiftable point is set to 0. Even when the game R979 is started, the setting of the previous game R980 is maintained.

In the NM2 state processing A of the game R979, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the AT transition point is equal to or greater than the numerical value of the AT transition possible point, and if applicable, the AT transition reservation flag is turned on. , Since the numerical value of the AT transferable point is set to 0, the AT transfer reservation flag is set to ON.

Further, in the game R979, as shown by the reference numeral R979 in FIG. 183 (a), the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1, and the AT1 is used as the seasonal effect SE. A production regarding whether or not to shift to the state is performed, and as the remaining game number display RG, a display including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) is 19 games is performed. There is.

The processing after the AT transition reservation flag is set to ON is the same as the transition example 1 of the effect state described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183, and the effect state is NM2 state → NM3 state → final notification. The transition is made in the order of state → AT1 state.

<Example 4 of transition of production state>
Next, the transition example 4 of the effect state will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags, various displays and effects in the transition example 4 of the effect state in chronological order. Here, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, only the points different from the production state transition example 1 described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183 will be described.

In this example, the effect state shifts in the order of high navigation state (AT2 state) → low navigation state (normal game state) → high navigation state (normal state → AT1 state (low)). Further, since the value of the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example) in the normal state in the high navigation state, the normal state is shifted to the AT1 state.

<Normal state (NM2 state) cycle 6: Season 1 (Spring 1st year)>
In the normal state processing B in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 186 is 429 (game R429), it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example), but in this example, it is determined. Since the value of the cycle counter is 6, it is determined that the cycle counter has exceeded the ceiling cycle value (reached the ceiling), and in the AT1 start setting process, the lottery result (AT1 game number) of the AT1 initial number lottery is obtained. , After setting the effect state counter as the AT1 initial value, the AT1 state is set to the effect state. As a result, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the AT1 state.

Further, in the game R429, as shown by the reference numeral R429 in FIG. 186, the seasonal display SD is displayed including the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1, and the transition to AT is performed as the seasonal effect SE. As the remaining game number display RG, a display including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games in season 1 (spring of the first year) is 19 games is performed.

<AT1 state>
The game having a high navigation state counter of 428 (game R428) shown in FIG. 186 is the first game immediately after the transition from the normal state to the AT1 state, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 428.

In the game R428, as shown by reference numeral R428 in FIG. 186, the AT1 effect AE suggesting the current effect state (AT1 state in this example) is performed, and the AT is started. When the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (reaches the ceiling), the final notification effect state is not entered. Therefore, the AT1 type is set to low, and AT is started from the AT1 state (low). To.

<Example 5 of transition of production state>
Next, the transition example 5 of the effect state will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags, various displays and effects in the transition example 5 of the effect state in chronological order.
In this example, since the CZ transition lottery was won in the NM2 state in the normal state, the transition to the CZ state is performed during a certain number of games (10 games in this example). In the CZ state, the number of games remaining in the NM2 state is not subtracted.

In the NM2 state processing A in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 187 is 724 (game R724), the CZ transition lottery was won, so the number of precursor games (4 games in this example) determined by the lottery is set as the precursor counter. At the same time, the precursor flag is set to on.

Subsequently, in the NM2 state process B in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 187 is 720 (game R720), since the precursor counter becomes 0, the CZ state start setting process is started, and in this CZ state start setting process, , The number of CZ games determined by the lottery (10 games in this example) is set in the CZ counter and the CZ state flag is set to ON.

Subsequently, in the NM2 state processing A in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 187 is 719 (game R719), since the CZ state flag is on, the effect state counter is not subtracted (the number of remaining games in the NM2 state). CZ state processing A is executed, and in this CZ state processing A, the CZ counter is subtracted and the CZ point addition lottery is performed, and the lottery result is added to the CZ points.

Further, in the game R719, as shown by the reference numeral R719 in FIG. 187, a display including the character "9G remaining" indicating that the remaining games in the CZ state are 9 games and the current production state (in this example, the current production state). A CZ effect CE suggesting (CZ state) and a display including the characters "CZPT: 110" indicating that the CZ point is 110 points are displayed.

Subsequently, in the NM2 state processing B whose high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 187 is 710 (game R710), since the CZ state flag is on, the CZ state processing B is executed, and in this CZ state processing B, the CZ Since the counter is 0, the CZ state flag is set to off and the CZ point is converted to the AT transition point.

Subsequently, in the NM2 state processing A in which the high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 187 is 709 (game R709), it is determined whether or not the value of the AT shift point is equal to or greater than the value of the AT shiftable point, and if applicable. However, in the game R709, the AT transition reservation flag is set to ON, and since the AT transition point value is 920 and the AT transition possible point value is 900 or more, the AT transition reservation flag is set to ON. There is.

In this example, even if the transition condition to AT is satisfied in the CZ state, the transition to AT is not performed until the CZ counter becomes 0 (until the CZ state ends). In this example, it is configured to return to the NM2 state when the CZ state ends, but it may be configured to shift to the finalized notification state. Further, the AT transition lottery may be performed in the CZ state, and the transition to the final notification state may be made only when the lottery is won. For example, the production state counter shifts to the CZ state when the counter is 0, and , The final notification state may be set only when the AT transition lottery is won in the CZ state.

<Other Examples>
Next, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189.

FIG. 188 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the transition of the effect state. In the example shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and (1), a set game composed of cycle 1, cycle 2, cycle 3, cycle 4, and cycle 5 is executed over the X (X is a positive integer) game, and FIG. 188 is shown. (A) In the example shown in (2), a set game composed of period 1, period 1, and period 1 is executed over a Y (Y is a positive integer smaller than X) game. Here, the cycle 1 is a cycle that is also set when scenarios 8 and 9 (high navigation state reset scenario) and scenario 10 (AT confirmation scenario) are selected by the lottery for determining the high navigation state scenario.

In the example shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (2), scenarios 8 and 9 (high navigation state reset scenario) were selected in the first cycle 1, and therefore, as described in <Production state transition example 2>. In addition, by setting the AT system game state to the low navigation state (normal game state), the game shifts to the low navigation state, and in the second cycle 1 of the transition to the high navigation state, scenarios 8 and 9 (high navigation state reset). Since the scenario) was selected, the scenario 10 (AT confirmed scenario) was selected in the third cycle 1 of the transition to the high navigation state after the transition to the low navigation state again. As described in Transition Example 3>, the state has shifted to the AT1 state.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (2), a process of shifting from the high navigation state to the low navigation state and initializing various flags and counters used for the transition control of the high navigation state was performed. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to feel the ceiling (upper limit of the number of games) in the high navigation state as compared with the example shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and (1).

FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing a modified example of the transition example 3 of the effect state described with reference to FIG. 185.
In the effect state transition example 3 shown in FIG. 185, when the cycle type S is set in the cycle type setting of the cycle start setting process, an example of shifting from the normal state to the finalized notification state is shown. As shown in b), after performing the seasonal effect SE suggesting the transition to AT in the normal state, the transition to the final notification state may be performed (or the transition to the final notification state may be always performed. ).

FIG. 188 (c) is a diagram showing a modified example of the specific effect mode described with reference to FIG. 183 (b).
In this example, in at least a part of the games in the normal gaming state in the specific effect mode, the first suggestion effect RE is enabled but the second suggestion effect SE is not executed, and the specific effect mode is set. In the normal state (NM1 state, NM2 state, NM3 state), both the first suggestion effect RE and the second suggestion effect SE can be executed.

Here, the first suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the granting of the first privilege, and in this example, the first suggestion effect RE (including an image in which the character of the palace is sitting on the sandy beach is included. The first privilege (suggestion of set value) is suggested by the effect. Further, the second suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the granting of the second privilege, and in this example, the second suggestion effect SE (including the display of the character string "isn't it time yet?" The suggestion effect) suggests the granting of the second privilege (AT).

According to this example, since the first suggestion effect RE can be executed in both at least a part of the game in the normal game state in the specific effect mode and the normal state in the specific effect mode, the normal game state is changed to the advantageous state. The transition can be obscured by the player, and the normal playing state can be prolonged and not realized that there is no chance. If the number of games for executing the second suggestion effect is made variable, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the transition from the normal gaming state to the advantageous state.

FIG. 189 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the display.
In this example, the history of the executed cycle is stored in the storage means, and the effect image display device 157 is used to display the history of the cycle, for example, cycle 1, cycle 5, ... doing.

According to this example, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of the transition to AT based on the contents of the cycles executed in the past, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the player. In the above embodiment, the remaining number of games and AT transition points in each production state are shown numerically, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining number of games and AT transition points are suggested by colors, symbols, and the like. You may. As for the AT transition point, for example, the AT transition point effect table shown in FIG. 160 (c) is used to determine the effect mode of the effect to be executed, and the AT transition point is displayed instead of displaying the AT transition point. You may perform a suggestive effect.

FIG. 189 (b) is a diagram showing a modified example of the suggestion effect.
In this example, when a high navigation state reset scenario (scenarios 8 and 9 in this example) is selected as one of the suggestion effects, the reset scenario suggestion effect RSE suggesting that fact is configured to be executable. There is.

According to this example, when the high navigation state reset scenario is selected, the reset scenario suggestion effect RSE is executed. Therefore, as compared with the case where the high navigation state reset scenario is not selected, other suggestion effects ( For example, the execution frequency of the setting effect that suggests the set value and the development season effect that suggests the development season is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the reset scenario may have been selected depending on the execution frequency of other suggestion effects.

<Invention 5 of the present application>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 5-1”) is shown in the operating means (for example, FIG. 108). Stop button 137 to 139) and any of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)). A game console including a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 110) for shifting to the above state, and operating information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 115). Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the operation navigation used, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 143 (b), etc.) can be notified. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when the advantageous state end condition is satisfied. The advantageous state end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000), and is the first condition in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states including an advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and the first advantageous game state is described above. The second advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and in the first advantageous gaming state, a set game capable of executing a predetermined number of games is performed a plurality of times. It is configured to be feasible, and in the first advantageous gaming state, an effect relating to whether or not to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the seasonal effect SE shown in FIG. 183 (a)) can be executed. It is configured so that it is possible to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state after the set game, and it is executed after shifting to the first advantageous gaming state. Set game (hereinafter referred to as "first set game". For example, the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b), and the high navigation state (normal state) shown in FIGS. 180 to 181. When the game does not shift to the second advantageous game state after the game of the cycle 1), the next set game (hereinafter referred to as “second set game”. For example, the second set shown in FIG. 190 (a)). Games SET2, the case where the high navigation state (normal state) cycle 2 game shown in FIGS. 181 to 182) can be executed (for example, the first set game SET1 to the second set shown in FIG. 190 (a)). When shifting to the set game SET2, or when shifting from the high navigation state (normal state) cycle 1 to cycle 2 as shown in FIG. 181), and the first set game without making the second set game feasible. When the advantageous gaming state can be shifted to the normal gaming state (for example, when shifting from the first set game SET1 to the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 190 (b), or when the high navigation state (normal) shown in FIG. 184 is enabled. It is configured so that there is a transition from a state) to a low navigation (normal game state), and the first set game is more related to the second advantageous game state than the second set game. The first privilege (for example, the privilege of increasing the number of initial games of AT, the privilege of increasing the number of additional games of AT, and the privilege of increasing the winning probability of the additional lottery of AT) is configured to be easily given. It is a game table characterized by. Note that FIG. 190 is a diagram showing an outline of the present inventions 5-1 to 5-2.

In other words, the game console according to the present invention 5-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) has an effect means (for example, an effect image display device 157) and an operation means (for example, a stop button shown in FIG. 108). 137 to 139) and any one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)). A state setting means capable of setting a state (for example, an effect state control process A or an effect state control process B shown in FIG. 117) and an advantageous state control means capable of executing control related to the advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 124). A game console including high navigation state processing A, high navigation state processing B shown in FIG. 133, and the like, and the effect means is an operation information of the operation means (for example, a payout number display shown in FIG. 115). Information capable of identifying the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the operation navigation using the device 127, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 143 (b), etc.) can be notified. The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the state setting means ends the setting of the advantageous state when the advantageous state end condition is satisfied. The normal state can be set, and the advantageous state end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000). In the advantageous state, the advantageous state control means is among a plurality of advantageous gaming states including a first advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). It is a means capable of executing control to shift to any of the states, and the second advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and is advantageous. The state control means is a means capable of executing a set game capable of executing a predetermined number of games a plurality of times in the first advantageous game state, and the effect means is a means capable of executing the set game a plurality of times, and the effect means is the means in the first advantageous game state. It is a means capable of executing an effect relating to whether or not to shift to the second advantageous game state (for example, the seasonal effect SE shown in FIG. 183 (a)), and the advantageous state control means is the first after the set game. It is a means capable of executing control to shift from one advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state, and the set game executed after shifting to the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as , "First set game". For example, after the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) and the game of period 1 in the high navigation state (normal state) shown in FIGS. 180 to 181), the second advantageous game state In the case of not shifting to, the next set game (hereinafter referred to as “second set game”. For example, the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 190 (a), the high navigation state shown in FIGS. 181 to 182). The case where the (normal state) cycle 2 game) can be executed (for example, the case of shifting from the first set game SET1 to the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 190 (a), or the case shown in FIG. 181. , When shifting from cycle 1 to cycle 2 in the high navigation state (normal state)) and when making it possible to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state without making the second set game executable. (For example, the case of shifting from the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. 190 (b) to the normal game state, or the transition from the high navigation state (normal state) to the low navigation state (normal game state) shown in FIG. 184. The first set game is configured to have a case), and the first set game has a first privilege regarding the second advantageous game state (for example, the initial number of games of AT) than the second set game. It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so that a large number of benefits, a privilege of increasing the number of additional games of AT, and a privilege of increasing the winning probability of an additional lottery of AT) can be easily given.

According to the game table according to the invention 5-1 of the present application, the player does not have to worry about the upper limit number of times in the advantageous state, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from diminishing after the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state. Can be done. Further, since the first advantageous gaming state may shift to the normal state, it is easy to determine when the game is stopped, and the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, it is possible to expand the options of how to proceed with the game (strategy), such as deciding the number of times to aim at a certain game section, stopping the game when a certain game section ends and the advantageous state does not end, and improving the game playability. Can be enhanced.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 5-2”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 108). 139) and any of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)). A game console including a control means to be transferred (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 110), and an operation navigation using the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 115). , Information that can identify the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel, such as the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 143 (b), etc.) can be notified. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when the advantageous state end condition is satisfied. The state end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000), and in the advantageous state, the first advantageous gaming state (for example, 1000). For example, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states including a normal state) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is more than the first advantageous gaming state. The second advantageous gaming state is a state that is more advantageous with respect to the notification of the operation information, and in the first advantageous gaming state, a set game that can execute a predetermined number of games can be executed a plurality of times. In the first advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute an effect relating to whether or not to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the suggestion effect (seasonal effect) SE shown in FIG. 183 (a)). It is configured so that it is possible to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state after the set game, and it is executed after shifting to the first advantageous gaming state. Set game (hereinafter referred to as "first set game". For example, the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b), and the high navigation state (normal state) shown in FIGS. 180 to 181. When the game does not shift to the second advantageous game state after the game of the cycle 1), the next set game (hereinafter referred to as “second set game”. For example, the second set shown in FIG. 190 (a)). Game S ET2, the case of enabling the high navigation state (normal state) cycle 2 game shown in FIGS. 181 to 182 (for example, the first set game SET1 to the second set shown in FIG. 190 (a)) When shifting to the set game SET2, or when shifting from the high navigation state (normal state) cycle 1 to cycle 2 as shown in FIG. 181), and the first set game without making the second set game feasible. When it is possible to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the normal state (for example, when shifting from the first set game SET1 to the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 190 (b), or when shifting to the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 184, the high navigation state (normal) It is configured so that there is a transition from a state) to a low navigation (normal game state), and the first set game is more related to the second advantageous game state than the second set game. It is configured so that the first privilege (for example, AT) can be easily granted, and for each set game, any one of a plurality of set game states relating to the expectation of granting the second privilege is set. It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so that it can be set.

In other words, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention 5-2 has an effect means (for example, an effect image display device 157) and an operation means (for example, a stop button shown in FIG. 108). 137 to 139) and any one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 113 (b)). A state setting means capable of setting a state (for example, an effect state control process A or an effect state control process B shown in FIG. 117) and an advantageous state control means capable of executing control related to the advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 124). A game console including high navigation state processing A, high navigation state processing B shown in FIG. 133, and the like, and the effect means is an operation information of the operation means (for example, a payout number display shown in FIG. 115). Information capable of identifying the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the operation navigation using the device 127, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 143 (b), etc.) can be notified. The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the state setting means ends the setting of the advantageous state when the advantageous state end condition is satisfied. The normal state can be set, and the advantageous state end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000). In the advantageous state, the advantageous state control means is among a plurality of advantageous gaming states including a first advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). It is a means capable of executing control to shift to any of the states, and the second advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and is advantageous. The state control means is a means capable of executing a set game capable of executing a predetermined number of games a plurality of times in the first advantageous game state, and the effect means is a means capable of executing the set game a plurality of times, and the effect means is the means in the first advantageous game state. It is a means capable of executing an effect relating to whether or not to shift to the second advantageous game state (for example, the seasonal effect SE shown in FIG. 183 (a)), and the advantageous state control means is the first after the set game. It is a means capable of executing control to shift from one advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state, and the set game executed after shifting to the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as , "First set game". For example, after the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) and the game of period 1 in the high navigation state (normal state) shown in FIGS. 180 to 181), the second advantageous game state In the case of not shifting to, the next set game (hereinafter referred to as “second set game”. For example, the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 190 (a), the high navigation state shown in FIGS. 181 to 182). The case where the (normal state) cycle 2 game) can be executed (for example, the case of shifting from the first set game SET1 to the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 190 (a), or the case shown in FIG. 181. , When shifting from cycle 1 to cycle 2 in the high navigation state (normal state)) and when making it possible to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state without making the second set game executable. (For example, the case of shifting from the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. 190 (b) to the normal game state, or the transition from the high navigation state (normal state) to the low navigation state (normal game state) shown in FIG. 184. The first set game is configured to have a case), and the first set game has a first privilege regarding the second advantageous game state (for example, the initial number of games of AT) than the second set game. It is configured so that a large number of benefits, a privilege that increases the number of additional AT games, and a privilege that increases the probability of winning the additional AT lottery) can be easily granted, and a second privilege is granted for each set game. It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so that any one of a plurality of set game states related to the degree of expectation can be set.

According to the game table according to the invention 5-2 of the present application, the player does not have to worry about the upper limit number of times in the advantageous state, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from diminishing after the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state. Can be done. Further, since the first advantageous gaming state may shift to the normal state, it is easy to determine when the game is stopped, and the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, it is possible to expand the options of how to proceed with the game (strategy), such as deciding the number of times to aim at a certain game section, stopping the game when a certain game section ends and the advantageous state does not end, and improving the game playability. Can be enhanced.

The game console according to the present invention 5-1 and the present invention 5-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "second advantageous gaming state" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT1 state, but may be another production state such as a finalized notification state, and whether or not to grant an AT. It may be in a state of performing a lottery, a game, or the like.

Further, the "set game" according to the present invention is not limited to the set game composed of the NM2 state and the NM3 state (judgment state), and may be composed only of the NM2 state, for example, the NM1 state and the NM2 state. , And NM3 state (judgment state), NM2 state, NM3 state (judgment state), CZ state, or only the judge state. Further, the number of games that can be executed in the "set game" is not particularly limited, and may be a fixed value or a variable value (for example, a numerical value determined by a lottery or the like). Further, even when the set game is configured in the NM2 state and the NM3 state (judgment state), the NM3 state is changed from the NM2 state via a certain other state (a state composed of one or more games). It may be configured to shift to the (judgment state), and in this case, the number of games played in another certain state is not particularly limited and may be a fixed value or a variable value (for example, determined by a lottery or the like). Numerical value) may be used.

Further, "the transition from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state is possible" means "from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state via a certain gaming state". It is also included that "it is possible to shift", and "it is possible to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state" means "from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state via a certain gaming state". It also includes being "migratorable".

Further, instead of the configuration of "the second set game is configured to be able to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state without being executable", "the said After executing the second set game, it may be possible to shift from the first advantageous game state to the normal state. "

In addition, a second privilege related to the execution of the set game over the first specific number of times (for example, a privilege of unconditionally granting AT when the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (reaches the ceiling)). The first specific number of times may be two or more predetermined times (for example, 6).

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of security to a player who wants to receive a payout for the number of input media (investment) of the game medium. Further, when a player who plays a game aiming at a certain game section stops the game when the certain game section ends and the advantageous state does not end, the player aims at the second privilege (for example, the ceiling). Since it becomes easier to play a game, it becomes easier to select a game table, and by increasing the operating rate of the game table, it is possible to improve the profit of the game store.

Further, in the set game, the first specific condition can be satisfied, and the establishment of the first specific condition causes the fourth privilege (for example, the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (reaches the ceiling)). In this case, the privilege of granting AT unconditionally, the privilege of easily winning the AT transition lottery, and the privilege of easily winning the AT promotion lottery) may be granted.

Further, the second specific condition can be satisfied in connection with the execution of the set game over the first specific number of times, and even when the first specific condition is not satisfied, the first specific condition is satisfied. The second privilege may be granted by the establishment of the second specific condition.

Further, it may be configured so as not to shift from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state without giving an advantageous benefit including the second privilege.

With such a configuration, advantageous profits including the second benefit are always given when shifting to the normal state, so a game in which you want to receive payment for the number of input media (investment) of the game medium. It is possible to give a person a sense of security even more.

In addition, the third privilege (for example, the privilege that is easy to win the AT transition lottery, the privilege that is easy to win the AT promotion lottery, and the cycle counter exceed the ceiling cycle value in connection with the execution of the set game over the second specific number of times. (The privilege of granting AT unconditionally when reaching the ceiling) is configured to be grantable, and the second specific number of times may be less than the first specific number of times. ..

With such a configuration, a player who wants to play a game aiming at a certain game section and benefit from a second privilege (for example, the ceiling) can repeatedly shift from an advantageous state to a normal state. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from diminishing due to the feeling that it is difficult to give the second privilege (for example, the ceiling).

Further, the second specific number of times may be 1.

With such a configuration, a player who wants to play a game aiming at a certain game section and benefit from a second privilege (for example, the ceiling) can repeatedly shift from an advantageous state to a normal state. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from diminishing due to the feeling that it is difficult to give the second privilege (for example, the ceiling).

Further, the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is provided, and the effect control means can set a certain effect mode (for example, the specific effect mode described with reference to FIG. 183 (b)). The certain effect mode may be an effect mode that can be set over at least a part of the first set game after being started in the normal state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the normal state is prolonged and there is no chance.

Further, in the state in which the certain effect mode is set, the suggestion effect suggesting that the state has shifted to the advantageous state (for example, the suggestion effect SE shown in FIG. 183 (b) and the third effect shown in FIG. 188 (c)). The second suggestion effect SE) is configured not to be executed, and the suggestion effect may be enabled to be executed in a state where the certain effect mode is not set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state more difficult for the player to understand, and it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the normal state is prolonged and there is no chance.

In addition, the effect regarding whether or not to shift to the second advantageous gaming state may be configured to be feasible in the set gaming.

Further, in the set game, a certain kind of suggestion effect suggesting a certain game state (for example, the set scenario effect RSE shown in FIG. 189 (b)) can be executed, and the certain kind of suggestion effect The execution frequency of the above may be lower in the set games other than the first set game than in the first set game.

Further, for each set game, any one of a plurality of set game states related to the expected degree of granting of the second privilege can be set, and the first state is changed from the normal state. In connection with the transition to the advantageous gaming state of, the set gaming state pattern lottery (for example, the lottery using the lottery table for determining the high navigation state scenario shown in FIG. 159 (a)) can be executed. The set game state set for each set game may be uniquely determined based on the result (scenario) of the set game state pattern lottery.

Further, it is provided with an advantageous state notification means (for example, an advantageous state notification (advantageous section lamp composed of an LED) shown in FIG. 183 (b)) for notifying the player that the state has changed to an advantageous state, and the state has changed to the advantageous state. Even in this case, the notification by the advantageous state notification means may not be started.

Further, among the plurality of configurations described in the first to fifth embodiments, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further expand the range of the game. For example, the present invention. 1-1-1-9 (FIGS. 79 to 87), Inventions 2-1 to 2-3 (FIGS. 97 to 99), Inventions 3-1 to 2-3-2 (FIGS. 106 to 107), and the present application. Any one or more of the inventions 4-1 to 4-4 (FIGS. 154 to 157) and the inventions of the present application 5-1 to 5-2 (FIGS. 158 to 190) may be combined.

[Embodiment 6]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In the sixth embodiment, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first to fifth embodiments will be described. In principle, FIGS. 191 to 205 are used only for the description of the sixth embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the sixth embodiment is shown in FIGS. The code shown in 205 has priority.

<Type of game state>
As described with reference to FIG. 113 and the like, in the game console according to the above embodiment, until the special role 2 is internally elected in the re-game low probability state (RT1), a notification prompting a two-card betting game is performed. The two-card betting game is encouraged, and in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3), the notification for prompting the two-card betting game is terminated to encourage the three-card game.

On the other hand, in the game table according to the present embodiment, the game table is dedicated to the 3-card betting game, and in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the notification for prompting the 2-card betting game is not performed, and the special role 2 in the 3-card betting game is not performed. It is configured to shift to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) when the internal winning is made.

<Common processing for each game>
As described with reference to FIG. 122 (b) and the like, in the game console according to the above embodiment, whether or not the conditions for executing the high navigation state-related processing are satisfied in the common processing for each game (the game is: The recommended number of games (whether or not it is a three-card betting game) is determined, and if applicable, the processing prohibition flag is set to off.

On the other hand, in the game console according to the present embodiment, whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied in the common processing for each game (in the present embodiment, the game state of the game is RT2 or RT3. (Whether or not it is either) is determined, and if applicable, the processing prohibition flag is set to off, and if not applicable (in the present embodiment, the game state of the game is either RT1 or RT4). In case of), the processing prohibition flag is set to on. As a result, RT1 and RT4 are configured so that processing related to the high navigation state (for example, processing for updating various counters such as an effect state counter, a precursor counter, and a CZ counter) does not proceed (details are shown in FIG. 202). Will be described later).

<NM2 state processing A>
Next, NM2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the flow of the NM2 state processing A according to the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the NM2 state processing A described with reference to FIG. 166.

The NM2 state process A according to this example applies the process of step S1057 instead of the process of steps S1046 to S1048 in the NM2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 166. It is configured to perform the CZ precursor setting process described above.

<CZ precursor setting process>
Next, the CZ precursor setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (a). FIG. 192 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the CZ precursor setting process (step S1057) in the NM2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 191.

In step S2901, a lottery for the number of precursor games of this precursor is performed. In this precursor game number lottery (precursor), the number of precursor game games (precursor) to be executed before the start of the CZ state is performed by lottery using the CZ precursor game number determination table (precursor) shown in FIG. 192 (b). After determining the number of games), the process proceeds to step S2902. In the precursor game number lottery of this example, a lottery value is selected based on the acquired random number value (for example, 0 to 255), and the lottery result value corresponding to the selected lottery value (numerical value of 1 to 8 in this example). To get.

In step S2902, it is determined whether or not the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2904, and if not applicable (when the value of the seasonal counter = the value of the developing season, that is, , In the case of the final cycle), the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect status counter is equal to or greater than the lottery result value (value of the number of precursor games) of the precursor game number lottery, and if applicable (value of the effect status counter ≥ the number of precursor games). If it is a value), the process proceeds to step S2904, and if it is not applicable (when the value of the effect state counter <the value of the number of precursor games), the process proceeds to step S2905.

In step S2904, the lottery result value (value of the number of precursor games) of the precursor game number lottery is set in the precursor counter, and then the process proceeds to step S2906. In step S2905, the value of the effect state counter is set in the precursor counter, and then step S2906. Proceed to. In step S2906, the CZ precursor setting process ends after the precursor flag is set to on.

In the CZ precursor setting process of this example, in the final cycle, when the value of the effect state counter is less than the value of the number of precursor games, the value of the effect state counter is set in the precursor counter to set the CZ precursor to the rest of the final cycle. It is configured to run within the number of games in. Further, since the precursor counter starts subtraction after the next game, the number of games of the precursor game is the value of the precursor counter + 1 time. For example, when the value of the precursor counter is set to 1, the number of precursor games is set. Is 2 games (= 1 + 1).

Further, in this example, the larger the lottery result value (the number of precursor games) acquired by the lottery for the number of precursor games (precursor), the higher the possibility that a privilege advantageous to the player will be given (for example, CZ). The probability of transition to the state (CZ transition rate) is high). With such a configuration, even if the number of precursor games is small, there is a possibility that a privilege advantageous to the player is given, so that the player's willingness to play can be maintained in the precursor effect.

In this example, the main control unit 300 shows an example in which a lottery for the number of precursor games (this precursor) is performed, but another control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 or the like) receives from the main control unit 300. It may be configured to perform processing such as a lottery for the number of precursor games (main precursor) based on the game information (effect status counter, etc.) included in the command.

Further, when the configuration is such that a fake precursor effect (precursor) is executed, the first sub-control unit 400 is based on the game information (effect state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit 300. A lottery for the number of precursor games (precursor) is performed using the table for determining the number of CZ precursor games (precursor) shown in FIG. 192 (c), and the lottery value is selected based on the acquired random number value (for example, 0 to 255). Then, the lottery result value corresponding to the selected lottery value (in this example, the numerical value of 1 to 4 in the numerical range smaller than 1 to 8 of the precursor game number lottery (this precursor)) is acquired and the precursor game of the precursor game is lost. You can set it to a number. It should be noted that the lottery for the number of precursor games (precursor) may be configured to be performed by another control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 or the like).

<CZ state processing A>
Next, CZ state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the flow of the CZ state processing A according to the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the CZ state processing A described with reference to FIG. 167.

In the CZ state processing A according to this example, the processing of steps S1065 to S1066 is applied in addition to the CZ state processing A described with reference to FIG. 167. Specifically, in step S1065, it is determined whether or not the AT transition lottery has been won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1066 to set the AT transition reservation flag to ON, and if it is not won, the step Proceed to S1064.

That is, in the CZ state processing A according to this example, when the AT transition lottery is won, the effect state can be shifted from the CZ state to the AT (AT direct hit route is possible).

<Seasonal start setting process>
Next, the processes of steps S1942 to S1943 of the seasonal start setting process will be described again with reference to FIG. 174.

In step S1942, it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter is other than 0, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1943 to set the precursor counter to 1. Therefore, in the CZ precursor setting process described with reference to FIG. 192 (a), the cycle is other than the final cycle (in step S2902, it is determined that the value of the seasonal counter is smaller than the value of the developing season), and When a lottery result value (number of precursor games) larger than the value of the effect state counter is set in the precursor counter (when the number of precursor games larger than the number of remaining games in the cycle is set in step S2904). Also, in this season start setting process, the number of precursor games is forcibly set to 1, and in this one precursor game, after performing a CZ transition notification or the like suggesting a transition to CZ, the CZ from the next game is performed. It is configured so that it can be transferred to the state.

<Lottery table for determining the display contents at the start of the season>
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for determining display contents at the start of the season. In the lottery table for determining the display contents at the start of the season, the vertical axis represents the number, and the horizontal axis represents the type of production, the lottery value, and the production mode (outline).

The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the lottery table for determining the display contents at the start of the season in the seasonal start display processes 1 and 2 described later, and displays the display at the start of the season based on the effect type and the random number value at the time of the lottery. The content determination lottery is performed and the production mode is selected. In this example, when the type of effect is seasonal start, the lottery value is selected based on the acquired random number value (for example, 0 to 255), the effect mode corresponding to the selected lottery value is selected, and the effect is produced. When the type is CZ transition or AT transition, there is a 100% probability that the corresponding production mode (CZ transition notification or AT transition notification) is selected.

<Display processing at the start of the season>
Next, the seasonal start display process will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the seasonal start display process according to the sixth embodiment.

This seasonal start display process is a process executed in another effect control process (step S3302) of the first sub-control unit effect control process described with reference to FIG. 119 (d). In step S3001, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the previous season counter and the value of the current season counter match, and if they match, it is determined. The process proceeds to step S3002, and if they do not match, the season start display process ends. In step S3002, it is determined whether or not a command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated (hereinafter, may be referred to as “lever on”) has been received from the main control unit 300, and if applicable, step S3003 is performed. The process proceeds, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3003, the season start display process 1 (details will be described later) is executed, and then the season start display process ends.

In step S3004, it is determined whether or not a command indicating that the third stop operation has been performed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “third stop”) has been received from the main control unit 300, and if applicable, it is determined. The process proceeds to step S3005, and if not applicable, the seasonal start display process is terminated. In step S3005, the season start display process 2 (details will be described later) is executed, and then the season start display process ends.

<Seasonal start display processing 1>
Next, the seasonal start display process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (b). FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the season start display process 1 (step S3003) in the season start display process described with reference to FIG. 195 (a).

In step S3101, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example), and if applicable (in this example). If it does not reach the ceiling, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if it does not apply (when the ceiling is reached), the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3102, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is off or on, and if it is off (if it is not a precursor), the process proceeds to step S3103. If it is on (in the case of a precursor), the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3103, a lottery for determining the display content at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. 194 is performed, an effect mode is selected based on the effect type (season start) and the random number value at the time of the lottery, and the second sub-control unit 500 is produced. After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the mode, the seasonal start display process 1 is terminated.

In step S3104, referring to the lottery table for determining the display content at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. 194, the CZ transition notification is selected as the effect mode based on the effect type (CZ transition) at the time of the lottery, and the second sub After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the effect mode to the control unit 500, the season start display process 1 is terminated.

In step S3105, referring to the lottery table for determining the display content at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. 194, the AT transition notification is selected as the effect mode based on the effect type (AT transition) at the time of the lottery, and the second sub After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the effect mode to the control unit 500, the season start display process 1 is terminated.

<Seasonal start display processing 2>
Next, the seasonal start display process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (c). FIG. 195 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the season start display process 2 (step S3005) in the season start display process described with reference to FIG. 195 (a).

In step S3201, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example), and if applicable (in this example). If it does not reach the ceiling, the process proceeds to step S3202, and if it does not apply (when the ceiling is reached), the process proceeds to step S3205. In step S3202, the game information included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, it is determined whether the precursor flag is off or on, and if it is off (if it is not a precursor), the process proceeds to step S3203 to turn it on. In the case (in the case of a precursor), the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3203, the seasonal start display content determination lottery described with reference to FIG. 194 is performed, the effect type (seasonal start) at the time of the lottery and the effect mode are selected based on the random number value, and the effect is produced by the second sub-control unit 500. After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the aspect, the process proceeds to step S3206.

In step S3204, referring to the lottery table for determining the display content at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. 194, the CZ transition notification is selected as the effect mode based on the effect type (CZ transition) at the time of the lottery, and the second sub After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the effect mode to the control unit 500, the process proceeds to step S3206.

In step S3205, referring to the lottery table for determining the display content at the start of the season described with reference to FIG. 194, the AT transition notification is selected as the effect mode based on the effect type (AT transition) at the time of the lottery, and the second sub After transmitting the effect information corresponding to the effect mode to the control unit 500, the process proceeds to step S3206. In step S3206, after setting the value of the current season counter in the previous season counter, the season start display process 2 is terminated.

In this example, since the seasonal start display process is executed at the start of the set game, the CZ transition notification may be performed when the CZ state is entered in the middle of the set game. When the game shifts (returns) to the set game from the CZ state, other notifications including the CZ transition notification are not performed in the set game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily agitated without performing various notifications a plurality of times during the set game.

<Set game>
Next, a set game that can be executed by the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a).

FIG. 196 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a set game. In addition, the display of the effect image display device 157 in each of the figures used in the following description is, in principle, an example of the display immediately after the start lever 135 is operated (immediately after the lever-on) in each game. , When another operation (for example, the third stop) is accepted, the same display may be performed.

The slot machine according to the sixth embodiment can execute a set game capable of executing a plurality of games a plurality of times, and after a certain set game (first set game) of a predetermined number of set games, the slot machine A certain set game (second set game) following the first set game can be started.

The summer of the first year of the NM2 state (seasonal counter 2) SET1 shown in FIG. 195 (a) corresponds to an example of the "first set game", and the first year of the NM2 state shown in FIG. 195 (a). Autumn (seasonal counter 3) SET2 corresponds to an example of "second set game". Further, in this example, each set game is configured to be able to execute a total of 20 games from 1 to 20, but the set game may be a game in which a plurality of games can be executed, and 2 to 19 times. , Or 21 times or more.

Further, in each set game, the effect image display device 157 is used to be able to perform notification of the content related to the set game, notification of the number of remaining games in the set game, and notification of a certain privilege.

In this example, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 first game (game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R20, the set is triggered by Lebaon. As a notification of the contents related to the game, a seasonal display SD including the characters "1st year summer" corresponding to the seasonal counter 2 and a normal seasonal production (normal) SE1 that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state are performed. .. Further, as a notification of the remaining number of games in the set game, a remaining game number display RG including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games of the first set game SET1 are 19 games is performed, and a certain privilege is related. As a notification, an AT transition point display AP indicating an AT transition point is performed. In this example, the cycle (in this example, the first year) is not displayed, but the cycle is notified by displaying the cycle (for example, the display including the characters "cycle 1"). You may.

Similarly, in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year), the first game of SET2 (the game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game), in SET2-R20, the set game is triggered by Lebaon. As a notification of the contents related to the above, a seasonal display SD including the characters "Autumn of the first year" corresponding to the seasonal counter 3 and a seasonal production (suggestion) SE2 suggesting the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state are performed. In addition, as a notification of the number of remaining games in the set game, a remaining game number display RG including the character "19G" indicating that the remaining games of the second set game SET2 are 19 games is performed, and a certain privilege is related. As a notification, an AT transition point display AP indicating an AT transition point is performed.

<CZ transition winning>
Next, the flow of the game when the CZ transition lottery is won (CZ transition winning) will be described.
As described with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192, in the slot machine according to this example, when the CZ transition lottery is won in the NM2 state process A, the sign game number lottery is performed in the CZ sign setting process, and the slot machine is in the CZ state. Determine the number of precursor games to play before the start. Then, when the cycle of the game is the final cycle (when the value of the seasonal counter = the value of the developing season), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect state counter is equal to or greater than the value of the number of precursor games. If not applicable (when the value of the effect status counter <value of the number of precursor games), the value of the effect status counter is set in the precursor counter, and in other cases, the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter. To do.

That is, in the slot machine according to this example, when "the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is the final cycle and the value of the effect state counter is less than the value of the precursor game number", the precursor counter is displayed. Set the value of the status counter, and either "when the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is not the final cycle" or "the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is the final cycle, but the value of the effect status counter is In the case of "more than the number of precursor games", the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter.

In addition, in the slot machine according to this example, when the CZ transition is won and a numerical value is set in the precursor counter, the notification of the content suggesting the transition to a specific state (CZ state in this example) (this example). (CZ transition notification) can be executed, and a specific effect (in this example, a precursor effect) regarding whether or not to shift to the specific state can be executed before shifting to the specific state.

The number of precursor games is not limited to the example determined by lottery, and may be fixed, or may be fixed several times during the first game period (for example, several times including the final game of the set game (for example, the final game of the set game). The game period) excluding the game) may be determined by lottery, and may be fixed in the second game period (for example, the final stage of the set game) regardless of the lottery.

<CZ transition winning (Example 1)>
FIG. 196 (b-1) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in chronological order when the CZ transition is won (Example 1). In this example, is the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the fourth game of SET1 (the game with 17 remaining games at the start of the game), and the CZ transition is won in SET1-R17, which is a precursor. This is an example in which the value of the precursor counter is determined to be 2 (the number of precursor games is 3 games) by the number of games lottery.

In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 is not the final cycle, but corresponds to "when the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is not the final cycle", so the precursor counter. Set the value of the number of precursor games (2 in this example).

As a result, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1, the precursory effect is started from the game with 17 remaining games (the game that won the CZ transition), and the game + 2 games totaling 3 games. After the precursor effect is executed, the effect state shifts from the NM2 state (summer of the first year) to the CZ state, and after the end of the CZ state, the number of remaining games in the NM2 state (summer of the first year) is 14 again. Move (return) to the game.

Next, various displays to be executed in this example will be described. First set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 third game (game with 18 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R18 In, the seasonal display SD including the characters "1st year summer" corresponding to the seasonal counter 2 and the normal seasonal production (normal) SE1 that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state, and the first The remaining game number display RG including the character "17G" indicating that the remaining games of one set game SET1 are 17 games is performed.

Subsequently, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the fourth game of SET1 (the number of remaining games at the start of the game is 17), in SET1-R17, the AT1 state is triggered by Lebaon. Seasonal production SE3 is performed, which includes a production (normal) that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the CZ state and a precursory production regarding whether or not to shift to the CZ state.

Subsequently, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 sixth game (game with 15 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R15, FIG. 195 (b) is used. In the seasonal start display process 1 described above, since the CZ transition notification was selected as the effect mode by the lottery, the effect (normal) that does not suggest the possibility of transition to the AT1 state and the CZ state are changed to the CZ state. Seasonal production SE4 including a precursory effect regarding whether or not to shift and a CZ transition notification with contents suggesting a transition to the CZ state is performed.

Subsequently, in the CZ state immediately after the transition from the NM2 state (summer of the first year), the remaining games including the character "9G" indicating that the number of remaining games in the CZ state is 9 games triggered by Lebaon. The number display RG and the CZ effect CE suggesting that the effect state is the CZ state are performed.

Subsequently, in the NM2 state (1st year summer) that has transitioned (returned) from the CZ state, the seasonal display SD including the characters "1st year summer" corresponding to the seasonal counter 2 and the AT1 state are triggered by Lebaon. Performs a normal seasonal production (normal) SE1 that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to, and an RG that displays the number of remaining games including the characters "13G" indicating that the remaining games of the first set game SET1 are 13 games. ing.

According to this example, in the CZ state, the number of remaining games (value of the effect state counter) in the cycle immediately before the CZ state does not decrease, and the remaining games can be digested after the end of the CZ state. It is possible to prevent a person's willingness to play from diminishing. In addition, the probability that a player will be given an advantageous privilege (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when the CZ transition is won than when the CZ transition is not won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

<CZ transition winning (Example 2)>
FIG. 196 (b-2) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in chronological order when the CZ transition is won (Example 2). In this example, the CZ transition is won in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 fourth game (the number of remaining games at the start of the game is 17) SET1-R17, and the number of precursor games. This is an example in which the value of the precursor counter is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games) by lottery.

In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 is not the final cycle, but corresponds to "when the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is not the final cycle", so the precursor counter. Set the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example).

As a result, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1, the precursory effect is started from the game with 17 remaining games (the game that won the CZ transition), and the game + 7 games, totaling 8 games. After the precursor effect is executed, the effect state shifts from the NM2 state (summer of the first year) to the CZ state, and after the end of the CZ state, the number of remaining games in the NM2 state (summer of the first year) is 9 again. Move (return) to the game.

Since the various displays executed in this example are almost the same as the CZ transition winning (Example 1) described with reference to FIG. 196 (b-1), the description thereof will be omitted.

According to this example, in the CZ state, the number of remaining games (value of the effect state counter) in the cycle immediately before the CZ state does not decrease, and the remaining games can be digested after the end of the CZ state. It is possible to prevent a person's willingness to play from diminishing. In addition, the probability that a player will be given an advantageous privilege (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when the CZ transition is won than when the CZ transition is not won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

<CZ transition winning (Example 3)>
FIG. 197 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in chronological order when the CZ transition is won (Example 3). In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the 18th game of SET1 (the number of remaining games at the start of the game is 3), the CZ transition is won in SET1-R3, and the number of precursor games. This is an example in which the value of the precursor counter is determined to be 2 (the number of precursor games is 3 games) by lottery.

In this example, the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 is not the final cycle, but corresponds to "when the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is not the final cycle", so the precursor counter. Set the value of the number of precursor games (2 in this example).

As a result, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1, the precursory effect is started from the game with 3 remaining games (the game that won the CZ transition), and the game + 2 games totaling 3 games. After the precursor effect is executed, the effect state shifts from the NM2 state (summer of the first year) to the CZ state, and after the end of the CZ state, it shifts (returns) to the NM2 state (summer of the first year) again. Since the number of remaining games in the NM2 state (summer of the first year) is 0, the game immediately shifts to the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2.

Here, in this example, even if the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) is won in the CZ transition in the CZ state of SET1, the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year). It is configured so that the SET2 does not shift to the CZ state.

Since the various displays executed in this example are almost the same as the CZ transition winning (Example 1) described with reference to FIG. 196 (b-1), the description thereof will be omitted, but in this example, the first Two set games (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) In the first game of SET2 (games with 20 remaining games at the start of the game), the set game is the second set game in SET2-R20. We are doing a seasonal production SE5 that can suggest.

According to this example, the probability that an advantageous privilege is given to the player (for example, the probability of transitioning to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when the CZ transition is won than when the CZ transition is not won. Is higher, so the player's motivation to play can be increased. Further, since the game is started from the first game of the next cycle after the end of the CZ state, the player can proceed with the game after clearly recognizing that it is immediately after the cycle is switched.

<CZ transition winning (Example 4)>
FIG. 197 (b-1) is a diagram showing a comparative example with the CZ transition winning (Example 4) described with reference to FIG. 197 (b-2), and FIG. 197 (b-2) is a CZ. It is a figure which showed the flow of the game in the case of transition winning (Example 4) in chronological order.

In each of the examples shown in FIGS. 197 (b-1) and FIG. 197 (b-2), the 18th game of the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 (remaining at the start of the game). This is an example in which the CZ transition is won in SET1-R3 (games with 3 games), and the value of the precursor counter is determined to 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games) by the precursor game number lottery.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 197 (b-1), since the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example) is set in the precursor counter (because the number of precursor games is not adjusted (shortened)), the precursor effect is the first. There is a problem that one set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) spans from the fifth game of SET2.

In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 197 (b-2), the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 is not the final cycle, but "the game when the CZ transition is won". Since this corresponds to "when the cycle of is not the final cycle", the value of the number of precursor games (2 in this example) is set in the precursor counter. Further, when shifting the production state from the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2, FIG. 174 is used. In the season start setting process described above, since the value of the precursor counter is other than 0, the number of precursor games is forcibly set to 1.

As a result, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1, the precursory effect is started from the game with 3 remaining games (the game that won the CZ transition), and the precursory effect is executed over the game + 2 games. After that, the production state shifts from the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2. Subsequently, in this second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year), even in the game in which the number of remaining games in SET2 is 20, the precursor effect is continuously executed, and then the effect state is the NM2 state: the first year. After shifting to the CZ state from autumn, after the end of the CZ state, the NM2 state again shifts (returns) to 19 games in the fall of the first year.

Next, the various displays executed in this example will be described. The 17th game of the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 (game with 4 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R4 In, the seasonal display SD including the characters "1st year summer" corresponding to the seasonal counter 2 and the normal seasonal production (normal) SE1 that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state, and the first The remaining game number display RG including the character "3G" indicating that the remaining games of one set game SET1 are three games is performed.

Subsequently, the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) the 18th game of SET1 (the game with 3 remaining games at the start of the game) and the 20th game from SET1-R3 (at the start of the game) In SET1-R1 (a game in which the number of remaining games is 1), there is an effect (normal) that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state and a precursory effect regarding whether or not to shift to the CZ state, triggered by Lebaon. We are doing seasonal production SE3 including.

Subsequently, in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year), the first game of SET2 (the game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) SET2-R20, FIG. 195 (b) is used. Since the CZ transition notification was selected as the production mode by the lottery in the seasonal start display process 1 described above, the "Autumn of the first year" corresponding to the seasonal counter 3 rather than the end of the CZ state triggered by Lebaon. Includes seasonal display including the characters "(display that can be recognized as a cycle different from the previous cycle (summer of the first year)) SD and CZ transition notification with content suggesting that the cycle will shift to the CZ state. We are doing seasonal production SE4.

Subsequently, in the CZ state immediately after the transition from the NM2 state (autumn of the first year), the remaining games including the character "9G" indicating that the number of remaining games in the CZ state is 9 games triggered by Lebaon. The number display RG and the CZ effect CE suggesting that the effect state is the CZ state are performed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 197 (b-2), the precursory effects are from the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2. Compared to the example shown in FIG. 197 (b-1), which straddles but does not shorten the precursory effect, it is possible to reduce the feeling that the time until the ceiling cycle is far away, and the player's willingness to play is maintained. be able to. Further, in the CZ state, the number of remaining games (value of the effect state counter) in the cycle immediately before the CZ state does not decrease, and the remaining games can be digested after the end of the CZ state, so that the player's willingness to play the game. Can be prevented from declining. In addition, the probability that a player will be given an advantageous privilege (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when the CZ transition is won than when the CZ transition is not won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

<CZ transition winning (Example 5)>
FIG. 198 (a-1) is a diagram showing a comparative example with the CZ transition winning (Example 5) described with reference to FIG. 198 (a-2), and FIG. 198 (a-2) is a CZ. It is a figure which showed the flow of the game in the case of transition winning (Example 5) in chronological order.

Further, the slot machine according to the present embodiment is configured so as to be able to shift to a predetermined state regarding the interests of the player in connection with the execution of the set game, and the set game (final) for the predetermined number of times after the second set game. When the specific state transition lottery is won in the set game), the game shifts to the specific state before the transition to the predetermined state, and after the specific state ends, the game in the final set game cannot be executed and the predetermined state is not enabled. It is configured to be transitionable to a state.

The second winter (seasonal counter 8) SETL in the NM2 state shown in FIGS. 198 (a-1) and 198 (a-2) is a "final set game (a predetermined number of sets after the second set game). The judge state JS corresponds to an example of "predetermined state", the CZ transition lottery corresponds to an example of "specific state transition lottery", and the CZ state corresponds to "specific state". This is an example. The "predetermined state" according to the present invention is not limited to the judge state, and may be, for example, a state including at least both the judge state and the AT state, or a state including at least both the judge state and the non-AT state. It may be. Further, in this example, in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL, a total of 20 games of 1 to 20 can be executed, and in the judge state JS, a total of 10 times of 1 to 10 are performed. The game is configured to be playable, but the number of each game is not particularly limited.

In each of the examples shown in FIG. 198 (a-1) and FIG. 198 (a-2), the 18th game of the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL (the number of remaining games at the start of the game). This is an example in which the CZ transition is won in SETL-R3, and the value of the precursor counter is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games) by the lottery for the number of precursor games.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (a-1), since the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example) is set in the precursor counter (because the number of precursor games is not adjusted (shortened)), the precursor effect is final. There is a problem that the set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) straddles from the SETL to the fifth game of the judge state JS.

In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (a-2), the value of the number of precursor games is 7, the value of the effect state counter is 3, and "the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is the final. Since it corresponds to "when the value of the effect state counter (3 in this example) is less than the value of the number of precursor games (7 in this example)" in the cycle, the value of the effect state counter is applied to the precursor counter (this example). Then set 3).

Further, as described above, when the slot machine according to the present embodiment wins the CZ transition lottery in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL, the slot machine is put into the CZ state before the transition to the judge state JS. After the CZ state is completed, the game can be shifted to the judge state JS without making the game in the final set game SETL feasible.

As a result, in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL, the precursory effect was started from the game with 3 remaining games (the game that won the CZ transition), and the precursory effect was executed over the game + 2 games. After that, the production state shifts from the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL to the next judge state JS without making the game in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) executable. To do. In this example, since the NM2 state shifts to the judge state, the value of the precursor counter is reset to 0, and the precursor effect is not performed in the judge state.

In this example, when the CZ transition lottery is won in the final game, the game shifts to the CZ state before the transition to the judge state, and the game in the final set game cannot be executed after the CZ state ends. Since it is possible to shift to the judge state and the game is started from the first game of the judge state after the end of the CZ state, the player clearly recognizes that it is immediately after the production state is switched. In addition to being able to advance the game, it is possible to maintain the judge state without diminishing the increased motivation to play the game in the CZ state, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the game table.

Next, the various displays executed in this example will be described in the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL 17th game (game with 4 remaining games at the start of the game) SETL-R4. , With Lebaon as an opportunity, as a notification of the contents related to the set game, the seasonal display SD including the characters "winter of the second year" corresponding to the seasonal counter 8 and the normal seasonal production that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state ( (Normally) SE1 is performed. In addition, as a notification of the number of remaining games in the set game, the number of remaining games display RG including the character "3G" indicating that the remaining games of the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL is 3 games. As a notification regarding a certain privilege, an AT transition point display AP indicating an AT transition point is performed.

Similarly, in the first game of the judge state JS (the game in which the number of remaining games at the start of the game is 10) JS-R10, the seasonal counter 8 is supported as a notification of the contents related to the set game, triggered by Lebaon. The seasonal display SD including the characters "winter of the second year" and the judge production JE suggesting that the player is in a judge state are performed.

In this example, the CZ is configured so that the game in the final set game SETL is not executable after the precursory effect, and the precursory effect is not performed when the effect state shifts to the next judge state JS. There is no risk of giving the player confusion as to whether it is a sign of a state or a sign of a judge state.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 198 (a-2), the sensation that the time until the ceiling cycle becomes longer is reduced as compared with the example shown in FIG. 198 (a-1), which does not shorten the precursor effect. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, the probability that a player will be given an advantageous privilege (for example, the probability of shifting to an advantageous production state such as AT1 state) is higher when the CZ transition is won than when the CZ transition is not won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

In this example, the flow of the game is emphasized, and when shifting from the NM2 state to the judge state, the value of the precursor counter is reset to 0, and the precursor effect is not performed in the judge state. The invention is not limited to this, and as in the case of the CZ transition winning (Example 4) described with reference to FIG. 197 (b-2), the precursory effect is produced in the first game of the second set game (judgment state) SET2. May continue.

<AT1 transition by reaching the ceiling cycle>
FIG. 198 (b) is a diagram showing an example of transition from the normal state to the AT1 state in chronological order. Here, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, only the points different from the effect state transition example 4 described with reference to FIG. 186 will be described.

In the normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 171, it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than the ceiling cycle value (5 in this example), but in this example, the value of the cycle counter is set to 6. Therefore, it is determined that the cycle counter has exceeded the ceiling cycle value (reached the ceiling), and in the AT1 start setting process, the lottery result (AT1 game number) of the AT1 initial number lottery is used as the AT1 initial value. After setting the counter, set the AT1 state to the effect state. As a result, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the AT1 state.

Next, to explain the various displays executed in this example, in the judge state, as a judge effect suggesting that the player is in the judge state, the judge effect (introduction) JE1 and the judge effect (confrontation (the main character becomes an enemy)) Losing production mode)) Continuous production including JE2 is performed.

Further, in the game immediately after the judge state, as shown by the reference numeral R1 in FIG. 198 (b), the seasonal display SD includes the characters "1st year spring" corresponding to the seasonal counter 1, and the seasonal effect SE. As a result, a production SE including an AT transition notification suggesting a transition to AT is performed.

Further, in the subsequent AT1 state, since the AT transition notification was selected as the effect mode by the lottery in the seasonal start display process 1 described with reference to FIG. 195 (b), the reference numerals AT1-R10 are shown in FIG. 198 (b). As shown in the above, the AT1 effect AE suggesting the current effect state (AT1 state in this example) is performed and the AT is started with the Lebaon as an opportunity. When the cycle counter exceeds the ceiling cycle value (reaches the ceiling), the final notification effect state is not entered. Therefore, the AT1 type is set to low, and AT is started from the AT1 state (low). To.

<Various counters and flags>
Next, various counters and flags in each figure will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 199.

The "effect state counter" is a counter indicating the number of remaining games in each effect state. For example, the effect state counter = 16 indicates that the number of remaining games in the effect state is 16G. The "seasonal counter" is a counter indicating the season, and for example, the seasonal counter 2 is a counter indicating the season of the "first year summer".

The "precursor counter" is a counter set by the CZ precursor setting process described with reference to FIG. 192 (a). In the slot machine according to this example, "the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is the final cycle. If the value of the effect status counter is less than the value of the number of precursor games, the value of the effect status counter is set in the precursor counter, and the cycle of the game when the CZ transition is won is not the final cycle. In the case of "when" or "when the game cycle when the CZ transition is won is the final cycle but the value of the effect state counter is equal to or greater than the number of precursor games", the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter.

The “precursor flag” is set to on when the value of the effect state counter (or the value of the number of precursor games) is set in the precursor counter, and the precursor counter in the NM2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 175. Is a flag that is set to off in the CZ state start setting process described with reference to FIG. 176 when it is determined that is 0.

<Example of updating various counters and flags 1>
FIG. 199 (a) is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags during execution of the precursory effect of the CZ transition winning (Example 2) described with reference to FIG. 196 (b-2) in chronological order.

In the CZ transition winning (Example 2) shown in FIG. 196 (b-2), the precursory effect is started from the game in which the number of remaining games of SET1 in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) is 17. Precursor effects are executed over a total of 8 games (game + 7 games). Therefore, in the eight games in which the precursory effect is executed, the seasonal counter is set to the numerical value 2 indicating the season of the "first year summer".

In addition, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the fourth game of SET1 (the number of remaining games at the start of the game is 17), the CZ transition is won in SET1-R17, and the number of precursor games is drawn. The value of the precursor counter is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games), and the value of the precursor games (7 in this example) is set in the precursor counter (initial value 0) (0 → 7). Since the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter, the precursor flag is set from off to on (off → on).

After that, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the 5th to 11th games of SET1 (games in which the number of remaining games at the start of each game is 16 to 10), in SET1-R16 to R10, 1 is subtracted from the precursor counter for each game, and the precursor counter changes from 7 to 0 (7 → 6 →… → 1 → 0). Since the precursor counter has become 0, the precursor flag is set from on to off (on → off).

Further, since the effect state is the NM2 state, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter in the NM2 state process A, and the effect state counter changes from 17 to 16 (17 → 16). After that, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the 5th to 11th games of SET1 (games in which the number of remaining games at the start of each game is 16 to 10), in SET1-R16 to R10, 1 is subtracted from the effect status counter for each game, and the effect status counter changes from 16 to 9 (16 → 15 → ... → 10 → 9).

<Example 2 of updating various counters and flags>
FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags during execution of the precursory effect of the CZ transition winning (Example 4) described with reference to FIG. 197 (b-2) in chronological order.

In the CZ transition winning (Example 4) shown in FIG. 197 (b-2), the precursory effect is started from the game in which the number of remaining games of SET1 is 3 in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year). After the precursor effect is executed over the game + 2 games, the effect state changes from the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 to the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2. The transition is made, and the precursor effect is continuously executed even in the game in which the number of remaining games in SET2 in this second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) is 20. For this reason, in the three games of the first set game in which the precursor effect is executed, the season counter is set to the numerical value 2 indicating the season of the "first year summer", and the precursor effect is executed in the second game. In one game of the set game, the season counter is set to the numerical value 3 indicating the season of "Autumn of the first year".

In addition, the 18th game of SET1 (game with 3 remaining games at the start of the game) SET1-R3 won the CZ transition in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), and the number of precursor games was drawn. The value of the precursor counter is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games), and the value of the precursor games (7 in this example) is set in the precursor counter (initial value 0) (0 → 7). Since the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter, the precursor flag is set from off to on (off → on).

After that, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the 19th to 20th games of SET1 (games in which the number of remaining games at the start of each game is 2 to 1), SET1-R2 to R1 1 is subtracted from the precursor counter for each game, and the precursor counter is forced to change from 7 to 5 because the value of the precursor counter is other than 0 in the seasonal start setting process described with reference to FIG. 174. It is set to 1 (7 → 6 → 5 → 1).

Subsequently, in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2 first game (game with 19 remaining games at the start of the game) SET2-R20, 1 is subtracted from the precursor counter. , The precursor counter goes from 1 to 0 (1 → 0). Since the precursor counter has become 0, the precursor flag is set from on to off (on → off).

Further, since the effect state is the NM2 state, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter in the NM2 state process A, and the effect state counter changes from 3 to 2 (3 → 2). After that, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the 19th to 20th games of SET1 (games in which the number of remaining games before the opening of each game is 2 to 1), in SET1-R2 to R1 1 is subtracted from the production status counter for each game, and the production status counter changes from 2 to 0 (2 → 1 → 0), but the next second set game (NM2 state: fall of the first year) SET2 In order to shift to, the initial value of 20 is set in the effect status counter, and thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the effect status counter for each game (20 → 19 → ...).

According to this example, since the precursory effect is performed over the next cycle, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity as compared with the CZ transition winning (Example 5) shown in FIG. 198 (a-2). , It is possible to perform a novel precursor effect that has never existed before.

<Example 3 of updating various counters and flags>
FIG. 199 (c) is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags during execution of the precursory effect of the CZ transition winning (Example 5) described with reference to FIG. 198 (a-2) in chronological order.

In the CZ transition winning (Example 5) shown in FIG. 198 (a-2), the precursory effect is started from the game in which the number of remaining games of the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) is 3, and the game +2. Precursor effects are executed over a total of three games. Therefore, in the three games in which the precursory effect is executed, the seasonal counter is set to the numerical value 8 indicating the season of the “second year winter”.

In addition, the 18th game of the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) SETL (the game with 3 remaining games at the start of the game) CZ transition winning in SETL-R3, the precursor counter by the precursor game number lottery The value of is determined to be 7 (the number of precursor games is 8 games), and the value of the effect state counter (2 in this example) is set in the precursor counter (initial value 0) (0 → 2). Since the value of the number of precursor games is set in the precursor counter, the precursor flag is set from off to on (off → on).

After that, the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) 19th to 20th games of SETL (games with 2 to 1 remaining games at the start of each game) 1 game in SETL-R2 to R1 1 is subtracted from the precursor counter each time, and the precursor counter changes from 2 to 0 (2 → 1 → 0). Since the precursor counter has become 0, the precursor flag is set from on to off (on → off).

Further, since the effect state is the NM2 state, 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter in the NM2 state process A, and the effect state counter changes from 3 to 2 (3 → 2). After that, the final set game (NM2 state: winter of the second year) 19th to 20th games of SETL (games with 2 to 1 remaining games at the start of each game) 1 game in SETL-R2 to R1 1 is subtracted from the effect state counter each time, and the effect state counter changes from 2 to 0 (2 → 1 → 0).

According to this example, since the precursory effect is not performed across the next cycle or the effect state, there is no sense of discomfort as compared with the CZ transition winning (Example 4) shown in FIG. 197 (b-2). You can produce.

<Omen production>
Next, an example of the precursory effect will be described with reference to FIG. 200.

<Normal production (precursor production)>
FIG. 200 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a normal effect (gase precursor effect) in chronological order. This normal effect is composed of a plurality of parts including the first part PT1 and the second part PT2 performed after the first part, and is executed over four games in this example.

The first part PT1 and the second part PT2 are effects performed over one or more games, respectively. The first part PT1 is a production consisting of a scene in which a tub falls above the character of the palace, and is executed over three games. Further, the second part PT2 is an effect including a scene for erasing the display of the first part PT1, and is executed in one game.

It should be noted that the first part PT1 of the normal production of this example has the same contents as the third part PT3 of the precursory production described later, and the player simply executes the production of the first part PT1. Since it is not possible to determine whether is a normal effect or a precursory effect, it can be said that the normal effect of this example is a false precursor effect (gase precursor effect).

<Precursor production (Example 1)>
FIG. 200B is a diagram showing an example of the precursory effect according to the first embodiment in chronological order. This precursor effect is composed of a plurality of parts including the third part PT3 and the fourth part PT4 performed after the third part PT3, and in this example, it is executed over eight games. The third part PT3 and the fourth part PT4 may be performed continuously, or may be performed (discontinuously) with one or a plurality of games sandwiched between them.

The third part PT3 and the fourth part PT4 are effects performed over one or more games, respectively. The third part PT3 is a production consisting of the same (common) scene as the first part PT1 of the normal production shown in FIG. 200 (a) (in this example, a scene in which a tub falls above the character of the palace). Yes, it runs over 3 games. Further, the following fourth part PT4 is a scene different from the second part PT2 of the normal production shown in FIG. 200 (a) (in this example, the scene in which the character of the lord wins against the character of the samurai by the swordsman confrontation). It consists of 5 games.

The fourth part PT4 of this example is a production showing a certain result (in this example, the result of winning the confrontation) (a production suggesting that a profit that is advantageous to the player may be given). On the other hand, the third part PT3 of this example is different in the effect mode in that it is an effect that does not show a certain result (an effect that does not suggest the possibility that a favorable benefit is given to the player). In the CZ transition winning (Example 5) described with reference to FIG. 198 (a-2), when the precursory effect is shortened from 8 games to 3 games, a certain result is obtained as the precursory effect of the 3 games. It may be configured to preferentially select (leave) an effect showing a certain result rather than an effect showing a certain result.

<Precursor production (Example 2)>
FIG. 200 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the precursory effect according to the second embodiment in chronological order. This precursor effect is composed of a plurality of parts including a third part PT3 and a fifth part PT5 performed after the third part PT3, and in this example, it is executed over eight games. The third part PT3 and the fifth part PT5 may be performed consecutively, or may be performed (discontinuously) with one or a plurality of games sandwiched between them.

The third part PT3 and the fifth part PT5 are effects performed over one or more games, respectively. The third part PT3 is a production consisting of the same (common) scene as the first part PT1 of the normal production shown in FIG. 200 (a) (in this example, a scene in which a tub falls above the character of the palace). Yes, it runs over 3 games. Further, the fifth part PT5 is composed of a scene different from the second part PT2 of the normal production shown in FIG. 200 (a) (in this example, the scene in which the character of the palace catches the character of the samurai by the capture production). Runs across the game. The fifth part PT5 of this example is an effect showing a certain result (in this example, the result of succeeding in capturing the samurai) (an effect suggesting that a profit that is advantageous to the player may be given). On the other hand, the third part PT3 of this example is different in the production mode in that it is an effect that does not show a certain result (an effect that does not suggest the possibility that a favorable benefit is given to the player). ..

<Execution timing of precursor production>
FIG. 200 (d) is a diagram showing changes in various counters and flags during execution of the precursor effect in chronological order. The third part PT3 of the precursory effect of this example is the same (common) scene as the first part PT1 shown in FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (c) (in this example, the tub falls above the character of the palace. It is a production consisting of (scenes to be played), and is executed over three games in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1.

On the other hand, the fourth part PT4 consists of a CZ effect suggesting that the player is in the CZ state, and the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the second set game following the SET1 (NM2 state: 1). Autumn of the year) In SET2, it is executed in one game.

According to this example, although the precursory effect is executed across a plurality of set games, the third part PT3 of the precursory effect is completed in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1. Since the fourth part PT4, which suggests that the player is in the CZ state, is executed in the first game of the next second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2, a precursory effect is produced for each set game. The mode can be changed, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the first part PT1, instead of the normal production, a production related to a specific role suggesting that the specific role has been won may be performed. In this case, the precursor counter is a production related to the specific role and a precursor effect ( To manage the execution of three types of productions: the production of the first part PT1 (including the premonition effect) and the CZ transition notification effect that suggests the transition to the CZ state (if the CZ transition is won). Functions as a counter.

<Examples of changes in various productions>
Next, modification examples of various effects will be described.

<Examples of changes in various productions / precursor production>
FIG. 201A is a diagram showing a modified example of the precursor effect. In the precursory effect described with reference to FIG. 200 (d), in the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) SET2, the fourth part PT4 suggesting the CZ state is executed in one game. An example is shown.

In the case of performing such a precursor effect, when the seasonal start display process described with reference to FIG. 195 (a) is applied and the first condition is satisfied (in this example, when the Lebaon operation is accepted). , By executing the seasonal start display process 1 described with reference to FIG. 195 (b), a certain character and a balloon are displayed as a part PT4-1 of the fourth part PT4, and the second condition is satisfied. When it is established (in this example, when the third stop operation is accepted), by executing the seasonal start display process 2 described with reference to FIG. 195 (c), the other one of the fourth part PT4 is executed. As the unit PT4-2, a notification suggesting that the state is in the CZ state (in this example, a notification for displaying the characters "It's CZ" in the balloon) may be performed.

In addition, as another part PT4-2 of the fourth part PT4, instead of the notification suggesting that the state is in the CZ state (in this example, the notification displaying the characters "CZ" in the balloon), or Notifications that indicate that there is a high probability that a special benefit (for example, points) will be given (for example, a notification that displays the words "This season is PT high accuracy" in a balloon), or the possibility of shifting to a judge state A notification that suggests (for example, a notification that displays the characters "Is the judge status still?" In the balloon) and a notification that suggests the current scenario number (for example, a notification that displays the characters "Is it scenario 5 or higher?" In the balloon). Notification) or notification suggesting that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed (for example, notification that displays the characters "AT" in a balloon) may be performed.

<Examples of various production changes / seasonal production, seasonal display>

FIG. 201 (b-1) is a diagram showing an example of changing the seasonal effect and the seasonal display. In the seasonal production and seasonal display described with reference to FIG. 196 (a) and the like, the seasonal display SD including the characters "1st year summer" corresponding to the seasonal counter 2 and the normal state that does not suggest the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state. An example of executing the seasonal production (normal) SE1 of is shown.

When the first condition is satisfied (in this example, when the Levaon operation is accepted) when performing such seasonal production or seasonal display, a certain character and a certain character are used as part of the seasonal production or seasonal display. A notification that displays the characters "Next" is displayed in the balloon, and when the second condition is met (in this example, when the third stop operation is accepted), seasonal effects and other parts of the seasonal display are displayed. As a notification (notice) that suggests (notices) the contents of the effects and benefits that occur in each game in the season (cycle) (in this example, each square of the calendar is regarded as one game, and the effects that occur in the game. Notification that suggests the contents of benefits and the like with figures and symbols) may be performed, and in the next game, the figures and symbols corresponding to the game may be indicated by arrows (↓).

According to this example, since the contents of the effects and benefits that occur after the game can be grasped in advance, the player's willingness to play can be maintained even if the game result in the game is not good. You may be able to.

<Examples of changes in various effects / CZ transition notification effect>

FIG. 201 (b-2) is a diagram showing a modified example of the CZ transition notification effect. In the CZ transition notification effect described with reference to FIG. 197 (b-2) and the like, an example of executing the seasonal effect SE4 including the CZ transition notification is shown.

When such a CZ transition notification is performed, the seasonal effect and the change example of the seasonal display described with reference to FIG. 201 (b-1) are applied, and when the second condition is satisfied (the third stop operation is accepted). (In this case), as a part of the CZ transition notification effect, a notification (in this example, each square of the calendar) suggesting (notice) that a CZ transition notification effect will occur in each game in the season (cycle). It is possible to perform (notification suggesting a game in which a CZ transition notification effect is generated by a star mark) as if it were one game.

According to this example, since it is possible to grasp in advance that the CZ transition notification will occur after the game, the player's willingness to play can be maintained even if the game result in the game is not good. May be possible.
<Examples of changes in various productions / others>

FIG. 201 (c) is a diagram showing an example of changing the start timing of the precursor effect. In the above embodiment, when the CZ transition is won, the precursory effect is started from the CZ transition winning game, but the precursory effect may be started in the game after the CZ transition winning game. Good.

According to this example, for example, when the CZ transition is won in the final game of the cycle, the precursory effect is not started in the final game, so that it is possible to eliminate the discomfort that the precursory effect is started in the final game.

In this example, in the game in which the CZ transition is won, instead of the precursor effect, the effect related to the specific role, which suggests that the specific combination has been won, may be executed. Since the effect related to this specific role also serves as a precursor effect that suggests that the player will shift to the CZ state, in the slot machine according to this example, the precursor effect (including the Gase precursor effect), which is the first precursor effect, It can be said that three types of precursory effects, the second precursory effect, the CZ transition notification effect, and the third precursory effect, the effect related to a specific role, are feasibly configured.

<Special game during the precursory production>
Next, the special game during the precursory effect will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 (a) shows the flow of the game in chronological order when the special game is executed in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year) SET1 described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). It is a figure.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied in the common processing for each game (in the present embodiment, the game state of the game is either RT2 or RT3). In RT1 and RT4, processing related to the high navigation state (for example, processing for updating various counters such as an effect state counter, a precursor counter, and a CZ counter) is configured so as not to proceed. There is.

In this example, in the first set game (NM2 state: summer of the first year), the third game of SET1 (the game with 18 remaining games at the start of the game) corresponds to the special role 1 or the special role 2. Since the symbol combination is displayed, from the next game, the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) is shifted to the special game state (RT4). In this special game state (RT4), the high navigation state counter is updated (subtracted), but the effect state counter is not updated (subtracted).

In addition, after the end of the special game state (RT4), the state shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1), but even in this re-game low probability state (RT1), the high navigation state counter is updated (subtracted). However, the effect status counter is not updated (subtracted). In the re-game low probability state (RT1), both the high navigation state counter and the effect state counter may be updated (subtracted).

FIG. 202 (b) is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 197 (b-2), and FIG. 202 (c) shows the flow of the game in chronological order when the game shifts to the special game state during the execution of the precursor effect. It is a figure.

In this example, the second set game (NM2 state: autumn of the first year) corresponds to the special role 1 or the special role 2 in the first game of SET2 (the game in which the number of remaining games at the start of the game is 20). The symbol combination is displayed, and the game has shifted to the special game state (RT4) from the next game. In this special game state (RT4), the high navigation state counter is updated (subtracted), but the effect state counter is not updated (subtracted).

In addition, after the end of the special game state (RT4), the state shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1), but even in this re-game low probability state (RT1), the high navigation state counter is updated (subtracted). However, the effect status counter is not updated (subtracted).

Next, various displays to be executed in this example will be described. Second set game (NM2 state: Autumn of the first year) SET2 first game (game with 20 remaining games at the start of the game) SET2-R20 In, when the first condition is satisfied (in this example, when the Levaon operation is accepted), a certain character and a balloon are displayed as a part of the precursor effect.

However, since the game state is the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3), even if the second condition is satisfied (in this example, when the third stop operation is accepted), in addition to the precursory effect. As a part of, the notification suggesting that the player is in the CZ state (in this example, the notification that displays the characters "CZ" in the balloon) is not started, and instead, the game shifts to the special game state (RT4). We have started a special game transition notification SP that suggests that.

In the special game transition notification SP of this example, a display suggesting that the set game is interrupted (in this example, a display including the characters "resting") and a condition for returning to the set game are suggested. (In this example, a display including the characters "until return" and a display indicating the number of remaining games and the number of payouts in the special game state (RT4)) are displayed. This special game transition notification SP ends when the special game state (RT4) ends, when the end condition of the special game state (RT4) is satisfied, and when the BET operation for the next game is accepted, etc. (Erased). In the subsequent re-game low probability state (RT1), the special game transition notification SP may be continued or terminated (erased).

<Modification example of set game>
Next, a modified example of the set game will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 (a-1) to 203 (a-3). In the above embodiment, as an example of the "first set game", the first summer (seasonal counter 2) SET1 in the NM2 state shown in FIG. 195 (a) is illustrated, and the "second set game" As an example, the first autumn (seasonal counter 3) SET2 in the NM2 state shown in FIG. 195 (a) has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

FIG. 203 (a-1) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to the first modification. The slot machine according to this example is configured to be capable of executing five set games of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5, and each of these first to fifth set games S1 to S5 is further configured. It is composed of a plurality of variable length (3 to 5 in this example) subset games, and each of these subset games is configured to be capable of executing 20 games. In the figure, the subset game with the letter "J" indicates that it is in the judge state.

In this example, each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5 and / or each of the variable length subset games constituting the set game is a "set game capable of executing a plurality of games" according to the present invention. It corresponds to an example of. In this example, the fifth set game S5 that reaches the ceiling is composed of five subset games, but the number of subset games that make up the set game is not limited to this example, for example, one. It may be composed of a subset game of. Further, the condition for determining whether or not the game is a ceiling is not limited to the fact that the number of set games reaches a predetermined number (5 in this example). For example, the number of games from the start of the set game is predetermined. If the number of games exceeds the number of games, it may be determined that the game is a ceiling.

FIG. 203 (a-2) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to the second modification. The slot machine according to this example is configured to be capable of executing five set games of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5, and each of these first to fifth set games S1 to S5 is further configured. It is composed of a plurality of fixed-length (five in this example) subset games, and each of these subset games is configured to be capable of executing 20 games.

In this example, each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5 and / and each of the fixed-length subset games constituting the set game are the "set games capable of executing a plurality of games" according to the present invention. It corresponds to an example of.

FIG. 203 (a-3) is a diagram showing a set game (cycle) according to the third modification. The slot machine according to this example is configured to be capable of executing five set games of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5, and a plurality of slot machines in each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5. It is configured to be able to execute the variable length game of. The number of games that can be executed in each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5 is determined based on the game results (for example, internal winning combination and lottery value), and for example, 1000 points (for example) in each of the set games. When points exceeding PT) are given (= when 100 games are consumed on average in the set game), the set game is ended and the next set game is started.

In this example, each of the first to fifth set games S1 to S5 configured to be able to execute a plurality of variable length games is an example of the "set game capable of executing a plurality of games" according to the present invention. Applicable. The game result in this example is not limited to points based on the lottery value, and may be, for example, the number of times a specific combination is established. In this case, the number of times a specific combination is established in a certain set game is predetermined. When the number of times is exceeded, the set game may be terminated and the next set game may be started. Further, whether or not the judge state is executed in each set game may be determined based on the game result in the set game.

<Modification examples of various tables>
Next, modification examples of various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 (b-1) to (b-2).

FIG. 203 (b-1) is a diagram showing an example of an AT continuation scenario table. In the above embodiment, an example of shifting to the AT2 state via the AT1 state has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the transition to the AT state is determined, the number of AT games is set to a fixed value ( For example, 30) may be determined, and after the AT is started, the number of continuous games of the AT may be determined using the AT continuation scenario table shown in FIG. 203 (b-1).

In this example, the AT continuation scenario table is referred to, and it is based on the scenario number (scenarios 1 to 10 in this example) and the cycle type (cycle type C, cycle type B, cycle type A, cycle type S in this example). Then, the number of continuous games of AT is determined. For example, in the case of cycle type S, the continuation of AT is determined with a 100% probability, in the case of cycle type A, the continuation of AT is determined with an 80% probability, and in the case of cycle type B, 500%. The continuation of AT is determined with a probability, and in the case of cycle type C, the continuation of AT is determined with a probability of 20%. If the continuation of the AT is not determined, the number of continuous games of the AT is determined based on the game result during the AT. For example, if the rare role is internally won, the AT continuation is determined with a 100% probability, and if the special replay is internally won, the AT continuation is determined with an 80% probability.

FIG. 203 (b-2) is a diagram showing a modified example of the high navigation state scenario table described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). In the example described with reference to FIG. 159 (b), an example in which the cycle type is set based on the scenario number and the cycle at the time of reference with reference to the high navigation state scenario table is shown, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the AT continuation scenario is determined based on the scenario number and cycle at the time of reference. For example, when the scenario number is scenario 1, low is set as the AT continuation scenario when the cycle is 1, 3, and 4, and medium is set as the AT continuation scenario when the cycle is 2, 5. Further, when the scenario number is scenario 10, high is set as the AT continuation scenario when the cycle is cycle 1. That is, the smaller the scenario number, the higher the possibility that a low AT continuation scenario will be selected, and the larger the scenario number, the higher the possibility that a high AT continuation scenario will be selected. An AT continuation scenario may be suggested as a notification at the start of the season.

<Example of changing the control of the production state>
Next, an example of changing the control of the effect state will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the effect state.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 190, after the first set game executed after shifting to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state), the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT state) is entered. When the transition is not made, the next second set game can be executed, and the first advantageous game state is changed to the normal state (for example, low navigation state) without making the second set game executable. We have described an example that is configured to make it possible.

In this example, the first set game (for example, normal (cycle)) after the specific state (for example, CZ state) executed after shifting to the first advantageous game state (for example, normal state). When the second advantageous game state (for example, AT state) does not occur after the second set game (for example, AT state), as shown in FIG. 204 (a-1), the next second set game (for example, normal (cycle)) When the second cycle) is made executable, and as shown in FIG. 204 (a-2), the first advantageous gaming state is changed to the normal state (for example, low) without making the second set game executable. It is configured so that it may be possible to shift to (navigation state).

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the player from having to worry about the upper limit of the number of times in the advantageous state, and to prevent the player's willingness to play after shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state. Further, since the first advantageous gaming state may shift to the normal state, it is easy to determine when the game is stopped, and the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, it is possible to expand the options of how to proceed with the game (strategy), such as deciding the number of times to aim at a certain game section, stopping the game when a certain game section ends and the advantageous state does not end, and improving the game playability. Can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, the advantageous state (high navigation state) is maintained even after the end of the second advantageous gaming state (AT state), and the first advantage before the second advantageous gaming state (AT state) is maintained. It may be configured to shift to the gaming state (normal (cycle)), or may be configured to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (normal (cycle)) via the pullback zone. Further, when shifting from the first advantageous gaming state (normal (cycle)) to the second advantageous gaming state (AT state) again, the game information in the second advantageous gaming state (AT state) (for example, Whether or not the transition condition is satisfied may be determined according to the number of digested games, the total number of game media acquired, etc. in this state.

Further, when a certain normal state transition condition is satisfied (only), the transition from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal state (low navigation state) may be possible without making the second set game executable. As certain normal state transition conditions, for example, when a reset scenario is reached, a specific combination is won, a lottery is won, an LMT state is reached, a first advantageous gaming state (or each set game) ) Reached a certain number of games, a case where the total number of acquired game media in the first advantageous game state (or each set game) reached a certain number, and the like. Further, the number of games played from the start of the normal (cycle) after the AT state may be less than the number of games played normally (cycle) not after the AT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 204 (b-1), when the state shifts to the low navigation state due to a factor other than the change of the set value, the state is configured to always shift to the CZ state after the transition to the high navigation state. As shown in 204 (b-2), when the navigation state shifts to the low navigation state due to the change of the set value (when certain information is changed or reset (initialized) by the change of the set value), it is high. It may be configured not to shift to the CZ state after the transition to the navigation state.

In addition, when the setting value is changed to the low navigation state, the timing (for example, when the setting value is changed is high) is higher than when the setting value is changed to the low navigation state. ) May have a low transition rate to the CZ state. For example, the transition rate to the CZ state when shifting to the low navigation state due to factors other than the change of the set value is 100%, and the transition rate to the CZ state when shifting to the low navigation state due to the change of the set value is 100%. May be less than 100% (including 0%), the former may be greater than 0%, and the latter may be 0%. Further, in this case, the advantage of the CZ state may be applied instead of the transition rate to the CZ state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 204 (c), in the high navigation state before the transition to the low navigation state, when a certain opportunity occurs (for example, when the specific combination is internally elected), the transition to the low navigation state is established. In that case, the precursor success effect SE is performed, while in the case of shifting to the high navigation state, the precursor failure effect (not shown) is performed, and in the case of transitioning to the low navigation state, CZ is further performed. It may be configured to execute the standby effect WE.

Further, before the CZ effect, an effect indicating the success rate (possibility of transition to AT) in the CZ state may be performed. Also, when the success rate in the CZ state is low. It is possible to perform the precursor effect in the high navigation state and shift to the CZ state without shifting to the low navigation state. In this case, the precursor effect may be performed in the high navigation state and shift to the CZ state. It does not have to be.

<Invention 6 of the present application>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 6-1”) has a plurality of types of identification that can be identified by each. A variable display unit (for example, the symbol display window 113 shown in FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying information is provided, and a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game medium. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the display result to the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display unit. The playable set game is configured to be playable multiple times and is related to the play of the set game a predetermined number of times (eg, based on the run of the "third year spring" of the ninth cycle). It is configured to be able to shift to a predetermined state regarding the interests of the person (for example, the predetermined state shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (c) and the judge state shown in FIGS. 198 (b) and 198 (a-1)). When the specific state transition lottery (for example, the specific state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to (c) and the CZ transition lottery shown in FIG. 166) is won, the specific state (for example, FIG. 205) is won. It is configured to be able to shift to the specific state shown in (a) to (c) and the CZ state shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, and the specific state is different from the predetermined state. , It is configured so that the case of transitioning to the specific state is more advantageous to the player than the case of not transitioning to the specific state, and the specific state spans a plurality of times of the set game. It is configured so that it is not set (it is configured so that a specific state is not executed across a plurality of set games), and a certain set of the set games of the predetermined number of times. The game (hereinafter, referred to as "first set game". For example, the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to (c), the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, and the like. ), Followed by a certain set game following the first set game (hereinafter referred to as "second set game". For example, the second set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b)). Or, when the second set game SET1) shown in FIGS. 196 to 198 and the like is configured to be startable and the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in a state other than the specific state. , When it is possible to shift to the specific state in the first set game (for example, in FIG. 205 (a)). When shifting to a specific state in the first set game SET1 shown, or when shifting to the CZ state in the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 196 (b-1) and (b-2). When it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game without shifting in the first set game (for example, shift to the specific state in the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 205 (b)). A game characterized in that there is a case or a case where the second set game SET2 shifts to the CZ state as shown in FIGS. 197 (b-2) and 198 (a-2). It is a stand. Note that FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an outline of the present inventions 6-1 to 6-2.

In other words, the game console according to the present invention 6-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) has a variable display unit (for example, FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. The symbol display window 113) is provided, and the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game medium, and the display result is derived to the variable display unit. One game table in which a prize can be generated according to the display result derived from the variable display unit after the game is completed, and one of a plurality of types of states relating to the player's advantage can be set. Settable state setting means (for example, effect state control process A and effect state control process B shown in FIG. 117) and set game control means capable of executing control related to a set game capable of executing a plurality of games (for example, FIG. The high navigation state processing A shown in 124, the high navigation state processing B shown in FIG. 133, and the like) are provided, and the set game control means is a means capable of executing control to execute the set game a plurality of times. , The state-setting means relates to a predetermined number of executions of the set game (eg, based on the execution of the "third year spring" of the ninth cycle) with respect to the player's interests (eg, FIG. It is a means capable of setting a predetermined state shown in 205 (a) and FIG. 9 (c) and a judge state shown in FIGS. 198 (b) and 198 (a-1), and the state setting means is a specific state. When the transition lottery (for example, the specific state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to (c) or the CZ transition lottery shown in FIG. 166) is won, the specific state (for example, FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (a) to the same) is won. It is configured to be able to shift to the specific state shown in FIG. (C) and the CZ state shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, etc., and the specific state is a state different from the predetermined state and is changed to the specific state. It is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the specific state than to not shift, and the specific state may be set over a plurality of times of the set game. The set game control means is configured so that there is no set game, and the set game control means has a certain set game (hereinafter, referred to as “first set game”. For example, FIGS. After the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. (C) and the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, etc.), a certain set game following the first set game (hereinafter, "the first set game"). It is called "two set games". For example, the second set shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b). It is a means capable of executing the control to start the game SET1 and the second set game SET1) shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, and shifts to the specific state in the first set game in a state other than the specific state. When the lottery is won, when it is possible to shift to the specific state in the first set game (for example, when it shifts to the specific state in the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. 205 (a), or in FIG. 196. (B-1), the case of shifting to the CZ state in the first set game SET1 shown in the figure (b-2)) and the second set game without shifting in the first set game. When it is possible to shift to the specific state (for example, when it shifts to the specific state in the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 205 (b), or in FIGS. 197 (b-2) and 198 (a-2). It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so that there is (when shifting to the CZ state in the second set game SET2 shown).

Conventionally, in a game table capable of executing a cycle effect that gives a benefit to a player when the ceiling cycle is reached, when the CZ transition lottery is won at the end of the cycle (for example, the final game of the cycle), the game is shifted to the CZ state in the cycle. If this happens, the CZ state may cause the player to feel the time until the ceiling cycle is far away. In such a game table, by updating the cycle G number counter even during the CZ state (by advancing the cycle game), it is possible to shift to the next cycle game even during the CZ state. There is also a way to do it. However, when such a method is adopted, when returning from the CZ state to the periodic game, the number of remaining games in the periodic game may be significantly reduced, and the player may return to the periodic game. There was a problem that I couldn't have expectations. In addition, when the mode of the CZ state is dedicated, there is a possibility that the feeling of performing the periodic game is impaired.

According to the game table according to the invention 6-1 of the present application, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, it may be possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, so that the ceiling cycle is reached. It is possible to reduce the feeling that time goes away, and it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, it is possible to have a sense of expectation in the set game after the specific state.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 6-2”) variablely displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. A variable display unit (for example, the symbol display window 113 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game medium, and the variable display unit is provided. A set in which one game is completed when the display result is derived to the display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display unit, and a plurality of games can be executed. The game is configured to be playable multiple times and relates to the player's interests in connection with the play of the set game a predetermined number of times (eg, based on the run of the "third year spring" of the ninth cycle). It is configured to be able to shift to a predetermined state (for example, the predetermined state shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (c) and the judge state shown in FIGS. 198 (b) and 198 (a-1)), and is specified. When the state transition lottery (for example, the specific state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to (c) or the CZ transition lottery shown in FIG. 166) is won, the specific state (for example, FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (a) to (c)) is won. It is configured to be able to shift to the specific state shown in FIG. 6C and the CZ state shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, and the specific state is a state different from the predetermined state and is the specific state. It is configured so that the player is more advantageous in the case of shifting to the specific state than in the case of not shifting to, and the specific state is set across a plurality of times of the set game. (It is configured so that a specific state is not executed across a plurality of set games), and a certain set game (hereinafter, hereinafter, the set game) of the predetermined number of times of the set games is configured. It is referred to as "first set game". For example, after the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to (c) and the first set game SET1) shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, etc. A certain set game following the first set game (hereinafter, referred to as "second set game"; for example, the second set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b), and FIG. 196. -When the second set game SET1) shown in FIG. 198 and the like is configured to be startable and the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in a state other than the specific state, the first When it is possible to shift to the specific state in the set game of (for example, the first slot shown in FIG. 205 (a)). When shifting to a specific state in the game SET1 or when shifting to the CZ state in the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 196 (b-1) and (b-2), the first When it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game without shifting in the set game of (for example, when shifting to the specific state in the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 205 (b), or in FIG. 197 (b-2) and FIG. 198 (a-2) show a case where the second set game SET2 shifts to the CZ state), and the state is described before the transition to the specific state. It is characterized in that a specific effect relating to whether or not to shift to a specific state (for example, the specific effect shown in FIG. 205 (b) and the precursor effect shown in FIGS. 196 to 198) can be executed. It is a game table.

In other words, the game console according to the present invention 6-2 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 108) has a variable display unit (for example, FIG. 1) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each. The symbol display window 113) is provided, and the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game medium, and the display result is derived to the variable display unit. One game table in which a prize can be generated according to the display result derived from the variable display unit after the game is completed, and one of a plurality of types of states relating to the player's advantage can be set. Settable state setting means (for example, effect state control process A and effect state control process B shown in FIG. 117) and set game control means capable of executing control related to a set game capable of executing a plurality of games (for example, FIG. The high navigation state processing A shown in 124, the high navigation state processing B shown in FIG. 133, and the like) are provided, and the set game control means is a means capable of executing control to execute the set game a plurality of times. , The state-setting means relates to a predetermined number of executions of the set game (eg, based on the execution of the "third year spring" of the ninth cycle) with respect to the player's interests (eg, FIG. It is a means capable of setting a predetermined state shown in 205 (a) and FIG. 9 (c) and a judge state shown in FIGS. 198 (b) and 198 (a-1), and the state setting means is a specific state. When the transition lottery (for example, the specific state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to (c) or the CZ transition lottery shown in FIG. 166) is won, the specific state (for example, FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (a) to the same) is won. It is configured to be able to shift to the specific state shown in FIG. (C) and the CZ state shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, etc., and the specific state is a state different from the predetermined state and is changed to the specific state. It is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the specific state than to not shift, and the specific state may be set over a plurality of times of the set game. The set game control means is configured so that there is no set game, and the set game control means has a certain set game (hereinafter, referred to as “first set game”. For example, FIGS. After the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. (C) and the first set game SET1 shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, etc.), a certain set game following the first set game (hereinafter, "the first set game"). It is called "two set games". For example, the second set shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b). It is a means capable of executing the control to start the game SET1 and the second set game SET1) shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, and shifts to the specific state in the first set game in a state other than the specific state. When the lottery is won, when it is possible to shift to the specific state in the first set game (for example, when it shifts to the specific state in the first set game SET1 shown in FIG. 205 (a), or in FIG. 196. (B-1), the case of shifting to the CZ state in the first set game SET1 shown in the figure (b-2)) and the second set game without shifting in the first set game. When it is possible to shift to the specific state (for example, when it shifts to the specific state in the second set game SET2 shown in FIG. 205 (b), or in FIGS. 197 (b-2) and 198 (a-2). Shown, there is a case where the second set game SET2 shifts to the CZ state), and before shifting to the specific state, a specific effect regarding whether or not to shift to the specific state (for example, FIG. It is a game table characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the specific effect shown in 205 (b) and the precursor effect shown in FIGS. 196 to 198 and the like).

According to the game table according to the invention 6-2 of the present application, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, it may be possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, so that the ceiling cycle is reached. It is possible to reduce the feeling that time goes away, and it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, it is possible to have a sense of expectation in the set game after the specific state.

The game console according to the present invention 6-1 and the present invention 6-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "predetermined state" according to the present invention is not limited to the judge state, and may be a state including both a judge state and an AT state, or a state including both a judge state and a non-AT state. There may be. Further, the "predetermined number of times" according to the present invention may be a fixed value or a variable value determined by lottery or the like.

Further, the "specific state" according to the present invention is not limited to the CZ state, and for example, a state in which a lottery of the same type as a predetermined lottery (point acquisition lottery) performed in a set game is performed more advantageously than a set game ( Items (for example, double the points earned, increase the percentage of points that can be earned, target roles) to make the predetermined lottery (point earning lottery) performed in the set game advantageous. (Increases) may be obtained, or a lottery (for example, AT direct hit lottery) that is not performed in the set game may be performed.

Further, the first set game and the second set game are not limited to the set games that are executed continuously, and even if another set game is executed between the first set game and the second set game. Good. That is, the second set game may be a certain set game after the first set game.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won at the final stage of the first set game (for example, several games including the final game), the second set game is more specific than the first set game. It may be configured to facilitate transition to a state.

With such a configuration, if the specific state transition lottery is won at the end of the first set game, it is easy to shift to the specific state in the second set game, so that the time until the ceiling cycle becomes long. It is possible to reduce such a feeling, and it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, the specific state may be transitionable to the specific state in the second set game.

With such a configuration, if the final game in the first set game wins the specific state transition lottery, it may be possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, so that the time until the ceiling cycle is reached. It is possible to reduce the feeling of moving away, and it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, and the first set game is performed before the specific state ends. Notification that can suggest that it is the next set game of one set game (for example, the seasonal production SD that can recognize that the season is "Autumn of the first year" shown in FIG. 197 (b-2)) It may be configured to be viable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the set game is in progress and that the ceiling cycle is approaching, so that the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, and the second set is completed after the specific state is completed. It is configured so that the game in the game can be executed, and the set game of the predetermined number of times after the second set game (hereinafter, referred to as "final set game". For example, FIG. 205 (a), FIG. c), When the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the final set game SETL shown in FIG. 198 (for example, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final set game shown in FIG. 205 (c)). The predetermined state (for example, FIG. 205 (c)) is shown without making the game in the final set game feasible after the transition to the specific state is performed before the transition to the predetermined state and after the specific state is completed. It may be configured so as to be able to shift to a predetermined state or the judge state JS) shown in FIG.

With such a configuration, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game, the game shifts to the specific state before the transition to the predetermined state, and the game in the final set game is completed after the specific state is completed. Is possible to shift to the predetermined state without making it feasible, so that the game motivation increased in the specific state can be maintained to the predetermined state without diminishing, and the operating rate of the game table can be increased.

Further, the operation means and the control for shifting to any one of a plurality of states including the advantageous gaming state (for example, the advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 205 (a) and the AT1 state shown in FIG. 198 (b)). A means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 110) is provided, and the advantageous gaming state is shown in operation information (for example, an operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 115, FIG. 143 (b), and the like. It is a state more advantageous than the set game with respect to notification of the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157, and the predetermined state (for example, , AT other than the AT1 state, the judge state), and then the advantageous gaming state can be shifted to. The transition to the advantageous gaming state can be achieved by notifying in any of a plurality of types of notification modes. A certain notification that can suggest the degree of expectation (for example, a point notification PG shown in FIG. 205 (d), a notification including the characters "this cycle is easy to accumulate PT", and other figures shown in FIG. 205 (d). , Symbol or color) can be executed, and in the set game, the certain notification can be executed, and the notification mode of the certain notification being executed can be changed. The set game may be configured so that the degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous gaming state suggested by the certain notification is higher when the transition to the specific state is performed than when the transition to the specific state is not performed.

For a player who is aiming to reach the ceiling cycle, the transition of a specific state may be a negative emotion because it is far away by the number of games for digesting the specific state, but with such a configuration, it is specific. When the state shifts, the transition expectation level is easily notified, so that it is possible to improve the motivation to continue the set game after the end of the specific state while suppressing negative emotions.

Further, in a certain period after the end of the first set game (for example, the first game of the second set game), notification of the content related to the second set game (hereinafter, "first notification"). For example, the seasonal effect SD) shown in FIG. 197 (b-2), in which it is possible to recognize that the season is "Autumn of the first year") can be executed, and the final in the first set game. When the specific state transition lottery is won in the game, the notification of the content suggesting the transition to the specific state in the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "second notification"; for example, shown in FIG. 205 (e)). The CZ transition notification and the seasonal effect SE4) including the CZ transition notification shown in FIG. 196 (b-2) may be executable. The "certain period" according to the present invention is not limited to the first game of the second set game, and is, for example, a certain period in a certain state between the first set game and the second set game. There may be.

If the game that wins the specific state transition lottery and the game that shifts to the specific state are separated, there is a problem that a feeling of delay occurs, and in the configuration where the specific state transition lottery is performed by winning a rare role, the result is There is a problem that the player who sees it is distrusted, but with such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the distrust. In addition, by performing the first notification and the second notification, the flow of the game is not disturbed as compared with the case where either one is performed, and the player can comfortably proceed with the set game. By notifying a certain period after the end of the first set game, it is possible to stimulate the game motivation of the next set game and promote the operation of the game table.

Further, when the second notification is not performed in the certain period, the second set game may be configured not to shift to the specific state based on the game result in the first set game. .. Further, when the second notification is performed in the certain period, the first notification may not be performed in the second set game after the specific state. With such a configuration, the player will not be unnecessarily fanned.

Further, when the second notification is performed in the certain period, a part of the first notification may be made feasible in the second set game after the specific state. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the contents related to the set game, but it does not incite the player more than necessary.

Further, in the specific state (for example, CZ state), by executing an effect suggesting that the specific state (for example, CZ effect), the content related to the set game (for example, the season is "first year"). It may be configured so that it cannot be grasped that it is "autumn". With such a configuration, it is possible to concentrate on the game in the specific state without worrying about the set game, and it is possible to pay attention to the notification of the content related to the set game before shifting to the specific state.

In addition, it may be possible to win (or win) a special role (for example, a real bonus or a character bonus) in the advantageous state. Further, when the special role is won (or won) in a certain game (for example, the first game) of the second set game, the first notification or the second notification is not executed. You may.

Further, the first notification is a notification composed of a plurality of parts including a first part and a second part performed after the first part, and the second notification is a second notification. It is a notification composed of a plurality of parts including a third part and a fourth part performed after the third part, and the first part and the third part have the same notification content. Including notification (for example, notification PT4-1 including display of a certain character and a balloon shown in FIG. 201 (a), notification including display of a character and a balloon three stops before shown in FIG. 205) Yes, the second part is a notification suggesting that it is the second set game (for example, a notification including the display of the characters "this season is PT high accuracy" shown in FIG. 201 (a), and It is a notification including the display of the characters “this cycle is easy to accumulate PT” shown in FIG. 205, and the fourth part is a notification suggesting a transition to the specific state (for example, FIG. 201 (a). ), The notification PT4-2 including the display of the characters “CZ” or the CZ transition notification shown in FIG. 205 (e) may be used.

With such a configuration, since a part of the first notification and the second notification include the same notification content, even if the first notification is performed, the expectation for the second notification can be expected. It may be possible to hug and increase the motivation to play, and to prevent oversight of notifications. In addition, by performing the notification, the first set game and the second set game can be given a sharpness.

In addition, a specific effect game number determining means (for example, a precursor game number lottery) for determining the number of games for executing the specific effect (for example, precursor effect) is provided, and the specific state shifts in the final game in the first set game. When the lottery is won, the number of games (for example, the number of precursor games) determined by the specific production number number determination means in the first set game is the number of remaining games in the first set game (for example, production). When it is larger than the state counter), it may be configured to be able to shift to the specific state in the second set game.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, the number of games (for example, the number of precursor games) determined by the specific production game number determining means in the first set game is When the number of games remaining in the first set game is larger than the number of games remaining in the first set game (for example, the effect state counter), the number of games remaining in the first set game is set as the number of games for executing the specific effect. It may be configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute all of the specific effects in the remaining games, and it is possible to provide a natural effect.

Further, in the specific effect, a second specific effect (for example, the fourth part PT4 shown in FIG. 200 (b) and FIG. 200 (for example)) in which a series of effects until a conclusion is drawn is performed over a plurality of games. It may be an effect including the fifth part PT5) shown in c) (for example, a precursory effect shown in FIG. 200 (b) and FIG. 200 (c)). Further, the specific effect is the first specific effect (for example, the third part PT3 shown in FIGS. 200B and 200C), which is executed before the second specific effect is executed. ) (For example, the precursory effect shown in FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c)). Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, the second specific effect may not be executed in the first set game. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform the production over a plurality of games, so that the number of precursor games can be easily adjusted (shortened), and it is possible to provide a production without a sense of discomfort.

Further, a plurality of types of second specific effects (for example, precursor effects shown in FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) are provided, and the first specific effects (for example, FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) are provided. The third part PT3) shown in the above may be a common (same) effect that is executed before the second specific effect is executed. In addition, the first specific effect may be executed in both the first type of specific effect (for example, this precursor effect) and the second type of specific effect (for example, Gase precursor effect). The same) may be produced. In addition, the second specific effect may not be executed after the first specific effect.

In addition, when the special role is won (or won) during the execution of the first type of specific effect (for example, this precursor effect), a notification suggesting that the special role has been won (or won). After performing the above, the specific effect may be restarted from the continuation. In addition, when the special role is won (or won) during the execution of the second type of specific effect (for example, Gase precursor effect), a notification suggesting that the special role has been won (or won). The specific effect may be restarted (or may not be restarted) from the continuation after the above. Further, when the power is cut off during the execution of the first type of specific effect (for example, the present precursor effect), the specific effect may be restarted from the continuation after the power is restored. In addition, when the power is cut off during the execution of the second type of specific effect (for example, a gassing precursor effect), the specific effect may be restarted (or may not be restarted) after the power is restored.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, the number of games (for example, the number of precursor games) determined by the specific production game number determining means in the first set game is the first. When it is larger than the number of remaining games in one set game (for example, the effect state counter), the second specific effect (for example, the fourth part PT4 shown in FIG. 200 (b)) is shown in the first set game. Or, even if the number of games in which the fifth part PT5) shown in FIG. 200 (c) can be executed remains, the first specific effect is executed without executing the second specific effect. It may be configured.

Further, when a specific combination is won (or won) in the first set game, the specific state may be configured to be able to shift to the specific state in the second set game. In this case, the specific state may be obtained. It may be configured so that a specific effect (for example, a precursor effect) relating to whether or not to shift to the specific state can be executed before shifting to. In addition, when a specific combination is won (or won) in the first set game, a notification (for example, light notification by an optical output means such as an LED, a speaker, etc.) suggesting the corresponding selection (or the winning) is given. (Sound notification by the sound output means) may be performed, and in this case, the notification may be terminated before the second set game is started.

Further, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, the profit given to the player in the specific state is larger than the profit given to the player in the first set game. For example, the probability of granting the privilege to the player in the specific state is higher than the probability of granting the privilege (for example, AT, item) to the player in the first set game. It may be higher, and the quantity of the privilege given to the player in the specific state may be larger than the quantity of the privilege given to the player in the first set game (for example, the number of points).

Further, the advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) may be configured so that a set game capable of executing a plurality of games can be executed a plurality of times. Further, in the advantageous game state, when the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, the specific state can be shifted to the specific state in the first set game, while in the second set game. It may be configured so as not to shift to the specific state.

In addition, an effect suggesting that it is the final set game may be executed. Further, if the specific state transition lottery is won in the final set game after executing the effect suggesting that it is the final set game, the specific effect (for example, the precursor effect) is not executed. May be good. Further, when the effect suggesting that the final set game is executed is executed, the effect suggesting the transition to the predetermined state (for example, the judge state) may not be performed.

In addition, a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting item grant) is configured to be executable, and the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game, and the specific effect (for example, a precursor). When executing the effect), if the condition for starting the execution of the special effect is satisfied before the specific effect is executed, the special effect may be executed first.

The game console according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" circulates the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, among the plurality of configurations described in the first to fourth embodiments, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further expand the range of the game.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. it can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Design display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Directional image display device 192 Cross key 194 PUSH button 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control Department

Claims (9)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game medium, and one game is completed by deriving the display result to the variable display unit, and the variable display is performed. It is a game table that can generate prizes according to the display result derived to the department.
It is configured so that a set game that can execute multiple games can be executed multiple times.
It is configured to be able to shift to a predetermined state regarding the interests of the player in connection with the execution of the set game a predetermined number of times.
If you win the specific state transition lottery, it is configured so that you can transition to the specific state.
The specific state is a state different from the predetermined state.
It is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the specific state than to not shift to the specific state.
The specific state is configured so as not to be set across a plurality of times of the set game.
After a certain set game of the predetermined number of times of the set game (hereinafter, referred to as "first set game"), a certain set game following the first set game (hereinafter, "second set game"). It is configured so that "set game") can be started.
When the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in a state other than the specific state, the transition to the specific state is possible in the first set game and the transition in the first set game. It is configured so that it may be possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game without doing so.
Before shifting to the specific state, a specific effect regarding whether or not to shift to the specific state can be executed.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
When the specific state transition lottery is won at the end of the first set game, the second set game is configured to be easier to shift to the specific state than the first set game.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
When the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, it is configured to be able to shift to the specific state in the second set game.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
When the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, and the first set game is performed before the specific state ends. It is configured to be able to execute notification that can suggest that it is the next set game of the set game.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
When the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, it is possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game, and in the second set game after the specific state is completed. It is configured to be able to perform the game of
When the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the set game (hereinafter, referred to as "final set game") of the predetermined number of times after the second set game, the process shifts to the predetermined state. Also, it is configured to shift to the specific state before, and after the specific state ends, it is possible to shift to the predetermined state without making the game in the final set game executable.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
Operation means and
A control means for shifting to one of a plurality of states including an advantageous gaming state is provided.
The advantageous game state is a state that is more advantageous than the set game in terms of notification of operation information.
It is configured so that it can shift to the advantageous gaming state after the predetermined state.
It is configured to be able to execute a certain notification that can suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous gaming state by notifying in any of a plurality of types of notification modes.
In the set game, the certain notification can be executed, and the notification mode of the certain notification being executed can be changed.
In the set game, the degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous gaming state suggested by the certain notification is higher in the case of transition than in the case of not transitioning to the specific state.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
In a certain period after the completion of the first set game, the notification of the contents related to the second set game (hereinafter, referred to as "first notification") can be executed.
When the specific state transition lottery is won in the final game in the first set game, the notification of the content suggesting the transition to the specific state in the certain period (hereinafter referred to as "second notification"). Is configured to be viable,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 7.
The first notification is a notification composed of a plurality of parts including a first part and a second part performed after the first part.
The second notification is a notification composed of a plurality of parts including a third part and a fourth part performed after the third part.
The first part and the third part are notifications including the same notification contents.
The second part is a notification suggesting that it is the second set game.
The fourth part is a notification suggesting a transition to the specific state.
A game table characterized by that. Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game medium, and one game is completed by deriving the display result to the variable display unit, and the variable display is performed. It is a game table that can generate prizes according to the display result derived to the department.
A state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of states related to the player's advantage, and
Set game control means that can execute control related to set games that can execute multiple games, and
With
The set game control means is a means capable of executing control for executing the set game a plurality of times.
The state setting means is a means capable of setting a predetermined state regarding the profit of the player in relation to the execution of the set game a predetermined number of times.
The state setting means is configured to be able to shift to a specific state when the specific state transition lottery is won.
The specific state is a state different from the predetermined state.
It is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the specific state than to not shift to the specific state.
The specific state is configured so as not to be set across a plurality of times of the set game.
The set game control means is a set game following a certain set game of the first set game after a certain set game (hereinafter, referred to as "first set game") in the set game of the predetermined number of times. (Hereinafter referred to as "second set game"), it is a means capable of executing control to start.
When the specific state transition lottery is won in the first set game in a state other than the specific state, the transition to the specific state is possible in the first set game and the transition in the first set game. It is configured so that it may be possible to shift to the specific state in the second set game without doing so.
Before shifting to the specific state, a specific effect regarding whether or not to shift to the specific state can be executed.
A game table characterized by that.